JP2019208650A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suitably execute a setting operation for the game machine.SOLUTION: When a rear setting switch 905 and an initialization switch 907 are operated with an intermediate block 103 closed with respect to an outer frame 101, a temporary setting notification sound is output when operation of the rear setting switch 905 is completed using a predetermined key and the temporary setting notification sound is stopped on the condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. Thereby, illegal change of a game mode can be preferably suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball game machine.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-202870 A

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a setting operation for a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine comprising: opening / closing means provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support part; and opening detection means capable of detecting whether or not the opening / closing means is open with respect to the support part. Because
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the predetermined setting information;
An input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability by the lottery means;
When the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the predetermined detection state is not detected by the opening detection unit, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is used as the lottery unit. Information setting means that can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by
Information output means for outputting predetermined information when the operation information is input by the input means in a state where the opening detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not established;
When the predetermined information is output, the information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine. .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can perform suitably setting operation with respect to a game machine can be provided.

Front side perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing pachinko machine in open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Flow chart showing an example of nail state related processing Front view of game board in pachinko machine of second embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment The flowchart which shows an example of the main control main process in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows an example of the main control interruption process in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment Flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (A) is a front view showing the right side portion of the game board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, (B) is a partially enlarged view of the right start winning device, (C) is A- of FIG. 20 (B). Cross-sectional view of the right start winning device along line A The flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment Explanatory diagram comparing game specifications in each gaming state Explanatory drawing which concerns on the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment Explanatory drawing which concerns on the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment Explanatory drawing which concerns on the specification of the game in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment The screen figure which shows an example of the display content of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the game state of the high probability state and short time state which occurred after the special game state The flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the post-transition game state display part which were displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the post-transition game state display part which were displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the remaining period display part and the post-transition game state display part which were displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. The screen figure for demonstrating the characteristic of the pachinko machine of 7th Embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment The flowchart which shows an example of the nail state related process in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment The flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion information related process in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment Explanatory drawing which concerns on an example of the penetration countermeasure function with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is equipped Front view of game board in pachinko machine of tenth embodiment Schematic front view of winning device unit Schematic exploded perspective view of the winning device unit viewed from the front side (A) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit along line X1-X1 in FIG. 38, (B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit along line X2-X2 in FIG. 38, (C) is , Simplified sectional view of the winning device unit along line X3-X3 in FIG. The expanded sectional view which expanded the vicinity of the right start prize-winning apparatus in sectional drawing shown in FIG.40 (B). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the movable member from the front right side, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the movable member from the back left side. Cross section viewed from the front when cut along a plane that passes through the pivot shaft that rotates the movable member of the entry restriction mechanism that takes the entry prohibition posture, and the upstream passage portion and the downstream passage portion with respect to the movable member. Figure (A) is a top view of the movable member when the entry restriction mechanism takes an entry prohibition posture, and (B) is a top view of the movable member when the entry restriction mechanism takes an entry allowance posture. Top view of a movable member for explaining the behavior of a game ball in contact with two wall portions formed on the movable member Enlarged front view near the entrance restriction mechanism in the winning device unit Schematic diagram showing an example of the behavior of two game balls that continuously enter the entrance of the grand prize winning device from the passage portion when the approach restricting mechanism is in an approach permitting posture. Schematic diagram for explaining the possibility of the occurrence of ball biting in a large winning device having an entry restriction mechanism Schematic front view of a winning device unit showing an example of a state in which game balls are stacked vertically in the passage section Simplified cross-sectional view of the winning device unit along line YY in FIG. The schematic diagram which shows an example of the behavior of the game ball discharged | emitted from the opening formed ahead of the channel | path part to the front side Timing chart showing timing of detection of game ball by start switch and transition to entry allowable posture in entry restriction mechanism of right start winning device The flowchart which shows an example of the main control main process in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment Timing chart for changing settings using the rear setting switch and initialization switch Timing chart for changing settings using the rear setting switch and initialization switch

  With respect to an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball and ball gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described, and then a modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the structure of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows that the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 are integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Show. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body support means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. The game machine is installed in a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101. It is good also as a structure with which the island facility was equipped with the support mechanism to support, and a part of locking mechanism which locks the main-body part.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. The base end side is configured to be capable of rotating forward with the other end side (right side) serving as a rotating front end side.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided separately at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. Each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 is configured such that, for example, a shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft portion is provided in a shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. It is comprised so that rotation is possible by setting it as the state inserted. In addition, the structure which can rotate the main-body part of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is not limited to the above structure, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft part is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. Removably attached to it. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving it upward. The Thereby, the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

  The front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap the front side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 so as to be pivotable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so that the rear block 104 can be rotated rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. And, it is configured to be supported so as to be removable by a predetermined removal operation.

  The pachinko machine 100 also includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 relative to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the front block 102 relative to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block There is provided a lock operating mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operating mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed with an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 and the movable portion 143 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation with a predetermined operation key on the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 are disengaged, and the front block 102 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By this rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched with respect to the intermediate block 103 between a state where opening / closing is prohibited (open / close prohibited state) and a state where opening / closing is allowed (open / close permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism includes two opening / closing restriction portions 150 </ b> A and 150 </ b> B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restriction portion 150 </ b> C provided in the rear block 104. . The three opening / closing regulating portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 due to the rotation operation, and thereby the open / close prohibited posture corresponding to the open / close prohibited state And an open / close permission posture corresponding to the open / close permission state can be switched. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are in the opening / closing allowable posture, the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 is in an opening / closing allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture may be switched between the open / close prohibited state and the open / close permitted state by at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. Alternatively, it may be configured to move in a certain direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each apparatus move between a plurality of postures.

  Among the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibited state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponding to the remaining portion is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the opening / closing allowable posture only by an operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been increased.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism for restricting the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (a closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitted state that allows the game ball to flow down. The change unit 162 is pushed and pushed to the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow restricting piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement-permitted state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (open state of the front block 102), the pressure of the flow restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. Accordingly, the movement restriction state in which the flow restriction piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 is set. The flow restriction piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in the rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 is provided is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103 is provided.

  Next, each structure of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the back block 104 is demonstrated in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It functions as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly configured by a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that is formed to include the front-view center portion of the front block 102. It is attached. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through the wide area excluding the outer periphery to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. The intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player through the opening 210A.

  1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 that stores game balls and a launch operation device 250 that is operated by a player to launch game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the periphery of the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210, and projects forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A. An upper projecting portion 217, a lower projecting portion 218 located below the upper projecting portion 217 and projecting forward, and an upper projecting portion 217 and a lower projecting portion on the right side of the lower projecting portion 218. A flat portion 219 is formed which is configured by a substantially flat region located on the back side from 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is disposed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visually recognized while closing the opening 210 </ b> A formed penetrating in the front-rear direction in a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the center panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmitting property fitted on the front side of the panel frame 221. 1 and a light transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap on the rear side of the panel frame 221. Yes.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls lent out from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage portion 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. In the storage unit 231, an inflow port 231 </ b> A that allows a game ball to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outflow port (not shown) that allows the game ball to flow out from the storage unit 231 into the pachinko machine 100, A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream from the outflow port is provided. By releasing the discharge port, the game ball is released from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  A game ball acquired according to the progress of the game and a game ball lent according to a lending operation to a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. The storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and a game ball owned by a player is manually inserted through the opening, or a game ball lent out at a game hall is supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a row. When a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) is not performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through an outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. And a ball removal operation member 242 for operating the ball removal mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired as the game progresses mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage part 231 is full, it flows into the storage part 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, even in response to the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 242, the release state is kept until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removal operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252; a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252; It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the injection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launch device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the rotational operation amount. When the contact between the firing handle 252 and the player is not detected by the contact sensor 254, or when the firing operation is invalidated by the operation of the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

  In addition, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided at the back of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, an upper left edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on both the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and an upper left edge. The left side edge portion 211D positioned below 211B and the right side edge portion 211E positioned below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission corresponding to each light emitting portion Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

  The frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light-emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, a left upper frame light-emitting device 272 corresponding to the left upper edge portion 211B, and an upper-right frame light emission corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. The apparatus 273 includes a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 integrates and electrically connects a light emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and the electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G at the upper portion of the opening peripheral edge 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. In addition, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to each of the upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (in the rear of) the opening peripheral edge 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right portion of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, and the like placed in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the card, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills or cards are inserted into the card unit and numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent out. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the remaining amount or the remaining amount is recorded is returned from the card unit according to the returning operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of an input operation different from the shooting operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up / down / left / right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, an apparatus setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player It is possible to execute a production setting operation or the like that enables execution of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the game before the previous time by inputting information, and these operations can be performed by the player or the game hall manager as necessary. It is said that. Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that an operation such as vibration is executed by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and the front block 102 and the rear block 104 are attached so that the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is integrated. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

  3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to the 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to be ejected, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is attached to the back side of the game board 400 and controls the progress of the game in an integrated manner. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notifications.

  In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wires inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 The signal relay device 311 includes a wiring, and has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through-hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that curves smoothly from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, the inner rail 403 that curves smoothly from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and the upper right end of the outer rail 402 And a rebound preventing member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball launched from a launch device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed at a portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 are opposed in parallel from returning to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorption property that prevents a significant recoil of the game ball that has passed the upper center of the game board 400 and directed to the right side through the upper center and returns to the left side again. For example, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the launcher 330 in the direction of the launch path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the launcher 330 was launched but launched without exceeding the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning backward in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inlet 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area, and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape having a large area in the front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area is generally divided into an outer peripheral portion by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is substantially planar by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially planar by the base body 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 sequentially sends out game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). A launching mechanism 333 for injecting a game ball arranged at the launch position, a launching solenoid 334 for driving the launching mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball launched from the launching mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes in accordance with the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure that accommodates the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

  Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, an attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main controller 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372. As a result, not only the rear side (front side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 is operated on the game board 400 by rotating the mounting portion 372. It can be easily confirmed while attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal state of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure that accommodates the sub-control board 940. For example, the sub-control board 940 is housed in a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, like the main control board 920. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, flow-down changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center disposed at the center of the base body 401. A structure 420, a starting device (specifically, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) according to a first special symbol disposed below the central structure 420, a center A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) according to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 434 (specifically, the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning-winning device 432, and the game board 400 On the top right and above and below Winning device that the winning combination communicating actuating device 435 which is arranged above (upstream side) with respect to 433, regular winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower side middle starting winning device 431 B, and a 439B.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. The entry of a game ball into a predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right start winning switch 442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432, lower large prize switch 443 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower large winning device 433, and a top large winning device. An upper prize switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered 434, a combination operation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination actuating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starter 436, and the bottom A non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the grand prize winning device 433; A specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the grand prize winning device 433, and a general prize switch 449A for detecting each of the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B. 449B and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100 can be detected. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starter 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged into the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, upper middle starting winning device 431A, lower middle starting winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower large winning device 433, upper large winning device 434 and general winning devices 439A, 439B The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball that has entered each winning opening is guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. . In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area.

  In the recovery / discharge passage, a launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10) is provided. The launch ball detection switch 451 is configured by, for example, a passage type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls shot in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is provided on the external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). A game ball whose passage is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 in the recovery discharge passage is connected to the game ball circulation device provided in the game hall from the pachinko machine 100 via a discharge port provided in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or an apparatus in which two or more winning devices (for example, the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B) are integrated. The starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A may not necessarily be a winning opening through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. It is good also as a entrance where a ball | bowl is discharge | released again to a game area, without paying out.

  Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B according to the first special symbol does not change the probability of entering the game ball into them, and enters The played game ball is guided to the back side of the base body 401. Further, the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball into the inside. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol. Instead of or in addition to that, the starting device and the general winning device related to the first special symbol. It may be provided in any one or a plurality of 439A and 439B. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operate | moves mechanically.

  The right start prize winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 that changes an entry probability of a game ball to the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism A right entry restricting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) for driving 452. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces that are driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces are the entrance (award opening). The game ball cannot enter the right start prize-winning device 432 by adopting an arrangement that narrows (or closes)), but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the approaching allowable posture, the two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by arranging the parts so that the interval between the parts is increased. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 enters the right when a game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”). In accordance with the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the posture is allowed to enter the predetermined allowable number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower grand prize winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an allowable entry position and an prohibited entry attitude, and a lower entry restriction mechanism. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance posture and the guidance posture causes the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to be a non-specific passage or a specific passage. A sorting mechanism (not shown) for sorting and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the attitude of the sorting mechanism are provided. When the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 is in the entry prohibition posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning entrance), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower outstanding prize device 433. When the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 is in the approach permitting posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower prize-winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. It is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the game state transition, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, an advantageous game state is given to the player as a privilege. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and an upper entry restriction. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning port) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 Is in the allowance for entering position, the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

  In addition, as an approach allowable posture and an entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entering a game ball into the right entry restricting mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured to receive a winning opening (or a winning opening) of each device. In response to a change in posture of the operation member that switches between a special state in which a game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operation member differs depending on each posture I need it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of a game ball such as the right entry restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the game ball in an inaccessible state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed so that the game ball can enter more easily than the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 and the upper prize-winning apparatus 434 when winning a lottery. Specifically, a game ball that has entered the upper middle start prize device 431A or the lower middle start prize device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle start prize switch 441A or the lower middle start prize switch 441B. When a lottery based on the above (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) is won, or a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442 When winning a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453 and the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 takes the approach permitting posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the approach allowable posture, and further switches after the predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. The non-guided posture is returned in response to the stop of the solenoid 465.

  The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the big win lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a player wins a big hit, the player can start a special gaming state at the timing he / she intends. Note that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination actuating device 435 passes, instead of or In addition, either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 may be activated when a predetermined time elapses.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 for displaying symbol change display and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times a game is held. A display device having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

  Specifically, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the game board 400 in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The special symbol display device 471 related to the special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or the second special symbol is displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game is held according to the first special symbol, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game is held related to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are each reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start prize, and whether or not a lottery is executed based on one start prize and a lottery based on the determination A series of games including the start and end of variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle start winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the unit game right related to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of the plurality of light emitting units (a combination of a light emission state including a light emission color (off, on, flashing)). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol have the number of times of holding depending on the combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that displays a normal symbol in a variable manner or a normal symbol that is fixedly displayed in accordance with a lottery result according to the normal symbol. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to normal symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The normal symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal symbol is expressed by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units.

  In addition, the game board 400 is displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420, so that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbols are displayed in a unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variation display and confirmation display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variation display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variation display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variation display and final display of the decorative symbol always start to change at the same timing or stop display as the final display. It is not necessary, and the setting may be such that the change is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, on the game board 400, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) constituted by a 7-segment display is visible when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided in the upper left corner portion of the game board 400. The nail state level display device 474 is configured so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player or is difficult to visually recognize, and cannot be visually recognized by the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, , A position overlapping with the back side of the front block 102 and a position deviating from the light-transmitting viewing portion of the central panel 220).

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Various light emission effects and state notifications by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal game state”) is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as “non-short state”). Correspond.

  When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower grand prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the win. Depending on whether or not, the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-short-time state (hereinafter referred to as the “short-time state”). And a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “low-probability state”) in which the winning probability of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). In the following, it is also referred to as “time saving gaming state”. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game is in a short-time state and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state. The game state (hereinafter also referred to as “probability game state”), which is a “high probability state” (hereinafter, also referred to as “high probability state”).

  The short-time gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state.

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be continued until the next big win, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration in which a gaming state different from the above-described gaming states is further included, or a configuration in which the gaming state is shifted by a condition different from the above-described conditions may be employed.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers and various variation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered one of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by one of the medium start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol is detected. It becomes. If the unit game right related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, jackpot symbol random number and stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the main control board 920 RAM.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the right is not reserved, it is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the game is not in a special game state, when the unit game right related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the end of the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning. If each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units that were held before the current starting winning prize after the special gaming state. It starts after a unit game related to a special symbol.

  In addition, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol in order of the start winning. The configuration may be such that unit advantage control is executed, or the two special symbols are not alternative but can be varied simultaneously.

  In the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery is further based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The types of stop symbols correspond to the types of jackpots, for example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds), A plurality of types of jackpots are set corresponding to the type of gaming state such as a gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state), and a jackpot symbol is set for each type. In the first special symbol lottery, when a big win is not won, a lost symbol different from the big win symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current gaming state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variation pattern random number values, and the number of reserved unit rights related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol The design variation display time is determined, and the design variation pattern is selected. Thereafter, the first special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol variation display (variation effect) on the decoration symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol variation is started. Variation display according to a certain pattern is continued over the display time, and variation display according to the variation pattern is continued over the variation display time in the decorative design. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the lower prize winning device 433 are allowed to enter the prescribed number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of the big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 443 and 444 in each of the allowed entry postures in the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum When the allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

  The lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) ) Will shift to the first allowed entry posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the state shifts to the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the start special winning of the second special symbol is made. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times when starting the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. Also, stop symbol determination according to the second special symbol lottery, decoration symbol variation pattern selection, variation display execution, game state transition control, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Is done.

  When a game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446 in various gaming states, the winning random number for the normal symbol is acquired if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already obtained normal symbol.

  In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning game is won based on the value of the winning random number, and when winning, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lose symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 473 starts the variable display of the normal symbol. In the non-time-short state, the variable pattern is continuously displayed over a predetermined variable display time, and in the time-short state. The variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time-short state. As the predetermined time corresponding to the gaming state elapses, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time-short state (time-short game state and probability variable game state), the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) is longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time-short state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to allow the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of times of transition to the permissible approach posture has not reached the predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, the normal symbol lottery must be won, and further, the game ball enters the right start prize winning device 432 in the permitted entry state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of winning for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the short-time gaming state, but the staying time (for example, approximately) 0.1 seconds) is set to be very short compared to the staying time in the short time state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), so the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol drawing. On the other hand, in the short-time state such as the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player plays a game aiming at the transition to the probability-changing gaming state by winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and then allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage in the subsequent special gaming state. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the game is played aiming to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery before each gaming state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game technique (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which a game ball flows down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays a game using the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays a game using the right-handed gaming method in the short-time gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state. Further, since the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed game technique even in the special game state.

  The player can selectively perform the left-handed game technique and the right-handed game technique by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252. That is, the player can perform the left-handed gaming technique by operating the launch handle 252 with a rotation operation amount such that the game ball does not flow down mainly on the right side of the central structure 420. On the other hand, the player operates the launch handle 252 with a rotational operation amount such that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the central structure 420, that is, with a stronger rotational operation amount than when playing a left-handed game technique. By doing so, a right-handed gaming technique can be performed.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base 501. By connecting the base body 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

  The rear block 104 has a game ball tank 510 serving as a ball storage unit for storing game balls, and rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one row. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530 A payout device 540 that lends out game balls, and guidance as a ball guide unit that guides game balls that have flowed out of the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 for controlling the payout of game balls and the lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and external power A function as a power supply means for converting and outputting power of a predetermined voltage required for various types of devices and the like, and a game ball ejection based on a launch operation on the launch operation device 250 are controlled in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 A relay device 950 that relays signals between the external terminal plate 580 and an external terminal plate 580 that is a substrate that outputs a signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 100 to a management device (not shown).

  The base body 501 is integrally formed of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 positioned behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as a mounted part.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover 503 is not shaped to cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and confirmation, such as a part of the main controller 370, is attached to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window portion for exposure to the window. A large number of air holes 503 </ b> A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of heat generation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility are sequentially supplied to one end side in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game ball is supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction (front-rear direction) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 gradually increases in height as a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage for a substantially bowl-shaped gaming ball having a width through which game balls pass in a row, and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 that rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from the height of the top and bottom to the first level gradually. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed in a vertically long shape so as to continue to the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. The case rail 530 continues downward while curving left and right so that game balls do not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided in the middle portion of the ball path of the case rail 530. The ball breakage detection unit 539 includes a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10). The storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball condition that is not replenished normally.

  The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In accordance with the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released downstream. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by a payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payout of game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned at the lower back side of the rear block 104. It has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board in a model change or the like.

  The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave any trace of opening, like the main control board 920. The substrate case is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

  The power / fire control device 570 includes a power / fire control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / fire control board 900. The power / fire control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. Are accommodated in a sealed substrate case.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the external terminal plate 580 is provided at the upper right end of the rear block 104 as viewed from the rear. The external terminal plate 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during the special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 451, and the like.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launching device according to the operation of the launching operation device 250. A launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of driving voltage (for example, DC 12 volts) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. Power of control voltage (for example, DC 5 volts) for backup, power of backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power are supplied to the power monitoring board 910. The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901. When the power switch 909 is in an off state, the external power capture is stopped. It is to be noted that the power switch 909 is turned off or a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 is removed from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state where the supply of power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped and a state where the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the control voltage power over a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and finish the control so that the current control state can be restored.

  The firing control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the launching device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on a contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and a launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is provided. On the condition that it is not operated, the firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an on state to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 activates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and activates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially fired from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the ON state initialization signal. The initialization switch 907 is not necessarily configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be accommodated in the substrate case 371, and thus illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  Further, when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal receives the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (payout). The game ball payout speed from the device 540 is reduced. The main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Make it faster.

  The power monitoring board 910 is a power monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power / fire control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power / fire control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power source unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the state is a power failure, and an on-state power failure signal is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the on state.

  The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. On the main control board 920, an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily during execution of the control program. And a RAM (not shown) for storing and the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. Yes. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (back up) internal data by supplying a backup voltage from the power / fire control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. As with the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 is an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), ROM (not shown), and RAM (not shown), a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to communicate information. For example, the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 can perform bidirectional information input / output communication. The open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 are connected so that only information input communication in only one direction is possible, and the payout motor 542 has information in only one direction. Only output communication is possible. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may be configured to have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained over a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the case, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

  The sub control board 940 controls operations of various rendering devices, various light emitting devices, various acoustic devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to communicate information. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only information input communication in only one direction is possible. The input operation device 260 is connected to be capable of information communication in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 is connected to be capable of only one-way information output communication.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started upon recovery from a power failure state, and periodic execution (in this embodiment, with a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

  In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition processing S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM) and the normal symbol related to the special symbol Random initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type for determining the variation time, variation pattern, etc. Fluctuation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the counter (part of the RAM), and interrupt permission processing S for permitting interrupts 023 and is repeatedly executed. When a timer interrupt request is generated before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

  In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (part of the RAM) for controlling the execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A stand-by standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like stand up is executed.

  After start-up standby process S1003, determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from initialization switch 907 of power supply / emission control board 900, determination process S1005 of the value of power failure information (part of RAM), storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and it is determined based on these determination results whether or not to save the stored information in the RAM. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure. The counter value related to the unit game in the middle, the counter value stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and a power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value that is the 2's complement of the checksum value calculated in (0) is “0” (determination processing S1007), and thereby the current checksum value and It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the on state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information is stored and terminated when the transition to the power failure state is completed (S1005: N), or saved If the information is not normally held (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a determination process S1010 of whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is a power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initial setting of various types of information including a return of stored information and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By returning the stored information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is returned to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not a power failure value (S1010: Y), various types of information are initialized without returning the retained information (RAM initial setting processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as fraud detection errors immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if has occurred, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. In each of these, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

  After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of transition to the previous power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparation for returning is performed (special gaming state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and a process corresponding to the game situation in the power failure state is executed in the sub-control board 940. The

  After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag is set to determine whether it is a time-short state or a non-time-short state (determination process S1016). In the case (S1016: Y), a time reduction command is output (time reduction command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-short state (S1016: N), a non-time-short command is output (non-time-short command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to a nail state-related process S1222 related to substantial controls such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on various fraud detections (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the nail state related process S1222 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1223 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected at all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is out, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as game progress or monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. The Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of timer interruption is executed twice after the first reception of the power failure signal is detected.

  In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed by “1” larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter relating to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the value after the change is the same as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol. The cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Is referred to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the big hit symbol random number counter and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value “1” larger than the current value, When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The initial random number counter for the special symbol and the initial random number counter for the normal symbol are also the initial random numbers for the special symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

  In the variation counter update process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation time, variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is a value different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  Note that each winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter and each variation type counter related to special symbols and normal symbols are not necessarily configured as described above, and at least a part of the counter is configured as another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using an initial value counter, or may be configured by a random number generating IC without using a program and refer to a value as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or if it is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, whether or not the game is stopped is determined based on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the normal symbol related A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the normal symbol display device 473 is output. Based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right entry restriction solenoid 462, a lower entry restriction solenoid 463, an upper entry restriction solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specific Signal states from each of the passage switch 448, the general winning switches 449A and 449B, and the shot ball detection switch 451 are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, signal states from various switches are read into the input buffer (part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and signals from the various switches are read. Each time, the signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), changes in the detection state of various switches are detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and when the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is on. Thus, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for special symbol and normal symbol variation display, control of each gaming state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, an illegal act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower grand prize winning device 433, and the upper grand prize winning device 434 are forced to move into the allowable approaching posture, and the game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower major prize winning device 433 by vibration. , The right start winning device 432 by radio waves, the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly triggered, the game balls are guided to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, There is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball at an abnormal timing to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 is performed. Detect occurrence.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided in the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of the RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of the RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set on the basis, the big prize counter (predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, launch related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, an intermediate block is provided for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). It is detected whether 103 (refer FIG.1 and FIG.2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by 1 each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, 3) corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 is awarded. In a situation where a ball command is requested and the payout of a prize ball is continuing, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) that has a different number of prize balls than the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter. When the 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, control for holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and if the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  Further, in the special symbol related process S1217, the unit game right holding control related to the second special symbol and the unit game control related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  In the normal symbol related process S1218, the unit game right holding control related to the normal symbol and the unit game control related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control processing S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related processing S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating these devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Nail state related processing S1222>
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the nail state related process S1222 executed in the main control interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the nail state-related process S1222.

  The nail state-related process S1222 is a process of detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and displaying the result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related process S1222 includes first-half processes S1401 to S1405 related to detection of the state of the nail 411, and second-half processes S1501 to S1504 related to display of results based on the detection.

  In the nail state-related process S1222, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B (hereinafter also referred to as “general winning numbers”), and the game balls that have been launched into the game area It is determined whether or not it is in the period (hereinafter referred to as “counting period”) for counting the number (hereinafter also referred to as “number of fired balls”) (S1401). Thus, by counting the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls only during the counting period, the ratio of the number of general winnings to the number of shot balls (that is, the game to the general winning devices 439A and 439B with respect to the number of shot balls) When calculating the ball entry ratio), it is difficult to adversely affect the calculation result due to fraud or averaging of numerical values.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion of S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined count effective period among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. It is good also as a period except a predetermined count invalid period among all the periods currently performed.

  The “counting validity period” may be, for example, a period during which a game ball is fired from the launching device 330. Whether or not the game ball is being fired from the launching device 330 is determined by, for example, the variable resistor 253 that detects the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 252 or the contact that detects that the player is touching the launch handle 252. You may determine by the presence or absence of predetermined | prescribed discharge operation based on the detection state of the sensor 254. FIG. For example, when it is detected by the variable resistor 253 that a rotation operation is applied to the firing handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is being fired from the launching device 330, or the contact sensor 254 When contact with the firing handle 252 is detected by the above, it may be determined that the game ball is being fired from the launching device 330.

  In addition, the “counting valid period” may be a case where a predetermined launch operation is being performed, or a game ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 within the elapsed flow time after the end of the execution. The flow-down elapsed time after completion of execution of the predetermined launch operation is the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) via the route that takes the longest time detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is launched. ), And the elapsed flow time is preferably set to a maximum time actually measured and a sufficient time considering design variations. Further, for example, the shortest path among the times detected by the shot ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is shot is set so that the predetermined time after the predetermined launch operation is started is not set as the counting valid period. The count effective period may be set to a time excluding the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) that passes through.

  The “count invalid period” may be, for example, in a special gaming state. Whether or not the game state is in a special game state can be determined based on, for example, an output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, it can be determined that the special gaming state is in a period from when the signal indicating that the game is in the special gaming state is started to be output from the external terminal board 580 until the output of the signal is completed.

  Further, the “count invalid period” may be, for example, a period in which the previous block 102 is in an open state (that is, a state in which the previous block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is in the open state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10).

  Game balls that entered the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B when the front block 102 is in an open state are not game balls that have flowed down the game area and entered appropriately, but are illegal activities while playing games at the factory inspectors. There is a possibility that the game ball is thrown into the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B by a person who performs the game (hereinafter referred to as a fraudulent person) or a person related to the game hall (for example, an employee of the game hall). By excluding the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state from the counting period, the game balls thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be excluded from the counting target.

  Alternatively, for example, when consecutive insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the count invalid period. As a result, it is possible to remove the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B from the counting target by further continuous insertion after the continuous insertion of the gaming balls to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected.

  It should be noted that whether or not the game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B depends on, for example, the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B within a predetermined time, and the general winning devices 439A and 439B. You may detect from the approach interval of the game ball to approach.

  For example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number (for example, 10) within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) with respect to each of the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the game balls are continuously connected to the general winning devices 439A and 439B. You may detect that it was thrown in. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), a game is entered into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It may be detected that a ball is continuously thrown.

  On the other hand, the “predetermined period” that is the count invalid period after the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), and thereafter It is good also as a period when a game ball is thrown into the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B continuously. “The period in which game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 439A and 439B thereafter” is, for example, after continuous insertion is detected, and subsequently, continuous insertion is detected under the same conditions as the detection. It may be a period of time. Alternatively, considering that the continuous charging is performed intermittently, the continuous charging is performed for several tens of seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or about 1 minute) under the same conditions as the detection of the above continuous charging. The detected period may be “a period during which game balls are thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B continuously thereafter”.

  The invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ball is detected for each of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is a count invalid period for invalidating the count for the entry of the game ball. The first predetermined invalid number (for example, one or two balls) may be counted, and the following fixed number of game balls may be invalidated. The entry of all game balls that are continuously thrown in including the predetermined invalid number may be excluded from the counting target and invalidated. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that a game ball will enter the general winning devices 439A and 439B. For example, a launch operation (for example, a left-handed game technique or Corresponding to the probability that a game ball continuously enters in any of the right-handed gaming techniques), the higher the probability, the shorter the invalid period may be set, and when the probability is low, the invalid period may be set longer. Also, it may be set to a time corresponding to the number to be paid out (the number of payouts) when a game ball enters the general winning devices 439A and 439B. For example, a winning device with a small number of payouts (for example, 3 balls) Is set to a short invalid period (for example, approximately 1.2 seconds), and for a winning device having a large number of payouts (for example, 15 balls), a long invalid period (for example, approximately 2.4). Second) may be set. In addition, as the count invalid period, a time corresponding to a game ball firing time interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set. For example, an invalid period (substantially shorter than a game ball firing time interval). 1.2 seconds or more) may be set, or an invalid period of four times or more (approximately 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Further, it is preferable that the predetermined invalid number is set to be larger as the game ball has a higher probability of entry, and set to be smaller when the probability of entry is low. A plurality of winning devices (for example, a general winning device 439A and a general winning device 439B) are provided with a general winning number counter and a firing ball number counter, respectively, so that the nail state level can be output separately. Well, in this case, in each winning device where the counting is performed, at least one of the level of the game ball entry probability or the number of payouts is set differently, and the length of the invalid period or the predetermined invalid number corresponding to the setting It is preferable that at least one of the settings be different.

  When the previous block 102 is in an open state and a continuous throwing of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, a combination of a plurality of conditions such as setting a subsequent predetermined period as a count invalid period An invalid period may be generated when is established. Thereby, it is possible to suitably exclude the game balls that are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B by the parties on the game hall side from the counting target.

  Alternatively, the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. The “predetermined counting start condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (for example, 11:00 am or 3 pm), or every predetermined period (for example, every 2 hours). It is good also as the count start time. The “predetermined counting start condition” is, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a timing when the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol becomes a predetermined value set as a counting start condition) Or a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a counting start condition. Note that the above counting start time, counting start time interval, and predetermined timing do not necessarily have to be the same every day or every time, and any one of a plurality of different preset settings is selected. The selection order may be a predetermined order (for example, different settings for each day of the week), or each one may be selected by lottery. You may make it change at random. Further, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times a day.

  In addition, the “predetermined period” that is a counting period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied may be, for example, a period until a predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The “predetermined counting end condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1 pm or 6 pm) or a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing as the counting end condition may be, for example, a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed as the counting period, or the winning random number counter according to the first special symbol may be the counting end condition. Or a timing at which a predetermined operation is performed as a count end condition.

  Note that the counting start condition and the counting end condition may be appropriately combined with the above exemplified conditions. For example, a predetermined counting start time may be used as a counting start condition, a predetermined counting end time may be used as a counting end condition, and the winning random number counter according to the first special symbol is predetermined as the counting start condition. The timing may be a counting start condition, and the timing at which a predetermined period as a counting period has elapsed (for example, 30 minutes) may be set as a counting end condition.

  Alternatively, after the supply of power from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol (the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol or the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol) The timing at which the value is acquired at a predetermined Nth time (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) may be used as the count start condition. In this case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired for the Nth time. That is, the counting period may be different based on the value of the winning random number counter acquired in the Nth predetermined time. At this time, the count start condition may be satisfied every time the value of the winning random number counter acquired in the Nth time is acquired.

  Note that the “counting period” serving as the determination criterion in S1401 includes a predetermined counting valid period or a predetermined counting invalid period among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 described above. It is not necessary to be any one of the excluded period or the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901. May be adopted.

  In addition, as a “counting period” serving as a determination criterion in S1401, a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied among all periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is employed. Does not have to be the “predetermined period” after a single type of count start condition is satisfied, and is different in type of count start condition (for example, a predetermined count start time and a predetermined period Each of the predetermined periods after the counting start timing is established may be the “counting period”, or the predetermined period after the counting start condition obtained by combining different types of counting start conditions is the “ The configuration may be a “counting period”.

  If it is determined in S1222 that it is not in the counting period (S1401: N), each process of S1401 to S1405 and S1501 to S1504, which will be described later, is not executed and the process returns (returns) to the main control interrupt process. If it is determined that it is not in the counting period (S1401: N), control may be started from the processing of S1501, and after returning to the main control interrupt processing after executing each processing of S1501 to S1504.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1222 that it is during the counting period (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not entry of a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected (S1402). Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10), the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to each of the switches 449A and 449B (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920). Is set, it is determined that the entry of a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected.

  When it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and the determination process S1404. Execute. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is not detected (S1402: N), the determination process S1404 is executed without executing the process of S1403.

  Specifically, in S1403, when either the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A or the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B is set, the number of general winnings Add “1” to the counter. On the other hand, when both the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449A and the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 449B are set, “2” is added to the general winning number counter. To do.

  Note that the RAM provided with the general winning number counter is supplied with the backup voltage from the power supply unit 901, so that even when the supply of the driving voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, The stored contents of the winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored content of the general winning number counter is retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

  In S1404, it is determined whether or not a shot ball has been detected. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the shot ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 10), a shot ball detection switch detection flag (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the shot ball detection switch 451 is set. If it is set, it is determined that a firing ball has been detected.

  When it is determined that the fired ball has been detected (S1404: Y), the fired ball number counter (a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and the determination process S1501 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fired ball is not detected (S1404: N), the determination process S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1405.

  Specifically, in S1405, when the shot ball detection switch detection flag is set, “1” is added to the shot ball number counter. In addition, since the ball number counter is provided in the RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the RAM of the RAM can be operated by operating a predetermined switch (not shown) as in the general winning number counter described above. As long as the stored information is not erased, the stored content of the shot ball counter is retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state.

  In S1501, it is determined whether or not the previous block 102 is in an open state. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, the front block It is determined that 102 is in an open state.

  When it is determined that the previous block 102 is in the open state (S1501: Y), the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the number of shot balls counter) Value) is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

  That is, as the value calculated in S1502 is closer to a reference value set in advance as a value when the game ball winnings to the general winning devices 439A and 439B are as designed values, the nail 411 (more In detail, it shows that there is a high possibility that the entrances of the prize winning openings of the general winning devices 439A and 439B and the nails 411 provided in the vicinity thereof are in an appropriate state according to the settings at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. In the following description of the present embodiment, the “reference value” is the above-described “reference value set in advance as a value when the game ball winnings to the general winning devices 439A and 439B are as designed”. Suppose there is.

  On the other hand, the farther the value calculated in S1502 is from the reference value, the more the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A, 439B is set from the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. There is a high possibility that it is in a deviated state. That is, the larger the difference, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is greatly deviated from the appropriate state.

  A nail state level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The “nail state level” indicates that the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B) is set with respect to the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. It is information that shows whether it is appropriate or inappropriate at a stepwise level. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within a first range including the reference value (for example, a range having both ends of reference value × ± 5%), the nail state level is appropriate for the state of the nail 411. “1” indicating that

  On the other hand, when the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is set to a value larger than “1”, whereby the nail 411 is appropriately set. Indicates that it may be out of state. For example, when the value calculated in S1502 is a value within a second range set outside the first range (for example, a range where the end on the side away from the reference value is a reference value × ± 10%), The nail state level is “2”, and when it is outside the second range (that is, the side away from the reference value), the nail state level is “3”. That is, the larger the nail 411 is from the appropriate state, the greater the nail state level.

  Next, a process of outputting the nail state level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In this embodiment, in S1505, a numerical value indicating the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 10) configured by a 7-segment display. For example, when the nail state level is “1”, “1” is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. If it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is not in an open state (S1501: N), the processing returns to the main control interrupt processing without executing each processing of S1502 to S1504.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, in the nail state-related process S1222, the update of the general winning number counter (that is, the counting of the general winning number) is performed only during a predetermined counting period, so that it is counted by the general winning number counter. The number of general winnings and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general winnings counted in this manner, illegal continuous input to the general winning devices 439A and 439B, illegal continuous input, average value, etc. The adverse effects of can be made difficult. Thereby, the state of the nail | claw 411 provided in the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B or in the vicinity thereof can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

  For example, when an inspection prior to shipment is performed on the pachinko machine 100 at the factory, the front block 102 is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, and the main control is performed. When it is checked whether the device 370 or the like operates properly, the general winning devices 439A and 439B are continuously charged with game balls with a much higher probability than the probability that the game balls will enter when the player plays a game. Become. If the entrance of the game ball to the continuous general winning devices 439A and 439B is used as a value for determining whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed, the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately used. The performance may not be determined.

  In addition, for example, an unauthorized person who visits a game hall (hall) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed and plays games illegally opens the front block 102 and continuously throws game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. There is a possibility. In this case, although the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is in accordance with the design value, it is possible to determine that the winning of the game ball to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is higher than the design value and not in accordance with the design value. There is sex. Here, in the big winning devices 433, 434, etc. that are not released unless a specific gaming state such as winning a big win is detected, the entry of the gaming ball at an improper timing is detected by the control of the pachinko machine 100, and an abnormal state is detected. Although it is easy to perform control corresponding to the game, it is easy to perform control, but it is possible to pay out a certain number of game balls without receiving a lottery when a game ball enters, or a winning opening where a game ball can always enter regardless of the game state It may be difficult to determine whether such an abnormal state has occurred or due to a normal game for a prize slot (general prize slot) that is given a certain game value such as There is a possibility of fraud targeting the mouth.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, it is possible to make it difficult to adversely affect the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B. Even if it is performed, the actual state of the nail 411 can be suitably reflected in the nail state level. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be appropriately evaluated based on the nail state level.

  In addition, since the illegality on the game hall side is favorably reflected in the nail state level in the nail state level, an outsider (for example, a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine) Can be suitably detected.

  For example, when an official on the game hall side makes a modification to illegally change the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B and the state in the vicinity thereof (the game ball is placed in the winning opening of the general winning prize winning devices 439A and 439B). For example, a case where the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is made inappropriate by modifying the nail 411 to such an extent that the nail 411 cannot be entered at all) is detected. After the amusement hall is closed, the players related to the amusement hall illegally throw game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B so that the performance of the general winning devices 439A and 439B follows the design value. There is a possibility to match the bottom of the numbers to achieve performance. In this way, when the book ends on the numerical value are combined, the state of the nail 411 is appropriate even though the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B is inappropriate. There is a high possibility that the nail state level is calculated.

  On the other hand, among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, a period in which the previous block 102 is in an open state, or a period in which game balls may be continuously thrown into the general winning devices 439A and 439B. (That is, a predetermined period after the illegal consecutive throwing of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected) from the “counting period” of the criterion in S1401, Even if an official on the game hall side continuously throws game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B for book keeping, the continuously thrown game balls can be excluded from being counted by the general winning number counter. . Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown in for inspection before factory shipment or illegally thrown in for bookkeeping, from being reflected in the nail state level, the prizes of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B are won. The actual state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the mouth can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

  In other words, when an official on the game hall side illegally inserts a game ball into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, there is a possibility that the game ball is continuously inserted in order to efficiently perform the illegal operation. By excluding the predetermined period after the illegal consecutive throwing of game balls to the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected from the “counting period” of the determination criterion in S1401, the general winning device 439A is obtained by such illegal consecutive throwing. , 439B can be suitably excluded from the count by the general winning number counter.

  As another example, a related person on the game hall side may adjust the entry ratio of game balls to the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B on that day (ease of entering game balls) before opening a store. The state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B may be illegally changed. In this case, since the entry rate is adjusted higher than the design value on one day and the entry rate is adjusted lower than the design value on another day, the number of general winnings counted by the general winning number counter is Averaged over several days of accumulation, so that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate although the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B is inappropriate. There is a possibility that a nail state level is calculated.

  On the other hand, among all the periods in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, by limiting to a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, it is difficult to average numerical values by accumulation, Thereby, the actual state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B can be suitably reflected in the nail state level.

  Further, the nail state level is calculated from a value obtained by dividing the number of general winnings by the number of fired winnings (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter). The members of the engine can appropriately grasp the state of the nail 411 provided in the vicinity of the entrance of the winning port of the general winning devices 439A and 439B or in the vicinity thereof from the nail state level.

  In particular, the count of the number of shot balls used for calculating the nail state level (that is, the update of the number of shot balls counter in S1405) is the count of the number of general prizes used for calculating the nail state level (the update of the general prize number counter in S1403). In the same manner as in (), since it is performed only during a predetermined counting period, the value (the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter) calculated in S1502 is set at the entrance of the winning port of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It can be obtained as a value that suitably reflects the actual state of the nail 411 provided in the vicinity thereof (more specifically, the state of the nail 411 in a predetermined period in which the number of general winnings is counted).

  Further, since the calculated nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 on the condition that the front block 102 is in the open state, the nail state level is set to the nail state when the player is not playing a game. It can be displayed on the level display device 474. Therefore, the player does not recognize that information irrelevant to the game such as the nail state level is displayed, and the player is distrusted with the game because the information irrelevant to the game is displayed. Can be suitably suppressed.

  The nail state level displayed on the nail state level display device 474 is obtained by dividing the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the number of shot balls counter) into three stages. An outsider (for example, a member of an inspection institution of a gaming machine) determines whether the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B is appropriate. It is easy to judge from the display contents of the level display device 474.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment has a setting change function for setting a game ball exit rate (machine discount, payout rate). In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 14 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. The game board 400X is provided with a flow changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 and a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base body 401 in the same manner as the game board 400. The middle start winning device 2431 that is the starting device related to the first special symbol arranged on the lower side and the right that is the starting winning device related to the second special symbol arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 The start winning device 2432, the lower large winning device 2434 disposed below the middle start winning device 2431, the upper large winning device 2433 disposed below the right starting winning device 2432, and the lower large General winning devices 2439A and 2439B arranged on the left and right sides of the winning device 2434 are provided.

  The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-described middle start winning device 2431 and the like (see FIG. 16), and to a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball. For example, a middle start winning switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431, a right start winning switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432, and a game ball that has entered the top large winning device 2433. The upper prize winning switch 2443 for detecting the game, the lower major prize winning switch 2444 for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 2434, the combination operation switch 445, the start switch 446, and the non-large prize winning device 2433 formed inside. A non-specific path switch 2447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown), and a specific path switch for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed in the upper prize winning device 2433 2448, general winning switches 449A, 44 for detecting game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, respectively. B, etc. are installed on the game board 400X.

  The entrance portions of the game balls of each winning device, specifically, the middle starting winning device 2431, the right starting winning device 2432, the upper large winning device 2433, the lower large winning device 2434, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B constitute a winning opening. The game balls that have entered the winning holes are guided through a through hole formed in the base body 401 to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401. In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area.

  A launch ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 16) is provided in the recovery / discharge passage. The launch ball detection switch 451 is configured by, for example, a passage type sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls shot in the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is provided on the external terminal board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. 580 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). A game ball whose passage is detected by the launch ball detection switch 451 in the recovery discharge passage is connected to the game ball circulation device provided in the game hall from the pachinko machine 100 via a discharge port provided in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. (Not shown). When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  The right start prize winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 2452 that changes an entry probability of a game ball to the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism A right entry restricting solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16) for driving 2452. The right entry restriction mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by a right entry restriction solenoid 2462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning port). Although the game ball cannot enter the right start prize-winning device 2432 by taking the arrangement, when the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 is in the allowed entry posture, the movable piece guides the game ball into the entrance and takes the game. The ball can enter the right start winning device 2432. When the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 wins in a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”) based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the normal symbol is detected by the start switch 446, the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 In accordance with the driving by the restriction solenoid 2462, it shifts to the approach allowing posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the upper prize winning device 2433 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowable posture and an entry prohibited posture, and an upper entry restriction. The upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 (see FIG. 16) that changes the posture of the mechanism 2453 and the transition between the non-guided posture and the guided posture causes the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 2433 to be a non-specific passage or a specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) that distributes and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 16) that changes the orientation of the distribution mechanism and switches the guidance destination of the game ball are provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 closes the entrance (winning port), but the game ball cannot enter the upper prize device 2433. When the upper entry restricting mechanism 2453 is in the approach permitting posture, the upper entry restricting mechanism 2453 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 2433. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 2433 is in a non-guided posture in which the sorting mechanism protrudes forward, the game ball is guided to a non-specific passage, and in a guiding posture in which the sorting mechanism immerses backward. It is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the game state transition, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, a gaming state advantageous to the player as a privilege (for example, probability change) Gaming state).

  As shown in FIG. 14, the lower prize-winning device 2434 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an allowed entry posture and an entry prohibited posture, and a lower entry restriction. A lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 16) that changes the posture of the mechanism 2454 is provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 closes the entrance (winning port) so that the game ball cannot enter the lower large prize device 2434, but the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 Is in the approaching allowance posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 2454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize-winning device 2434.

  A game ball can enter the upper winning device 2433 and the lower winning device 2434 when winning a lottery. Specifically, the winning lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 is won. Or a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the right start prize winning device 2432 relating to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 2442 In this case, at least one of the upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 or the lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 takes the entry allowable posture for a predetermined time over a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 to the approach allowable posture, and further switches after the predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. In response to the stop of the solenoid 2465, the non-guided posture is restored.

  Further, on the game board 400X, a nail state level display device 474 (see FIG. 16) constituted by a 7-segment display can be visually recognized in a state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 ( For example, it is provided in the upper left corner portion of the game board 400. The nail state level display device 474 is configured so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player or is difficult to visually recognize, and cannot be visually recognized by the player when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, , A position overlapping with the back side of the front block 102 and a position deviating from the light-transmitting viewing portion of the central panel 220).

  Here, various game states and transitions between game states will be described. When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the top prize winning device 2433) during the special game state that shifts based on the win. Depending on whether or not, the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. When the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to the short-time game state (that is, the game state that is in the short-time state and has a low probability state). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to a probability change game state (that is, a game state that is in a short time state and a high probability state).

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be continued until the next big win, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration in which a gaming state different from the above-described gaming states is further included, or a configuration in which the gaming state is shifted by a condition different from the above-described conditions may be employed.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400X will be described in chronological order. When a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol in various gaming states is detected by the middle start winning switch 2441 (see FIG. 16), the first special symbol is started. If the unit game right related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, jackpot symbol random number and stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the main control board 920 RAM.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started in the game board 400 in the same manner as the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the starting winning of the first special symbol.

  When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, and in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol on the game board 400 Similarly, based on the acquired jackpot symbol random number, the type of stop symbol (hit symbol) corresponding to the jackpot winning of the first special symbol lottery is determined.

  After the first special symbol lottery, similarly to the game board 400, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. Thereafter, the change display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the change display (variation effect) of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 479 are started in the same manner as in the game board 400, The stop symbols related to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are displayed in a definite manner as the variable display time elapses.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special game state, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 of the upper prize winning device 2433 are allowed to enter the prescribed number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of the big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 2443 and 2444 in each of the allowed entry postures in the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454, or a predetermined maximum When the allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. After that, after elapse of a predetermined entry prohibition time, either the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 returns to the entry allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

  The upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 is configured such that only one of the upper entry restriction mechanisms 2454 or the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 takes the entry allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period) ) Will shift to the first allowed entry posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the state shifts to the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, a start winning of the second special symbol is made. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times when starting the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. Also, stop symbol determination according to the second special symbol lottery, decoration symbol variation pattern selection, variation display execution, game state transition control, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Is done.

  When a game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446 in various gaming states, the winning random number for the normal symbol is acquired if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game related to the normal symbol is performed in the same manner as in the case of the game board 400. When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry restriction of the right start winning device 2432 is displayed after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. The mechanism 2452 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-short state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 2432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the short time state (the short time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state), the predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) that is longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 2432 is in the non-short time state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to allow the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum allowable entry time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of times of transition to the approaching allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, the player must first win in the normal symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start winning device 2432 in the permitted entry state of the right start winning device 2432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability of winning for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the short-time gaming state, but the staying time (for example, approximately) 0.1 seconds) is set to be very short compared to the staying time in the short time state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), so the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol drawing. On the other hand, in the short-time state such as the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player plays a game aiming at the transition to the probability-changing gaming state by winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and then allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage in the subsequent special gaming state. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the game is played aiming to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery before each gaming state ends. Therefore, the player plays the game using the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays the game using the right-handed gaming method in the short-time gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state. Further, since the upper prize-winning device 2433 and the lower prize-winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special game state.

  FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15, a back setting switch 905 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The back setting switch 905 is a setting valid for enabling a setting operation for setting the ball-off rate of the pachinko machine 100 in any one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages and 9 stages). Device.

  Changing the setting of the ball exit rate by inserting a predetermined key (not shown) into the back setting switch 905 and rotating it to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial position). Can be validated (allowed). In a state in which the change in the setting of the pitching rate is enabled as described above, the setting change of the pitching rate is effectively performed by performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907).

  When the change in the setting of the pitch rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, it can be said that the change in the setting of the pitching rate by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is a change in the game mode setting.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first hit probability (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery) according to each stage set by the setting change of the pitch rate (that is, the game mode setting change). Winning probability), probability variation continuation rate (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the probability variation gaming state from the normal gaming state (probability variation entry rate), and the special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in the probability variation gaming state The game mode can be selected from any of nine game modes having different combinations with the probability of transition to the probability variation game state after the special game state. Therefore, when the change in the starting rate (game mode setting change) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are set so that the first hit probability and the continuation probability according to the set stage are obtained. The winning rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability).

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a top type having a very low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability variation continuation rate, and a middle type having a medium initial probability and a moderate probability change continuity rate. You can select the type and the bottom type, which has a much higher initial hit probability but a much lower probability variation rate. Further, in each of these types, a three-stage probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a probability setting state) in which the initial hit probability of each type is subdivided to be smaller than the width of the initial hit probability between the types, that is, The first stage probability having the lowest initial hit probability among the three stages, the second stage probability being the second lowest initial hit probability, and the third stage probability having the highest initial hit probability can be selected.

  In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning in the middle start prize winning device 2431 and the right start prize winning device 2432 is smaller than in other types, but the prize balls associated with winning in the upper prize winning device 2433 and the lower major prize winning device 2434 are as follows. The number is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of winning balls associated with winning in the middle start winning device 2431 and the right starting winning device 2432 is larger than in other types, but accompanying the winning in the upper large winning device 2433 and the lower large winning device 2434. The number of prize balls is lower than other types.

  Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same number for any of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine from the number of winning balls whether the setting is a top type, middle type, or bottom type, and the gameability to guess which type is set for a long time. Can be added.

  In addition, the profit rate for the player changes according to the stage of the probability setting state for any of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for any type The profit rate for the player is set to be substantially the same. For this reason, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit per certain period (for example, one day) acquired by the game hall side can be easily predicted, and the game hall can be easily managed.

  Note that the game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the starting rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the probability variation continuation rate as described above. Any of continuation rates may be sufficient. In addition, a lottery probability other than the initial hit probability and the probability variation continuation rate, for example, the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery The probability that a small hit is selected in the game, the probability change entry rate (in this embodiment, the entry rate to the probability change game state via the winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability change game state that has transitioned after the special game state (For example, the probability that the end of the probability variation game state is selected in the falling lottery performed each time the symbol variation display is executed during the probability variation game state). It may be a combination of two or more.

  A setting display device 906 is provided above the back setting switch 905. When the setting change of the pitch rate (game mode setting change) is effectively performed by operating the back setting switch 905, setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. . The setting display information is composed of a combination of a letter representing a type and a number representing a probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type are represented by alphabetic letters “T”, “M”, and “B”, respectively. In each type of probability setting state, the first stage probability is represented by “1”, the second stage probability is represented by “2”, and the third stage probability is represented by “3”.

  Therefore, for example, in the case of the top-type first-stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “T1”, and in the case of the middle-type third-stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “M3”, and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the case of the bottom-type second-stage probability game mode is “B2”.

  FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the back setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay unit 903.

  The signal relay unit 903 relays an on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the back setting switch 905 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). In the main control board 920, the game mode is allowed to be changed in response to receiving the ON setting signal from the back setting switch 905. The signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 17) in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

  The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is started upon returning from the power failure state, similarly to the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, parts different from the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the output state of the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 of the power / fire control board 900 after the stand-by standby process S1003 The determination process S2001 is performed.

  Specifically, when the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in an on state indicating that the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), information on substantially the entire area of the RAM. RAM clear processing S2002 for erasing is executed. Specifically, in the RAM clear process S2002, information in substantially all areas except for the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted.

  The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined game modes (9 types in the present embodiment), and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. ing. Accordingly, the RAM clear process S2002 erases information in substantially all areas except for the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920, and enters a state in which setting change is permitted.

  When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying a game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. That is, the setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is displayed on the setting display device 906.

  Next, a setting change process S2003 for changing the setting of the game mode is executed until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. Note that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off when the back setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

  The game mode setting is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, an order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example,... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ... Are determined in advance, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed in accordance with the order every time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

  Each time the change is made, a value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM as setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed in the setting display device. Is displayed at 906.

  Accordingly, a setting changer such as a game hall administrator can use the initialization switch 907 until the game mode desired to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After repeating the pressing, the game mode selection can be completed by causing the middle start winning device 2431 to win a game ball. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the middle start winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

  When the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), a RAM change that newly initializes various types of information other than information related to game mode setting (ie, setting correspondence information) to the RAM A setting process S2005 is executed. Thereby, the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game proceeds in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

  After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 for outputting a set command indicating completion of the RAM setting to the payout control board 930 is executed. The payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to a normal game process by receiving the set command output from the main control board 920 and recognizes in which game mode it operates. it can.

  After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed. In addition, after the stand-by standby process S1003, when the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the drawing) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is periodically (this embodiment) similar to the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. Is a process executed by interrupting the main process (with a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)).

  Hereinafter, parts different from the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, as one of the processes executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207: N) , A setting suggestion information related process S2021 described later with reference to FIG. 19 is executed after the nail state related process S1222.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion information related process S2021. The setting suggestion information-related process S2021 is a process of outputting the setting suggestion information when the condition set as the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied.

  Here, the “setting suggestion information” is a plurality of stages in which the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) can be set in advance (steps). In the present embodiment, it is information suggesting which of the nine types of gaming modes, information that can completely identify which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is available, and setting Only a part of the correspondence information (for example, only the type) may be identifiable information, and the selection rate may be set to be different depending on which of the nine types of correspondence information is set. For example, different information may be set corresponding to the type of setting correspondence information, for example, a large value for the top type among the numbers 1 to 9. Is selected with high probability In the middle type, an intermediate value of “5” is most selected, and numbers that are larger or smaller than the intermediate value of “5” are less likely to be selected. Although it is not clear which type is selected, the number as the setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

  In the setting suggestion information related process S2021, a determination process S1601 for determining whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503 of the nail condition related process S1222 (see FIG. 13) Do. Specifically, in the determination process S1601, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or higher. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the general winning number counter counts the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B.

  If it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the nail state level (S1601: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the process of S1606, specifically, control data for displaying setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on a predetermined display unit is set. The predetermined display unit may be a symbol display device such as a decorative symbol display device 479 or a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

  For example, when the setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative symbol display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. In response to the reception of the command, the sub control board 940 displays setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, the right corner) of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  The setting suggestion information displayed and output by the processing of S1606 may be a combination of an alphabet representing a type and a number representing a probability setting state, similar to the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906. It may be a character indicating each game mode, or may be a numerical value, symbol, figure, color, text, or the like indicating each game mode, or a sensual expression such as “may be a high probability setting!” It may be a text to be shown, or may be a graphic or the like in which each game mode can be identified in the form of a bar graph.

  Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is not limited to information that can completely identify which of nine types of setting correspondence information, and which of nine types of setting correspondence information is present. Information that can be guessed by the player, for example, information that allows the player to guess the setting by setting at least a part of the selection rate corresponding to which of the nine types of setting correspondence information. There may be. For example, if the color set with 10 levels of shade is the top type, the darker color is selected with higher probability, and if it is the middle type, the intermediate color is most selected and becomes darker or lighter than the intermediate color. If it is the bottom type, the color is less likely to be selected, and the lighter color is selected with a higher probability. Although it is not clear which type it is, it is possible to guess by checking the color as the setting suggestion information. It may be information suggesting at least one of the type and the probability setting state, and in this case, it is not limited to the color, and may be a plurality of types of characters having different selection rates for each type or for each character. The character type may correspond to the type, and the character size may change in accordance with the probability setting state.

  Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured by a part of the variable display executed by the special symbol lottery, or the setting suggestion information may be displayed depending on the type of the symbol in the variable display. Well, for example, the probability setting that is advantageous to the player as the probability setting state makes it easier to select a specific symbol (for example, a symbol including the number “7”) or includes a number “1” to “9”. You may make it easy to select the symbol containing a big number among symbols. Here, the number of times that the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to one time, and the processing of S1606 is repeated a plurality of times when the output condition of one setting suggestion information is satisfied, so that a plurality of setting suggestion information is output. For example, information output may be performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) determined each time when the setting suggestion information is output once, or the number of times of output by lottery may be different. Alternatively, the number of times may vary depending on the game situation at the stage where the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable that the number of times that the setting suggestion information is displayed increases as the player continues to fire without stopping the firing. For example, the execution of the variable display is suspended. As the number of times increases, the number of times that the setting suggestion information is output may be increased, or the number of times that the start prize is generated in the situation where the execution of the variable display is suspended up to the upper limit and corresponds to the number of times. As the number of times increases, the setting suggestion information may be displayed more frequently.

  The output of the setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 is not necessarily a display output to a predetermined display unit, and a specific sound output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 (for example, output in other situations) High sound that is not “cue”), specific light emission by the panel light emitting device 490 and the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (for example, iridescent light emission that is not emitted in other situations) or at least partly in other situations The light emitting part that emits light at all times may be turned off for a certain time or longer. In such a case, using the light emission or extinction of light by the board surface light emitting device 490, the board surface of the game board 400X is turned off for about a few seconds (for example, about 1 second) at the timing when the game ball is launched by the launching device 330, and then light is emitted again. By doing so, you may make it perform what is called a "delay effect."

  Note that the output of the setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 is not necessarily a display output to a predetermined display unit, but is an audio output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282, a panel light emitting device 490, and a frame light emitting device. Light emission by 271 to 275 may be used. In the processing of S1606, the establishment of other conditions such as determining whether to output setting suggestion information by lottery may be used as a condition for outputting the setting suggestion information, and a predetermined probability when the processing of S1606 is executed. The setting suggestion information may be output (for example, with a probability of approximately 1/10).

  In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1602 is performed to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. Specifically, in the determination process S1602, the setting suggestion is made when a game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B. It is determined that the information output condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1602: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

  In the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, a determination process S1603 is performed to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the start winning (starting condition) generation interval. Specifically, in the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period (for example, during a launch operation in which a game ball is being fired from the launcher 330 in the normal game state), the first special symbol or the second special symbol. New start prizes (that is, winning of game balls to the middle start prize device 2431 or the right start prize device 2432) are generated even after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when a situation in which the start condition of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is not satisfied occurs. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the start winning generation interval (S1603: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

  The start winning generation interval (that is, the elapsed time since the last start winning) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940 and uses a predetermined command transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the start winning of each special symbol. The interval of the reception timing of (for example, a hold command) is measured as the start winning generation interval. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a predetermined timer or counter provided on the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the start winning that occurred last time and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub-control board 940.

  In the determination process S1603, a new special symbol will be displayed even if a predetermined period has elapsed after the start condition of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is established during the predetermined game period. When a situation in which the start condition is not satisfied occurs within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within one hour after the first occurrence of the situation), a setting suggestion information output condition It may be determined that is established. Alternatively, a situation in which a new special symbol start condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined period elapses after a special symbol start condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period is at least once within a predetermined monitoring period. When the cumulative number of periods that have occurred and the special symbol start condition has not been met and the new special symbol start condition has been met reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period, a setting suggestion It may be determined that the information output condition is satisfied. In addition, the number of times that a new special symbol start condition is satisfied before a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) start condition is satisfied. When a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) occurs, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. For example, when the special symbol start condition is satisfied many times in a short period of time, the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. Then, it may be determined.

  As described above, in the determination processing S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information-related processing S2021, as a setting suggestion information output condition, a predetermined winning device (for example, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, which are provided in the game board 400X) For various predetermined conditions relating to the entry of the game ball into the start winning device 2431 and the right start winning device 2432), it is determined whether or not the conditions are satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the process of S1606.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, when it is in the special gaming state (S1604: Y), it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition in the special gaming state is satisfied. Processing S1605 is performed. Specifically, in the determination process S1605, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 during the special game state, It is determined that the output condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition in the special gaming state is satisfied (S1602: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

  Here, in the special game state, in order to store excessive game balls from the ball overflow switch 249 in the storage unit 241, the ball removal operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242 is not performed and the discharge port 241 </ b> B. The situation in which the ball is closed must continue for a certain time or more, and it is possible to select whether or not to perform this ball removal operation according to the player's intention. For this reason, in a situation where the discharge port 241B is always opened, the game that knows that the setting suggestion information output condition is not satisfied, and the output of the ball overflow signal is the setting suggestion information output condition. For example, the setting suggestion information output condition can be easily satisfied. As a result, it is possible to add new game characteristics such as granting an indirect privilege that cannot be directly gained value to some players, and an operation different from the launch operation. The game can be added with a new game property that allows the player to acquire setting suggestion information.

  In the determination process S1605, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper prize winning device 2433 or the lower major prize winning device 2434 during the special gaming state is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 8 in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round). The setting suggestion information is output when a single game ball enters the grand prize winning device 2433, 2434) or when the number of times of the probable gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) during the special gaming state. It may be determined that the condition is satisfied. In addition, a special game state in which the launch operation is stopped so that no game ball enters the big winning devices 2433 and 2434 in a predetermined round as an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to the player's intention. A new game in which the player acquires setting suggestion information by performing a launch operation that loses the opportunity to acquire some prize balls, such as generating a start winning of the middle start winning device 2431 by performing a left-handed gaming method in Sex may be added.

  Therefore, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021 described above, the output of the setting suggestion information is executed by the process of S1606 when predetermined output conditions for various setting suggestion information are satisfied.

  The nail state level is information indicating in a stepwise level whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. If this is the case, the nail 411 may fall out of the proper state, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Similarly, even if a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the start winning of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) occurs, the new special symbol start condition If there is a situation that does not hold, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol start winning (ie, a game ball winning to the middle start winning device 2431 or the right start winning device 2432), such as the state of the nail 411, This may cause a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, in the determination process S1601 or the determination process S1603, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the nail state level or the start winning generation interval. , It is possible to suggest that the player has a low game ball launch rate (machine discount, payout rate) in the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to increase the number of materials for determining whether or not there is continuation and to allow the player to make a suitable determination.

  In the general winning device 2439B, a game that has not entered the right start winning device 2432 or the top prize winning device 2433 when a game is played by the right-handed gaming method in the special gaming state, the short-time gaming state, or the probability variation gaming state. A ball enters. Therefore, when a game ball enters the general winning device 2439B, it is determined in the determination process S1602 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the condition is satisfied. In the case of performing the game, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of the game ball entering the general winning device 2439B even if the game ball does not enter the target right start winning device 2432 or the upper prize winning device 2433.

  In addition, receiving a ball overflow signal during the special game state indicates that a large number of game balls of a certain level or more have been acquired during the special game state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special gaming state, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in the determination process S1605, and the setting suggestion information is output on the basis of the establishment, thereby allowing the setting suggestion information to be output. Setting suggestion information can be given to the player as a privilege when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special symbol and decorative symbol variable display time (variable time) performed in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) in the special symbol related processing S1217. ) Is configured to be selectable corresponding to the currently set game mode.

  Specifically, for a plurality of types of variable display times that can be selected, a predetermined game mode that can be set is assigned in advance, and a lottery is selected to determine whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode. In this case, the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. The variation patterns of various variation display times that can be selected for the game modes that are settable in advance are stored in advance as a table in the ROM of the main control board 920.

  Note that the allocation of the variable display time to the game mode predetermined to be settable may be configured such that the same variable display time is allocated to two or more game modes, such as for each game mode type, A configuration may be adopted in which different variable display times are allocated to each of the game modes of each stage that are determined in advance.

  Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set game mode is performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a win. It may be a configuration that is performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery is not winning.

  In the special symbol related process S1217, by selecting the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the variation display time of the variation display time according to the currently set game mode is displayed. Executed. Thereby, the player can guess (recognize) the type of game mode that has been set according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the allocation of the variable display time to the game mode predetermined to be settable is the most advantageous game mode (for example, the third-stage probability of each type) among the game modes of each level predetermined to be settable. In other game modes, a long variable display time may be easily selected from various variable display times that can be selected for a predetermined game mode. By making the variable display time for the advantageous game mode longer, the player plays the game paying attention to the length of time for the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the most advantageous game mode is set. Can be expected.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the longer the variable display time is assigned, the higher the advantage of the game mode that is set in advance so as to be settable. Thereby, the player can estimate the advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set gaming mode is displayed and output. It is possible to appropriately recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the game ball launch rate (machine discount, payout rate).

  Further, since the variation pattern of the variation display time according to the currently set game mode is selected, the player preferably selects the type of game mode set according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Can be recognized.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment in the arrangement positions of some devices in the flow path in the right part of the gaming area and part of the specifications in each gaming state. ing.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment has a setting change function for setting a game mode such as a big hit probability and a probability variation continuation rate, like the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. The maximum allowable entry time of the right grand prize-winning device 1434 to be opened is configured to differ depending on the game mode changed by changing the setting of the ball exit rate. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, and the description is omitted.

  First, a structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (C). FIG. 20A is a front view showing the right side portion of the game board 400A in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 20B is a partially enlarged view of the right start winning device 1432. FIG. FIG. 20C is a cross-sectional view of the right start winning device 1432 along the line AA in FIG.

  In FIG. 20A, the outline of the main structure provided in the game area is shown. 20A and 20B, the right start winning device 1432 and the right big winning device 1434 are both shown as schematic cross-sectional views with the front plate portion cut away, and the cross-sectional views. In FIG. 2, cross-sectional hatching is omitted. In FIG. 20 (B), the protrusion part 1538 provided in the wall surface of the front side which comprises the ball channel | path part 1611 is illustrated with a dashed-two dotted line, and illustration of protrusion part 1537, 1538 is shown in FIG. 20 (A). Omitted.

  In FIG. 20A, a state in which both the entry restriction mechanism 1452 and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 are in the entry prohibition posture is illustrated by a solid line, while in FIG. 20B, the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is entered. A state of the allowable posture is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. 20A and 20B, for reference, a part of the game ball flowing down the game board 400A is illustrated and a part of the flow path of the game ball is indicated by an arrow. . In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 20C, cross-sectional hatching is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, the game board 400A has a right start winning device 1432 disposed on the lower side with respect to the starting device 436 and a left side with respect to the right starting winning device 1432 as a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment. And a right big prize device 1434 arranged.

  The right start winning device 1432 is a winning device that functions as a start winning device related to the second special symbol, similar to the right start winning device 2432, and is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed the start device 436 can reach. Yes. The right start prize winning device 1432 drives an entry restriction mechanism 1452 that changes an entry probability of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowance attitude and an entry prohibition attitude, and a right entry restriction that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) which is a solenoid similar to the solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 16) is provided. Hereinafter, the entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 will be described as an “entry restriction solenoid 1462” for convenience.

  The entry restriction mechanism 1452 includes a movable piece that is driven by an entry restriction solenoid 1462. When the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece is disposed so as to protrude forward so as to close the entrance (winning port) of the right start winning device 1432, and the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture. In such a case, the movable piece is arranged so as to be immersed backward so as to open the entrance (winning port) of the right start winning device 1432.

  Thus, when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 1432, but when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball is in the right start prize winning The device 1432 can be entered. The entry restriction mechanism 1452 has a predetermined number of times according to the drive by the entry restriction solenoid 1462 when the game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the normal symbol is won by the normal symbol lottery based on detection by the start switch 446. And it shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined time. It should be noted that when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 shifts to the entry allowable posture based on winning in the normal symbol lottery, a prescribed number (for example, ten pieces) allowed for one entry allowable posture in the entry restriction mechanism 1452 Is detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum allowable entry time to elapse, and the number of times of transition to the entry allowable posture is determined. Even if the predetermined number of times has not been reached, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  In the case where the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 constitutes a downwardly inclined surface that is lowered to the left in the front view of the gaming machine. In addition, it is preferable that the inclination of the downward inclined surface which falls to the left is a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane, for example, 5 degrees.

  The right start winning device 1432 opens upward with respect to the upstream side portion of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture, and enters from the entrance of the right start winning device 1432. The first downflow passage portion 1532A through which the game ball can pass and the upper slope opening on the downstream side of the first downflow passage portion 1532A on the descending inclined surface enter from the entrance of the right start winning device 1432 And a second downflow passage portion 1532B through which the game ball can pass.

  The first downflow passage portion 1532A is configured as a passage having a passage width in which game balls can enter one by one. A right start winning switch 1442A similar to the right start winning switch 2442 is provided on the downstream side of the first downflow passage portion 1532A as detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downflow passage portion 1532A. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the right start winning switch 1442A includes the approximate center of the path through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B and the starter 436, as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Are arranged so that the approximate center of the passage through which the game ball passes substantially coincides with the top view.

  Further, the right start winning switch 1442A has an intersection prohibition posture at an intersection of the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A on a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the approximate center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B. Arranged at a position where the distance L1 (see FIG. 20 (B)) between the intersection with the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of an entry restricting mechanism 1452 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Is done. That is, the first downflow passage portion 1532A is in contact with the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture in a straight line extending in the vertical direction through the approximate center of the passage through which the game ball passes in the right start winning switch 1442B. A distance L1 between the intersection and the intersection of the right start winning switch 1442A and the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A is configured to have a length substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

  The right start winning switch 1442B is a game ball centered on a straight line extending in the vertical direction passing through the approximate center of the passage through which the game ball passes, and the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture. The distance from the contact point between the game ball in contact with the lower surface (that is, game ball P) and the lower surface of the movable piece to the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A may be the distance L1.

  Alternatively, a right start winning switch 1442A is obtained from a contact point between a game ball that contacts both the passage wall of the first flow-down passage portion 1532A and the lower surface of the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture and the lower surface of the movable piece. The longest distance among the distances to the upper end of the distance may be the distance L1.

  The “distance from the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A to the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A from the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture” is the right start winning prize. It may be a distance from the upper end of the device constituting the switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452. From the upper end of the detection position in the right start winning switch 1442A, the entry restriction mechanism The distance to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece 1452 may be used.

  Further, the “length approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball” does not necessarily need to match the diameter of the game ball, and may be one or more times the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable that the length is not more than double, and the one closer to the diameter of the game ball is suitable because it is possible to quickly detect the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 1432.

  Further, by placing the right start winning switch 1442A at a position where the distance L1 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first flow-down path portion 1532A is within the detection range by the right start winning switch 1442A. Even when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 shifts from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture immediately after entering the game, the game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452. Therefore, since the behavior change of the game ball due to the contact with the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 can be suppressed, the game ball that has already been detected by the right start winning switch 1442A is erroneously detected again by the right start winning switch 1442A. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of problems such as

  The arrangement position of the right start winning switch 1442A is the longest distance L1 among the distances from the upper end of the right start winning switch 1442A to the lower surface of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 in the entry prohibition posture. However, the length is not limited to the length of the game ball, but may be a position shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Even in this case, the entry of the game ball to the right start winning device 1432 can be quickly detected.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the first downflow passage portion 1532A is gradually upstream of the right start winning switch 1442A so that the passage width approaches the diameter of the game ball as the right starting winning switch 1442A is approached. It has a section that becomes smaller (hereinafter, this section is also referred to as a “gradual change section”). In the gradual change section, the passage width at the end position of the gradual change section is preferably equal to or larger than the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A, and is substantially equal to the passage width of the right start winning switch 1442A. Is preferred. Further, the gradual change section may be provided in the entire region of the upstream side of the right start winning switch 1442A or almost the entire region, or may be provided in a partial region upstream of the right start winning switch 1442A.

  The second downward passage portion 1532B has an opening that is an entrance portion wider than an opening that is an entrance portion of the first downward passage portion 1532A, and is configured to have a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter simultaneously. On the upstream side, the second flow-down passage portion 1532B is arranged on the downstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 on the upstream side (in the present embodiment, the left side in the front view of the gaming machine). At the downstream side, it is configured as a passage through which the game balls collected on the upstream side pass one by one.

  A right start winning switch as a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second downstream passage portion 1532B downstream of the passage portion through which the game balls in the second downstream passage portion 1532B can pass one by one. A right start winning switch 1442B similar to 1442A is provided.

  Even if the game ball is detected by either the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B, the start winning of the second special symbol occurs. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 passes by the first start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B depending on whether the game ball passes the first falling passage portion 1532A or the second falling passage portion 1532B. As a result, a start winning of the second special symbol occurs.

  Note that the game ball that has entered the first downflow passage portion 1532A or the second downflow passage portion 1532B is detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B, and then discharged from each of the downflow passage portions 1532A and 1532B. Guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401.

  The opening serving as the inlet portion of the first downstream passage portion 1532A is provided on the upstream side of the opening serving as the inlet portion of the second downstream passage portion 1532B, so that the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 is In the configuration that reaches the upstream side of the downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece, when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 is mainly supplied to the first flow-down passage portion 1532A. Can enter.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the opening serving as the inlet portion of the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is provided almost immediately below the starter 436 as shown in FIG. When the restriction mechanism 1452 is in the approaching allowable posture, most of the game balls that have passed through the starter 436 can be made to enter the first flow-down passage portion 1532A.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 moves the game ball along the downward inclined surface formed by the movable piece as shown in FIG. It functions as a ball passage portion 1611 for guiding from the right to the left in the front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, when the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452, the game ball is lowered. The ball passage 1611 flows down while rolling on the inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage portion 1611 reaches the downstream end of the descending inclined surface, it falls from the downstream end.

  On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 shifts to the entry allowable posture while the game ball is passing through the ball passage portion 1611, it is positioned on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452. The game ball enters the first flow-down passage portion 1532A or the second flow-down passage portion 1532B or flows down on the guide portion 1531 extending in the lower left direction from the opening end of the second flow-down passage portion 1532B depending on the position. . When the game ball flowing down on the guide portion 1531 reaches the downstream end of the guide portion 1531, it falls from the downstream end.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20B and 20C, the rear wall surface 1535 and the front wall surface 1536 of the ball passage portion 1611 protrude inward and continue in the vertical direction, respectively. And a protrusion 1538 is provided. As shown in FIG. 20C, these protrusions 1537 and 1538 have a protrusion 1538 disposed between adjacent protrusions 1537 and a protrusion 1537 disposed between adjacent protrusions 1538 in a top view. Is done.

  Therefore, the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 advances from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in FIG. 20C) while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the collision with the protrusions 1537 and 1538. . Thereby, since the traveling speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 is decreased, the time (stay time) for the game ball to stay in the ball passage portion 1611 can be lengthened.

  Thus, the right start winning device 1432 is controlled by suppressing the opening width in the passing direction of the game ball on the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 at the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball flowing down the descending inclined surface can enter the entrance of the right start prize winning device 1432 at the timing when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 next shifts to the entry allowable posture while being able to be configured in a small size. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (C), the most upstream of the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the opening of the first flow-down passage 1532A when viewed from above. Therefore, the game ball passing through the starter 436 and heading toward the right starter prize-winning device 1432 can be made to enter the first downflow passage portion 1532A before the meandering by the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is started.

  It should be noted that a protrusion that protrudes upward from the upper surface and a recess that is recessed downward are provided on the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 in the same arrangement as the protrusions 1537 and 1538, thereby passing through the spherical passage portion 1611. It is good also as a structure which makes a game ball meander and lengthen stay time.

  The right big prize winning device 1434 is a prize winning device that functions as a big prize winning device similar to the lower big prize winning device 2434, and a descending inclined surface formed by a movable piece of the entry restricting mechanism 1452 or each downstream end of the guiding portion 1531. It is provided at a position where a game ball that has fallen from can be reached. The right big prize winning device 1434 has an entry restriction mechanism 1454 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the inside by a transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and a lower entry restriction solenoid for driving the entry restriction mechanism 1454. An entry restriction solenoid (not shown) similar to 2464 (see FIG. 16) is provided. Hereinafter, an entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1454 will be described as an “entry restriction solenoid 1464” for convenience.

  The entry restriction mechanism 1454 includes a movable piece that is driven by an entry restriction solenoid 1464. When the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the movable piece is disposed so as to protrude forward so as to close the entrance (winning port) of the right large prize winning device 1434, and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture. In such a case, the movable piece is arranged so as to immerse backward so as to open the entrance (winning port) of the right big winning device 1434. Accordingly, when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the right big prize device 1434, but when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry permission posture, the game ball is right big prize. Device 1434 can be entered.

  A game ball can enter the right big prize winning device 1434 when a winning lottery is won. Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, the entrance allowable posture is shifted a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time according to the drive of the entry restriction solenoid 1464. Note that a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the large winning switch 1444 during each time of the permitted entry posture in the right grand prize-winning device 1434, or a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds), the entry restriction mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 returns to the entry allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 1454 is in the approach allowing posture, the game ball that has entered the right big prize device 1434 passes through the ball passage portion formed in the right big prize device 1434 and is located downstream of the ball passage portion. It is detected by the large winning switch 1444 which is the same as the lower large winning switch 2444 (see FIG. 16). The game ball that has entered the right big prize device 1434 is detected by the big prize switch 1444 and then guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401.

  In the case where the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper surface of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 constitutes a downwardly inclined surface that is lower left in a front view of the gaming machine. In addition, it is preferable that the inclination of the downward inclined surface which falls to the left is a gentle inclination angle of about 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane, for example, is set to 5 degrees.

  When the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper side of the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is configured to play a game ball along a downwardly inclined surface formed by the movable piece, as shown in FIG. It functions as a ball passage portion 1621 for guiding from the right to the left in the front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, a game ball that has fallen from the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 or each downstream end of the guide portion 1531 is concerned. When the game ball reaches the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball flows down the ball passage portion 1621 while rolling on the descending inclined surface. When the game ball flowing down the ball passage portion 1621 reaches the downstream end portion of the ball passage portion 1621 in the right prize winning device 1434, the game ball falls from the end portion.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a lottery result of the unit game related to the second special symbol, a small hit is set in addition to the above big hit. When winning a small hit, a bonus (small bonus) different from that for winning a big win is given to the player. Note that, as one of the types of special game states that occur when a big win is won, a special game state in which a privilege of the same size as that of a small win can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having a small hitting function, a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 1442A or the right start winning switch 1442B. In the second special symbol lottery based, the entry restricting solenoid 1462 is configured to operate when a small win is won. When the value of the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol acquired based on the occurrence of the start winning of the second special symbol is a value that is won in a predetermined small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small win winning value) Will win a small win. The big hit winning value is set to a value different from the big win winning value, and the big hit and the small win are not established at the same time in one start winning. In the unit game won in the small hit, among the symbols different from the big hit symbol (the lost symbol displayed when the big hit is not won), the predetermined small hit symbol is a special symbol display device 471,472. Is set as a stop symbol.

  When winning a small win, the entry restriction solenoid 1464 is activated, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry permission posture, and the right big prize device 1434 is opened. The entry allowable posture of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is that a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls is detected by the big winning switch 1444 or a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, 3 seconds) is maintained (maintained) until the end of the period, and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 returns to the entry prohibition posture after the period. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the maximum allowable entry time of the right big winning device 1434 that is released as a bonus per bonus is changed to a game mode that is changed by changing the setting of the exit rate. It is configured differently depending on the situation.

  The period during which this approach permitting posture is maintained corresponds to a gaming state related to a small hit (small hit gaming state). The small hit gaming state is started when a stop symbol corresponding to the winning of the small hit is displayed, and ends after the entry restriction solenoid 1464 returns to the entry prohibition posture. As with the special game state corresponding to the big hit, the small hit game state waits for execution of the variable display, and after the small hit game state, the variable display related to the next unit game is performed.

  The control of the small hit gaming state is performed in the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small win is won when the second special symbol is won for starting, and if the small win is won, the entry restriction solenoid 1464 is allowed to enter for the above period. At the same time, the right big prize device 1434 is opened. Note that it is not always necessary to wait for the variable display during the small hit game state, and the variable display of the next unit game may be started during the small hit game state.

  The small win is different from the big win in that it is not an opportunity to change the gaming state by one win. When winning a small hit, the game proceeds according to the gaming state determined in the previous lottery. For example, in the normal game state, the normal game state continues after the small hit game state, and in the probability variation game state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hit game state, and the remaining unit game The number decreases by one time.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the playability by small hits, in the probability variation states C to E that are non-time-short states, a ball that a player can acquire by paying out the game ball The number (hereinafter also referred to as “acquired ball number”) increases gradually, and the increase in the acquired ball number is restricted in the probability variation states A and B, which are short-running states. The number of winning balls for winning is set small. That is, a large number of game balls will win the right start winning device 1432 in the probability variation states A and B, and the number of winning balls should be set to a small number so that the number of acquired balls gradually decreases even in this situation. The number is preferably 2 or less, for example, 1 is set.

  Next, the game in the probability variation gaming state of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is further finely classified into five types of internal gaming states. Hereinafter, each of these five types of internal game states is also referred to as “probability change state A”, “probability change state B”, “probability change state C”, “probability change state D”, and “probability change state E”.

  Each of the probability variation state A, the probability variation state B, the probability variation state C, the probability variation state D, and the probability variation state E is higher in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) than the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. However, in the point that lottery is lottery, the selection mode of effects in the decorative symbol display device 479 is different.

  Specifically, in the probability variation state A, one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns as the variation pattern. In the probability variation state B, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns as the variation pattern. In the probability variation state C, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns at a rate of 50%.

  In the probability variation state D, a loss pattern is selected as a variation pattern in the same manner as the probability variation state A, and lottery is performed regarding whether or not a transition to a specific mode display is possible. In the probability variation state E, similarly to the probability variation state A, a loss pattern is selected as a variation pattern, and a process for ending the probability variation gaming state is executed.

  In a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920, a plurality of types (for example, 120 types) of transition patterns of five types of internal game states (that is, probability change states A to E) in the probability change game state are prepared in advance. . Each transition pattern is associated with a value for identifying an individual transition pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern number”), and is based on a value acquired from a jackpot symbol random number counter based on the occurrence of a start winning prize. The transition pattern is determined by selecting the pattern number.

  The pattern number is selected based on the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter. For example, when 120 types of transition patterns are prepared, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is “240” to “359” when shifting from the special gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. Is the case where “1” to “120” is selected as the pattern number for each value, and the values obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter are “240” to “359”. , “1” to “120” are selected as pattern numbers, respectively. Thereby, various transition patterns can be selected equally. In the short-time gaming state (values acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter are “0” to “239”), a transition pattern different from that in the probability variation gaming state is selected.

  Each of these plural types of transition patterns is set such that the timing at which the internal gaming state is switched in the probability variation gaming state is different. Specifically, each transition pattern has different timings at which the probability variation state B and the probability variation state C occur among the probability variation states A to E, and the length of the probability variation state D following the occurrence of the probability variation state C (that is, the probability variation state). The number of occurrences of D) is different. The main control board 920 determines one transition pattern from a plurality of types of transition patterns prepared in advance and advances the game according to the determined transition pattern when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery.

  In addition, each transition pattern includes the number of executions of a unit game in which a reach-losing pattern change definitely occurs (hereinafter also referred to as “determined reach occurrence unit game”), and a unit game in which a reach-losing pattern change occurs selectively ( Hereinafter, the combination of the number of times of execution (also referred to as “lottery reach occurrence unit game”) is different. That is, for each transition pattern, to specify the number of remaining unit games for designating a fixed reach occurrence unit game (hereinafter also referred to as “the number of remaining unit games for which a fixed reach has occurred”) and a lottery reach generation unit game. And the remaining number of unit games (also referred to as “number of lottery reach remaining unit games” in the figure) are defined as different combinations.

  Note that in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the combination of the number of remaining unit games for which the determined reach has been generated and the number of remaining unit games for which the lottery has been generated in each transition pattern is the combination of the number of remaining units for which the determined reach has been generated and The sum with the number is set to be a predetermined number (100 in the present embodiment) that is determined in advance as the basic number of executions of the probability variation gaming state.

  In the probability variation gaming state, each unit game from the initial unit game to the unit game one time before the united reach occurrence unit game in accordance with the determined transition pattern The main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state A, and the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state B at the time of executing the definite reach occurrence unit game.

  Next, in each unit game from the unit game one time after the confirmed reach generating unit game to the unit game one time before the lottery reach generating unit game, the main control board 920 again The main control board 920 executes the control according to the probability variation state C at the time of executing the control according to the probability variation state A and executing the lottery reach generation unit game.

  Next, from the unit game one time after the lottery reach occurrence unit game, the final number of times (in the present embodiment, the 100th time) in a predetermined number of times that is determined in advance as the basic execution number of the probability variation gaming state In each unit game up to the unit game one time before the unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability change state D, and in the last unit game, the main control board 920 Control according to the state E is executed.

  Even if the final unit game is executed, the lottery reach generation unit game is executed every time a start win occurs when the big win is not won in the big game lottery of the unit game related to the special design In the lottery reach generation unit game, the main control board 920 executes control according to the probability variation state D.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to switch between a time-short state and a non-time-short state in accordance with the type of the probability variation state (probability variation states A to E) in the probability variation gaming state. Specifically, in the probability variation state A and the probability variation state B, the time reduction state is established, and in the probability variation state C, the probability variation state D, and the probability variation state B, the non-time reduction state is established. Although the details will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state in which the game is played by the right-handed gaming technique, the game ball is used in the probability variation states A and B by switching between the time-short state and the non-time-short state according to the type of the probability variation state. Are unlikely to enter the right big prize device 1434, and in the probability variation states C to E, it is possible to generate a state where the game ball easily enters the right big prize device 1434 by winning the small hits.

  Next, the specification regarding the normal symbol in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is preferable to set the specifications related to normal symbols as follows. First, it is preferable to set the normal symbol variation display time to a short time in both the short-time state and the non-short-time state, and is preferably set to about 1.0 second or less. It is preferable to set it to 5 seconds or less. For example, it is set to approximately 0.3 seconds in the non-short-time state and approximately 0.2 seconds in the time-short state. The distance between the starting device 436 and the right starting winning device 1432 is determined according to the length of the variation time of the normal symbol.

  When the normal symbol lottery is won, the time for opening the right start prize-winning device 1432 (that is, the time for the entry restriction mechanism 1454 to take the entry-permissible posture) is the time interval (approximately 0. 6 seconds) is preferably set to a shorter time, for example, set to be opened once in a time of approximately 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the short-time state, it is preferable to set the time sufficiently long compared to the game ball firing time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds), for example, three consecutive times in a time of approximately 1.8 seconds. It is set to open.

  When the right start prize-winning device 1432 is opened a plurality of times in the short-time state, the interval time provided between each opening (that is, the time during which the entry restriction mechanism 1454 takes the entry inhibition posture) is the entry restriction mechanism 1454 in the entry inhibition posture. A game ball that has reached the entrance portion of the right start prize-winning device 1432 at a certain timing does not flow down downstream from the entrance portion while the entry prohibition posture is maintained, and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 then enters the entry allowable posture. In this case, the right start winning device 1432 is easily entered. As a result, in the right start winning device 1432, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 assumes the entry allowable posture so that the entry allowable time of approximately 5.4 seconds corresponding to three times approximately 1.8 seconds is generated in the short time state.

  The interval time is preferably set to a time sufficiently shorter than the game ball firing time interval, and may be set to approximately half or less, for example, approximately 0.2 seconds. However, it may be configured to instantaneously switch to the entry prohibition posture in about 0.1 seconds or less. By setting the interval time to a time sufficiently shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the game ball moves to the right start winning device 1432 during the period in which the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture (that is, during the interval time). It is possible to suppress the downstream flow beyond the inlet portion.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in which the specifications related to the normal symbols are configured as described above, the game ball that flows down on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 by being fired by the right-handed gaming method when in the short-time state. Most of them are allowed to flow into the right start winning device 1432 with almost no flow downstream from the right start winning device 1432.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the downward inclination of the downward inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 has a gentle inclination angle (for example, approximately 10 degrees or less with respect to the horizontal plane). In addition, the ball passage portion 1611 is provided with protrusions 1537 and 1538 so that the traveling speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage portion 1611 is reduced. The game ball flowing down on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 can enter the right start winning device 1432 more preferably.

  In addition, the specifications regarding the normal symbols and the structure of the protrusions 1537 and 1538 are set so that approximately 90% or more of the game balls flowing down the right side with respect to the central structure 420 enter the right start prize-winning device 1432 in a short time state. It is preferable that the probability of entering the right start winning device 1432 is approximately 95% or more.

  Here, the details of the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100. In FIG. 21, illustration regarding the short-time gaming state is omitted.

  When the game is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100, first, as shown in FIG. 21, the normal game state is started. In the normal gaming state, a unit game right is generated by starting winning, and the game is executed with the expectation of winning a big hit.

  When a unit game right is generated as a result of starting a prize, a special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed and suspended, and a big win in the big game lottery for the special symbol In the case of winning, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state. Whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is determined in a special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) for controlling a unit game related to the special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the big win lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol is not won, the big prize device (specifically, the right big prize device 1434 and the lower big prize device 2434 is won. ) Is operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) for a predetermined allowable time. The determination as to whether or not a small win is won in the big win lottery and the operation control of the big winning device are executed in a special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12).

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the small hit probability is set to approximately 1/1 regardless of the gaming state and is activated when the small hit is won. The allowable entry time of the grand prize winning device is set to 3 seconds or 5 seconds depending on the stage set by changing the setting of the pitching rate (changing the setting of the game mode) by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. ing.

  In the special gaming state, for example, the operation of a large winning device (specifically, the right large winning device 1434 and the lower large winning device 2434) of approximately 30 seconds is performed a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 times or 16 times). Executed. When the type of jackpot selected in the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state is the normal jackpot, a transition is made to the normal gaming state via the short-time gaming state. The determination of the type of jackpot is executed based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the special symbol start condition is satisfied in the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 12).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a type of jackpot, a normal jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state via the short-time gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and a probability change gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. And a probable jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state via the.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability that the normal jackpot is selected and the probability that the probability variation jackpot is selected when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol is the back setting switch 905 and It is configured differently depending on the stage set by changing the setting of the starting rate by operating the initialization switch 907. For example, in the middle type, when winning a big hit in the big win lottery of the unit game related to special symbols The probability that the normal jackpot is selected is set to approximately ½, and the probability that the probability variation jackpot is selected is also set to approximately ½.

  On the other hand, when the type of jackpot selected in the normal game state or the probability variation game state is the probability variation jackpot, the remaining number of unit games corresponding to the number of executions of the probability variation game state is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times (specifically, 100) determined in advance as the basic number of executions of the probability variation gaming state is set as the remaining number of unit games. In addition, information corresponding to the probability variation gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) that stores the gaming state, and lottery conditions relating to the special symbol are set according to the information, and the normal symbol related processing S1218. The conditions for the normal symbol lottery in (see FIG. 12) and the transition time to the approaching allowable posture of the right start winning device 1432 are also controlled in accordance with the information stored in the gaming state storage unit.

  In the probable gaming state, the game is executed with the right of the unit game being generated by the start winning (mainly the starting win relating to the second special symbol). Specifically, when a unit game right is generated due to a start winning, a special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed and suspended, and a special game is awarded when the big game lottery for the special symbol is won. The gaming state transitions to the state.

  Whenever the number of remaining unit games is “0” or more every time the special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, the remaining number of unit games is decremented by one. When a big win is won in the big game lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the change display of the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. On the other hand, if you don't win the big win in the big win lottery of the unit game related to the special design, but win the small hit in the small win lottery, as in the case of winning the small hit in the normal gaming state, The right big winning device 1434 and the lower big winning device 2434) are operated a predetermined number of times (specifically, once) for a predetermined allowable entry time.

  Next, specific specifications of the game in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram comparing the game specifications in each game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the change display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed game technique and the change display of the unit game by the second special game by the right-handed game technique are simultaneously executed in parallel. When one variation display is won, the other variation display is stopped at a non-winning (losing) symbol, and a transition is made to a special gaming state related to the one variation display winning.

  In FIG. 22, the selection frequency of the variation time of the second special symbol in the case of not winning the jackpot (the jackpot is not won) corresponding to each gaming state, “◎”, “○” in descending order of frequency. , “Δ”, “−”.

  In the normal gaming state, the player is allowed to play a game using the left-handed gaming technique, and the right-handed gaming technique is a long time that is continued for 10 minutes or longer (hereinafter, “long time 2”) so that the game does not progress. (Also referred to as “variable display”) is executed, and in the present embodiment, a fluctuation time of 1200 seconds to 1800 seconds is selected. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, the player plays a game using the left-handed gaming technique, and executes the game with the aim of winning the lottery related to the first special symbol.

  In the probability variation gaming state, the variation time selected by the five probability variation states A to E described above is different, and in the probability variation state A and the probability variation state D, the variation display for a short time (approximately 0.5 seconds) occupies most. The other variable times are set to be not executed or rarely executed (for example, less than 1%) except in the case of winning the big hit. In the probability variation states B and E, a variation display of a variation time of 60 seconds to 90 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as “long time 1”), which is longer than the probability variation states A and D, is easily selected. Here, in the probability variation state B, a losing reach effect accompanied by the appearance of a specific character is easy to execute, and in the probability variation state E, an end effect with a display or sound that tells the player of the end of the probability variation state is performed. The In the probability variation state C, the short time variation display and the long time variation display 1 are executed at substantially the same rate.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the time variation state A and the probability variation state B are set to the time shortening state, and the probability variation state C, the probability variation state D, and the probability variation state B are set to the non-time shortening state. It is configured. Further, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the time for opening the right start winning device 1432 (allowable entry time) is, as described above, to be released once in a time of approximately 0.5 seconds in the non-short-time state. In the time-short state, it is set to open three times continuously in a time of approximately 1.8 seconds.

  Regarding the big hit probability, the normal gaming state is set to a low probability, and the probability variation state is set to a higher probability than the normal gaming state. As a big hit benefit, in a normal gaming state, the game ball can enter the winning opening of the right big winning device 1434 or the lower big winning device 2434 over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds) ( For example, the approach permitting postures of the entry restriction mechanisms 1454 and 2454 corresponding to the open state of approximately 30 seconds continue, and in the probability variation state, the setting is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) It is set to continue for a long time.

  The small hit probability is constant regardless of the gaming state, and it is won with a probability of about 1/1 (that is, about 100% when the big special lottery of the second special symbol is not won). The small hit privilege is set to a certain privilege in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the right big winning device 1434 occurs over a predetermined opening time.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum allowable entry time defined for the right big prize device 1434 that is released as a small bonus is the number of balls that can be played by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The time is set according to the stage set by the rate setting change (game mode setting change).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a top-type gaming mode in which the probability of first hit is significantly low but the probability variation continuation rate is significantly high by changing the setting of the starting rate. And three types of game modes having different first hit probabilities and three types of game modes having a medium first hit probability and a medium probability variation continuation rate and having different first hit probabilities. A bottom-type game mode with a very low initial hit probability but a high probability variation continuation rate, which can be selected from any of nine game modes consisting of three types of game modes with different first hit probabilities Is done.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration, the maximum allowable entry time of the right big prize device 1434 that is released as a small bonus is set by any one of six types of game modes that are a top type or a middle type. The first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the case of being played, and the second predetermined time (which is longer than the first predetermined time in the case where any one of the three types of game modes of the bottom type is set) For example, 5 seconds).

  Next, the playability by the small hit in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the playability by small hits, in the probability variation game state in which the game is played by the right-handed game technique, an increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed in the probability variation states A and B which are short-running states (or In the probability variation state C, the probability variation state D, and the probability variation state E, which are non-time-short states, the number of acquired balls is set to gradually increase. The “number of acquired balls” is the number of balls that a player can acquire by paying out the game balls, and the number of balls that have been released to the game area from the number of winning balls paid out when the game balls are awarded to the winning device. The number of spheres minus the number.

  Specifically, in the probability variation states A and B, which are short-time states, a game ball is likely to enter the right start winning device 2432 as compared to the normal game state. Therefore, in each unit game in the probability variation states A and B, most of the game balls launched by the right-handed game technique enter (win) the right start winning device 2432. Numbers increase little or gradually decrease.

  On the other hand, in the probability variation states C to E which are non-time-short states, it is easier for a game ball to enter the right big prize device 1434 than in the normal game state. Accordingly, in each unit game in the probability variation states C to E, the game ball flows down to the downstream side (lower left side) from the right start winning device 1432 through the ball passage portion 1611 and enters the right big winning device 1434. (Winning), the number of acquired balls will gradually increase in the unit game.

  As described above, every transition pattern includes a unit game of a plurality of probability change states A, a unit game of one probability change state B, a unit game of a plurality of probability change states A, and a unit game of one probability change state C. It is defined that a unit game, a unit game of a plurality of probability variation states D, and a unit game of one probability variation state E appear in this order. Therefore, the number of times of probability variation state (probability variation game states A and B) constituting the first half portion of each transition pattern and the probability variation state (probability variation game states C to E) constituting the second half portion are non-time reduction states. The number of acquired balls in the probability variation gaming state can be significantly changed for each transition pattern according to the combination with the number of times. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with various game characteristics based on the determined transition pattern difference.

  Here, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winnings that are allowed in the opening period occurs on average during the opening period of the right big winning device 1434 by one small win winning, The number of game balls given to a player as a bonus for paying out a small winning prize (hereinafter also referred to as “paid bonus for one small hit”) is given to the right big prize winning device 1434 with respect to the predetermined number. It is a number (for example, 5 × 13 = 65) multiplied by the number of winning balls (for example, 13) to be paid out by one winning. In this case, the number of acquired balls is approximately 6 which is obtained by adding the time for the variable display and the time for opening the right big prize winning device 1434 to the number of game balls given to the player as a payout bonus for one small hit. This is a value obtained by subtracting the number of shots of approximately 10 balls fired per second (for example, 65-10 = 55).

  However, the number of game balls to be won in the right big prize device 1434 in one small win is not necessarily a fixed number. For example, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right big prize device 1434 is in the allowed entry posture. Later, the entry restricting mechanism 1454 may shift to the entry prohibition posture when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls that are allowed to receive a prize has passed without winning, or the predetermined number There is a possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number may be won and fluctuate between the time when the winning restriction is detected and the time when the entry restriction mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. However, in the following description, the number of game balls to be won in the right big prize winning device 1434 in one small win winning will be described as being a fixed number (for example, 5).

  In addition, the number of acquired balls as a payout bonus for one small hit and the number of acquired balls in one special game state can be adjusted by the structure of the right big prize winning device 1434, the shape of the path of the game ball flowing down, etc. It is. Therefore, by actually measuring the various number of balls acquired, the shape of the structure, the position of the switch, the duration of the permissible approach posture, the number of winnings for a single win per win, etc. It can be adjusted by changing.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the increase in the number of acquired balls is limited in the probability variation states A and B, and the number of acquired balls is gradually increased in the probability variation states C to E. The number of game balls that can be acquired as a privilege for a small hit in one probability variation gaming state is the number of game balls C to E included in the selected transition pattern with respect to the number of acquired balls as a payout privilege for one small hit. The number is multiplied by the number of unit games.

  Therefore, for example, when the number of unit games in the probability variation states C to E included in the transition pattern is 31, the time when the unit game in the probability variation state E ends (that is, as the basic number of executions of the probability variation game state in advance). At the time when a predetermined number of unit games are completed), the player can obtain 31 units for an acquired number of balls (for example, 55) as a payout bonus for one small hit in the probability variation game state. The number of game balls obtained by multiplying the number of games (for example, 55 × 31 = approximately 1700) can be acquired.

  On the other hand, the number of acquired balls in one special gaming state is a number corresponding to the continuous round determined based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter as the type of the special gaming state. In the special gaming state, the number of game balls that are basically paid out after the passage of one round is the number of winning game balls that is defined as a condition for the entry restriction mechanism 1454 to shift from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture in one round. The number (for example, 104) is obtained by multiplying (for example, 8) by the number of winning balls (for example, 13) to be paid out by one winning to the right big winning device 1434.

  However, the number of acquired balls in one special game state is the entry restriction even though the entry restriction mechanism 1454 has reached the number of winning game balls defined as a condition for shifting from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture. The number of game balls to be obtained is not necessarily constant, because a round in which more game balls are paid out due to the game balls having won the right big prize device 1434 immediately before the mechanism 1454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. The number of acquired balls in one special game state is set to, for example, about 500 in the case of winning 6 rounds, and about 1500 more than in the case of 6 rounds in winning 16 rounds.

  Therefore, when the internal game state transition pattern in the probability variation gaming state is the above-described transition pattern in which the number of unit games in the probability variation states C to E is 31 times, in the probability variation gaming state, The number of acquired balls of about 1700 is larger than the number of acquired balls in the 16-round special game state.

  Thus, even if the player does not win a big hit in the probability variation game state, the probability variation states C to E executed after a certain number of unit games (that is, unit games of probability variation states A and B) are executed. In the unit game, a bonus for small hits can be obtained. Therefore, the player will not only have a special gaming state, but will continue to win a small win until the time when the number of acquired balls begins to increase in the probability variation gaming state (that is, the start of the unit game in the probability variation state C). I expect to play games.

  Further, for example, when the number of unit games in the probability variation states C to E included in the transition pattern is 67 times, which is more than 31 times exemplified above, at the time when the unit game in the probability variation state E ends, the game In the probability variation game state, the number obtained by multiplying the number of acquired balls (for example, 55) as a payout bonus for one small hit by the number of unit games of 67 times (for example, 55 × 67 = approximately 3700) Of game balls. On the other hand, when the number of unit games in the probability change states C to E included in the transition pattern is 12 less than the 31 times illustrated above, the player is In the probability variation game state, a number of games (for example, 55 × 12 = approximately 660) obtained by multiplying the number of acquired balls (for example, 55) as a payout bonus for one small game by the number of unit games of 12 times. You can get a ball. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, it is possible to add a game property in which the number of acquired balls in the probability variation gaming state varies according to the selected transition pattern.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the unit game that is the final game in a predetermined number of times that is determined in advance as the basic number of times of execution of the probability variation game state is executed, the unit game related to the special symbol is still executed. If the big win is not won in the big win lottery, since the unit game in the probability variation state D is executed every time a start win occurs, the player can play the unit game in the probability variation states A and B. After the game is over, the number of winning balls can be increased as long as the small wins continue.

  Here, the maximum allowable entry time of the right big prize winning device 1434 that is released as a small hitting bonus by winning a small hit is set to a time shorter than the allowable entry time (approximately 5.4 seconds) in the normal symbol winning in the short time state. It is preferred that With this setting, when the lottery related to the normal symbol is won and the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right start winning device 1432 takes the approaching allowance posture in the short-time state, the maximum entry allowance of the right big winning device 1434 by the small hitting winning is obtained. Over a certain period exceeding the time, the game ball including the subsequent game balls can be prevented from reaching the right big winning device 1434 located downstream from the right start winning device 1432.

  Thereby, in the probability variation states A and B that are in the short-time state, the increase in the number of acquired balls can be limited, and in the probability variation states C to E corresponding to the non-time-short state, the number of acquired balls can be increased. The number of acquired balls can be changed according to the length of the period until the number of acquired balls starts to increase (that is, the period from the initial unit game to the start of the unit game in the probability variation state C). . Therefore, the number of acquired balls can be made significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, thereby providing the player with a variety of gaming characteristics due to the difference in the transition pattern.

  In addition, the allowable entry time (for example, approximately 5.4 seconds) in the normal symbol winning in the short time state is the time (for example, approximately 0) until the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 reaches the right starter winning device 1432. .3 seconds), the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state A (for example, approximately 0.5 seconds), and the maximum allowable entry time (for example, approximately 3 seconds) in the small hit of the right big winning device 1434 It is more preferable to set the time longer than the added time, and this makes it possible to further increase the gameability in which the number of game balls acquired by the player due to continuous small hits increases.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the probability variation game state is started, first, the unit games of the probability variation states A and B that are in the short-time state are executed a predetermined number of times defined by the transition pattern. After that, since the unit game of the probability variation state C to E corresponding to the non-time-short state is executed, after the unit game of the probability variation state A, B is finished, as long as the small win winning continues The number of balls can be increased.

  Here, a specific example will be described for each stage of changing the setting of the pitch rate (changing the setting of the game mode) that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907.

  The first hit probability in the top type (that is, the big hit probability at the low probability) is set to about 1/300 which is the same in all of the first stage probability to the third stage probability, and the first hit probability in the middle type is about 1 / 200, the first hit probability in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/100. Note that the top type, middle type, and bottom type do not necessarily have to be set with different jackpot probabilities at the low probability, so that the same probability is included for any two or more types. It is also possible to include a setting in which the jackpot probability differs in any two or three or more stages from the first stage to the third stage in each type.

  The big hit probability at the time of high probability in the top type (hit probability in the probability variation gaming state) is about 1/30 in the first stage probability, about 1/40 in the second stage probability, and about 1 in the third stage probability. The big hit probability at the time of high probability in the middle type is approximately 1/20 in the first-order probability, approximately 1/25 in the second-stage probability, and approximately 1/30 in the third-stage probability. Yes, the big hit probability at the time of high probability in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/10 in the first stage probability, approximately 1/14 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1/18 in the third stage probability. .

  The probability (probability variation continuity rate) that the probability variation big hit is selected is approximately 2/3 (approximately 66%) in the top type, approximately 1/2 (approximately 50%) in the middle type, and approximately 1/3 in the bottom type. (Approximately 33%) is set. Note that it is not always necessary to set the probability variation continuity rate differently for the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but to set the same probability for any two or more types. Alternatively, a setting in which the probability variation continuation rate is different in any two or three or more stages from the first stage to the third stage in each type may be included.

  Here, when the big hit lottery is won in the probability variation gaming state, the probability of the probability variation big hit ending (probability variation end rate) can be expressed by a value obtained by subtracting the probability variation continuation rate from 1. In addition, when a start prize related to a special symbol occurs in the probability variation gaming state, the probability that the probability variation gaming state is terminated and transitions to the normal gaming state by the lottery related to the special symbol is the probability of the probability variation termination rate in the jackpot probability at the high probability. It matches the value (probability) multiplied by. Hereinafter, this probability is also referred to as probability variation game end probability.

  The probability variation game end probability is approximately 1/90, which is a value obtained by multiplying the probability of success (approximately 1/3) by the jackpot probability (approximately 1/30) at the time of high probability in the first stage probability of the top type. . By the same calculation, the probability variation game end probability in the top type is set to approximately 1/120 in the second stage probability and approximately 1/150 in the third stage probability. The probability variation game end probability in the middle type is set to approximately 1/40 in the first floor probability, approximately 1/50 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1/60 in the third stage probability. The probability variation game end probability in the bottom type is set to approximately 1/15 in the first floor probability, approximately 1/21 in the second stage probability, and approximately 1/27 in the third stage probability. This probability variation game end probability corresponds to the expected value of the number of times that a unit game continues to occur in the probability variation game state (that is, the number of start winnings), and the probability variation game end probability decreases as the probability variation game end probability decreases. The number of unit games in the game tends to increase.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the middle type having the probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/40 to 1/80 has the probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Since the number of unit games in the probability variation game state is likely to increase more than the bottom type, it is easy to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball by the small hit privilege in the probability variation game state. Similarly, the top type with probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/60 to 1/140 is a unit game in the probability variation game state than the middle type with probability variation game end probability in the range of 1/20 to 1/40. Since the number of times is likely to increase, it is easy to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball by the small hit privilege in the probability variation gaming state.

  Also, in each type, setting the second-stage probability more easily than the first-stage probability increases the number of unit games in the probability variation gaming state, and is more likely to benefit from the acquisition of the game ball by the small hit privilege. Setting the third stage probability is more likely to increase the number of unit games in the probability variation gaming state than the probability.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, according to each step of the setting change of the turnout rate that can be set by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the winning game is won as a small win. It is controlled by the main control board 920 so that the number of times (the expected value of the number of times) that the entry restriction mechanism 1454 of the right big prize winning device 1434 operates continuously over a plurality of unit games is different. It is structured so that the benefits of acquisition are different. Therefore, it is possible to add a game property in which the setting is estimated by the number of unit games in the probability variation game state.

  The probability variation game state may be set to continue until the next big hit is generated, or if the unit game is executed after a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, 200 times) is won, the big win is won. Even if it is not necessary, it may be set to end the probability game state, and the prescribed upper limit may be set differently for each type. For example, the top type may be 300 times, the middle type may be 200 times, and the bottom type may be 150 times. .

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right start winning device 1432 includes a plurality of down flow passage portions 1532A and 1532B as the down flow passage portions through which game balls entering from the entrance of the right start winning device 1432 can pass. On the downstream side of these flow-down passage portions 1532A and 1532B, right start winning switches 1442A and 1442B that can detect game balls that have passed through the flow-down passage portions 1532A and 1532B are provided. This makes it possible to detect the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 using the plurality of right start winning switches 1442A and 1442B, so that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 can be detected efficiently. Thereby, the time from when the game ball enters the right start winning device 1432 until it is detected by each right start winning switch 1442A, 1442B can be suitably suppressed.

  Of the plurality of downflow passage portions 1532A and 1532B, the first downflow passage portion 1532A has an opening serving as an inlet portion provided upstream of an opening serving as an inlet portion of the second downflow passage portion 1532B. In a configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the device 436 reaches the upstream side of the descending inclined surface formed by the movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452, the game that has passed through the starter 436 when the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture. The sphere can mainly enter the first downflow passage portion 1532A.

  Here, in the configuration in which the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 can be mainly entered into the first flow-down passage portion 1532A, the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is a movable piece of the entry restriction mechanism 1452 that is in the entry prohibition posture. Since the longest distance L1 among the distances of the upper ends of the right start winning switch 1442A from the lower surface is configured to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first downflow passage portion 1532A is The time required for detection by the start winning switch 1442A can be reduced to a short time. Even when the distance L1 is configured to be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is the same as the case where the distance L1 is configured to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. However, the time required to be detected by the right start winning switch 1442A can be reduced to a short time.

  In addition, since the first downflow passage portion 1532A is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, when the game ball flows down the first downflow passage portion 1532A, the game ball moves in the downflow direction. Swaying in the crossing direction can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first flow-down passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the first flow-down passage portion 1532A. Also in this respect, after entering the first flow-down passage portion 1532A, the right start winning switch 1442A. The time required for detection can be reduced to a short time.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the last game ball having a specified number (for example, five) permissible for one approach permissible posture in the approach restricting mechanism 1452 is the first descending passage portion. Since the time required from entering the 1532A to being detected by the right start winning switch 1442A can be suitably shortened, the last game ball of the specified number passes through the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 It is possible to suitably shorten the time required from entering the first flow-down passage portion 1532A until the entry restriction mechanism 1452 switches to the entry prohibition posture upon detection by the right start winning switch 1442A.

  As a result, of the game balls flowing down from the upstream side toward the right start winning device 1432, the last game ball having a prescribed number allowed for one entry allowable posture in the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is the right start winning prize. When entering the device 1432 (more specifically, the first downflow passage portion 1532A), the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is switched to the entry prohibition posture at an early stage from the entry. Suppresses the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the right start winning device 1432 and winning after the last game ball having the specified number allowed for the approach allowable posture has entered the right start winning device 1432 can do.

  In addition, if the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time (approximately 0.5 seconds), whether or not the right start winning device 1432 was entered in the previous winning in the probable gaming state in which the winnings are continuously won by the small hit Then, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined whether or not the player has entered the right start winning device 1432 by winning the small hit. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1432 with the last game ball having a prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture can be quickly found. Since it can be detected by the right start winning switch 1442A, it is possible to appropriately detect the game ball even if the variation time of the second special symbol in the gaming state in which the small hit is continuously won is set to a short time. And by making it easy to set the variation time of the second special symbol short, it is possible to easily suppress the progress of the game ball downstream from the right start winning device 1432 during the short-time gaming state, Accordingly, the right-start winning device 1432 can be easily reduced in size, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of game parts such as game areas where game balls flow down, winning devices, decorative parts, and the like can be increased.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first downstream passage portion 1532A is arranged upstream of the right start winning switch 1442A so that the passage width approaches the diameter of the game ball as the right starting winning switch 1442A is approached. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is rectified in the flow-down direction as it travels in the flow-down direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down passage portion 1532A can smoothly flow down the right start winning switch 1442A located on the downstream side of the gradual change section, so that the game ball is passed through the right start winning switch 1442A. It is possible to suppress word detection such as being detected.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main control board 920 controls the maximum allowable entry time of the right big prize device 1434 opened as a small bonus to be different depending on the type setting. Is done. For example, when any of six types of game modes that are the bottom type or middle type is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set, and any of the three types of game modes that are the top type is set. Is set to a second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time.

  Here, the top-type game mode has a structure that has a very low probability of first hit but a very high probability variation continuation rate, so it is difficult to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball in a special game state, but a big hit lottery in a normal game state Although it is difficult to win, once the normal gaming state is changed to the probability variation gaming state via the special gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is likely to be continued, and the player can make a right-handed gaming technique in the probability variation gaming state. By playing a game, it is easy to benefit from the acquisition of a game ball with a small bonus.

  On the other hand, the bottom-type gaming mode has a structure that has a much higher probability of first hits but a much lower probability variation rate, so it is easier to win a big hit lottery in the normal gaming state, but it shifts from the normal gaming state to the probability varying gaming state. Even if the probability change gaming state is difficult to continue, it is easy to return to the normal gaming state, so the player can easily benefit from the acquisition of the game ball in the special gaming state, but the player of the small hit bonus in the probability variation gaming state It is difficult to receive benefits.

  When the right big prize device 1434 is released as a small bonus, the player, for example, stops the launch of the game ball and measures the opening period of the right big prize device 1434 so that the maximum allowable entry time is It is possible to determine whether it is the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or the second predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined time. Therefore, the player can determine whether the maximum allowable entry time is the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time when the right big prize winning device 1434 is opened as a small bonus. The game nature which guesses the kind of the present game mode in the pachinko machine 100 can be added.

  Thereby, for example, the player considers whether the gaming machine he / she plays is a gaming machine suitable for his / her preference, or a different gaming machine, and whether or not to continue the game with the current gaming machine, As one of the selection factors such as whether to move to another gaming machine, the estimated current gaming mode can be used, so that it is possible to improve the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine in which the gaming mode can be set in a plurality of stages. it can.

  Here, the maximum allowable entry time of the right big prize device 1434 as a small bonus is not necessarily set to be one time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds), and the length is determined by a lottery related to the start prize. The time set for two or more different types may be selected, and the probability of selecting the maximum allowable entry time varies depending on the type or the setting (stage) in the type. It may be controlled by the main control board 920. For example, when any one of three types of game modes that are bottom types is set, the first predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is easily selected (for example, 70%), and the first predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time. 2 It is difficult to select a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (for example, 30%), and the first predetermined time is difficult to be selected when any one of the three types of game modes of the top type is set. (For example, 30%), the second predetermined time is set to be easily selected (for example, 70%), and in the middle type, both the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time are set to be approximately 50%. It is good. Thereby, it is possible to add a game property in which the setting is estimated by the selection rate of the maximum allowable entry time. In this case, as the first predetermined time, when a specified number (for example, five) of game balls have entered, the time for shifting to the approach prohibition posture before reaching the maximum allowable entry time or almost simultaneously (for example, 3 seconds) ) Is preferably set. When a player continuously fires a game ball, it is difficult to guess whether it is the first predetermined time or the second predetermined time, or the guess is impossible. By stopping the launch of the game ball, it is possible for the player to recognize that it is the second predetermined time, so that the player can set by performing an operation for positive setting determination. It is possible to add a new gameability that can be estimated.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that when a short-time state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, the short-time state ends when the number of small hits established (the number of small hits) reaches a predetermined number. In the point comprised, it differs from the pachinko machine 100 of 3rd Embodiment.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment is configured as a pachinko machine in which the internal gaming state changes in the probability variation gaming state, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, and the time when the shortened state ends in the probability variation gaming state. The display has been devised to inform the player. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to third embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, FIG. 23 to FIG. 25 are explanatory diagrams according to game specifications in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 24 is applied to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation | movement aspect of the symbol ratio in a special symbol, a probability variation function, and a variation time shortening function. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of an end condition of the variable time shortening function applied to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the winning probability of jackpot in the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set to 1/100 in the low probability state and 1/10 in the high probability state. Yes. In addition, the winning probability per winning is set to 0 for the first special symbol and set to 1/5 for the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the winning probability shown in FIG. 23 is applied, even if a game ball enters the middle start winning device 2431 (see FIG. 14), a small hit cannot be generated. By making the game ball enter the right start winning device 1432 (see FIG. 20) by the right-handed game technique, it is possible to generate a small hit. Note that the winning probability for the small hit may be set to a value other than 0 for the first special symbol, or may be the same probability as the setting for the second special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is composed of three types of symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the first special symbol of the present embodiment is a first jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “special symbol 1_specific time short symbol symbol 1”) in which the gaming state to be transferred after the special gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. The second jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1_specific time short-lived”), in which the gaming state to be transferred after the special gaming state is a probability variation gaming state and the first jackpot symbol is different from the termination condition of the variable time shortening function described later. And a third jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “special symbol 1_normally short symbol symbol”) in which the gaming state to be shifted after the special gaming state is the short-time gaming state.

  The jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is also composed of three types of symbols according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the second special symbol of the present embodiment is a first jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “special symbol 2_specified short-time symbol symbol 1”) in which the gaming state to be shifted after the special gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. The second jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2_specific time short-lived”), in which the gaming state to be transferred after the special gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the first jackpot symbol is different from the termination condition of the variable time shortening function described later. And a third jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “special symbol 2_ordinary short time symbol”) in which the gaming state to be shifted after the special gaming state is the short-time gaming state.

  Note that the types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol and the types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol are not limited to the three types described above, and may be any appropriate number of two or more. In addition, the number of types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol and the number of types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol do not have to be the same number, and the number of types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol The number of types may be different. Further, at least one of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol or the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol may not include a symbol in which the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after the special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each jackpot symbol in the first special symbol is 40% for the special symbol 1_normal short symbol, and the special symbol 1_special short symbol Symbol 1 is set to 30%, and special symbol 1_specific time short symbol 2 is set to 30%. In addition, the ratio of each jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is 40% for the special symbol 2_normal short symbol, 30% for the special symbol 2_specific short symbol 1, and the special symbol 2_specific short symbol 2 is 30%. In addition, each ratio of the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol and each ratio of the jackpot symbol in the second special symbol is not limited to the above-described ratio, and an appropriate ratio can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided for the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 24 is applied, the ratio of each small hit symbol in the second special symbol is the first small hit symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2_small hit symbol 1”). 70%, the second small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “Special Figure 2_small hit symbol 2”) is 20%, and the third small hit symbol (hereinafter referred to as “Special Figure 2_small”). The winning symbol 3 ”is also referred to as 30%.

  In FIG. 24, regarding the probability variation function and variation time shortening function corresponding to each jackpot symbol, “○” is attached to the function that operates after the special gaming state, and “×” for the function that does not operate after the special gaming state. Is attached. The “probability changing function” is a function for setting the winning probability of jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to a high probability state, and the “variation time shortening function” is the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery. This is a function for setting the special symbol and the normal symbol variation display time to a time-shortening state similar to the third embodiment by setting the time different from the non-time-shortening state.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the special figure 1_special time short-hauled symbol 1, the special figure 1_specific time short-hauled symbol 2, the special figure 2_the specific time short-hauled graphic 1, and the special figure 2_ which shift to the probability change gaming state after the special gaming state When the specific time short symbol 2 is selected, both the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function are activated after the special gaming state. On the other hand, when the special figure 1_ normal short-lived symbols and special figure 2_ normal short-lived symbols to be shifted to the short-time gaming state after the special gaming state is selected, the variable time shortening function operates after the special gaming state, but the probability variation The function does not work.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the probability variation function is activated after the special gaming state, the probability variation function is kept until the next condition device is activated (until the next special gaming state occurs). Will continue. Therefore, the high probability state generated after the special gaming state due to the selection of the special figure 1_special time short symbol 1 or 2 or the special figure 2_special time short symbol 1 or 2 continues until the next special gaming state occurs. To do. The conditional device is not a physical device, but a conceptual device that manages gaming machines in general. The operation of the conditional device is triggered by a lottery for a special symbol in the third embodiment. This corresponds to the occurrence of a special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the variable time shortening function is activated after the special game state, the variable time shortening function indicates the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (the number of executions of the unit game related to the special symbol). Has reached a predetermined number of times, or the number of establishment of a small hit by one small hit symbol out of three types of small hit symbols has reached a predetermined number of times predetermined for the small hit symbol End as

  The number of activations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 that are the end conditions of the variable time shortening function and the number of establishment of the small hits by each small hit symbol are combinations of symbols that the conditional device is activated as shown in FIG. It is determined in advance according to the combination of the type of the jackpot symbol selected by the special symbol lottery and the gaming state when the condition device is activated (during the special gaming state) based on the symbol combination.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 which are the end conditions of the variable time shortening function and the number of establishment of the small hits by each small hit symbol are the symbols that the condition device is operated. Is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 in association with the combination of the type of combination and the gaming state when the condition device is activated based on the combination of symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, specifically, when the combination of symbols for which the condition device is to operate is special figure 1_specific short-term symbol 1 or special figure 2_specific short-term symbol 1 When the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination is a low probability state and a non-time saving state (that is, a normal gaming state), the operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 serving as the termination condition of the variable time reduction function Number of times, the number of establishment of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit design 1, the number of establishment of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit design 2, the number of establishment of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit design 3 is 100 times, 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state that has transitioned after the special gaming state transitions according to the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 according to the transition pattern as in the third embodiment. The internal game is not performed when any one of the end conditions of the variable time shortening function set in advance for the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of establishment of the small hits is satisfied. The state transitions. In other words, after the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, if the termination condition for the probability variation function is not satisfied and any one of the termination conditions for the variable time shortening function set for multiple types is satisfied, The internal gaming state is transitioned from the time-short state to the non-time-short state while maintaining the probability state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, based on the special figure 1_specified short-time symbol 1, special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 1, special figure 1_specific short-time symbol 2, or special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 2 When the condition device is activated, after the condition device is activated (after the special gaming state is completed), the probability variation function termination condition is not satisfied, and the variation time reduction function termination condition is satisfied The internal gaming state of the probability-changing gaming state that occurs after the special gaming state ends transitions from the short-time state to the non-short-time state.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as with the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the number of balls acquired when the internal gaming state is the short-time state in the probability variation gaming state as the gameability by small hits. Increase is suppressed (or the number of acquired balls gradually decreases), and the number of acquired balls is set to gradually increase in a non-short-time state.

  When the combination of symbols that the conditional device is to operate is Special Figure 1_Specific Short-Time Symbol 1 or Special Figure 2_Specific Short-Time Symbol 1, the gaming state at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination is In the low probability state and the short time state (that is, the short time game state), the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 as the termination condition of the variable time shortening function, The number of establishments, the number of establishment of small hits by special figure 2_small hit design 2, and the number of establishment of small hits by special figure 2_small hit design 3 are 10 times, 10 times, 7 times, and 3 times, respectively. .

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_specified short-term symbol 1 or special figure 2_specific short-term symbol 1, a game at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination When the state is a high-probability state and a non-time-short state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time shortening function, The numbers of establishment of small hits according to FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the special hits according to special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 10 times, and 5 times, respectively.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_specified short-term symbol 1 or special figure 2_specific short-term symbol 1, a game at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination When the state is a high-probability state and a short-time state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the variable time reduction function, The number of small hits established by 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits established by special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, in a gaming state that is in a high probability state and a short-time state, if the condition device based on the special figure 1_specified short-time symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 1 is activated, When the operation of the condition device is finished (after the game state is finished) (the special game state is finished), the variable time shortening function does not function, so that after the special game state is finished, the probabilistic gaming state in the non-short-time state Is started.

  Next, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is to be activated is Special Figure 1_Normal Normal Shorted Symbol 1 or Special Figure 2_Normal Normal Shortened Symbol 1, the conditional device based on the combination of the symbols When the gaming state is a low-probability state and a non-time-short state (that is, a normal gaming state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is a condition for ending the variable time shortening function, The number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits established by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 50 times, 50 times, 30 times and 10 times, respectively. It is said that.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_normally short-symbol 1 or special figure 2_normally short-symbolized symbol 1, a game when the conditional device is activated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a low-probability state and a short-time state (that is, a short-time game state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the variable time reduction function, The number of successful hits, the number of small hits by Special Figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of small hits by Special Figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 70 times, 70 times, 70 times, and 70 times, respectively. ing.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_normally short-symbol 1 or special figure 2_normally short-symbolized symbol 1, a game when the conditional device is activated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high-probability state and a non-time-short state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time shortening function, The numbers of establishment of small hits according to FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the numbers of small hits according to special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, in the gaming state that is in the high probability state and the short time state, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_normal time short symbol 1 or the special figure 2_normal time short symbol 1 is activated, the operation of the conditional device is ended ( As soon as the special gaming state ends, the variable time shortening function ends, thereby transitioning to a gaming state that is a low-probability state and a non-short-time state (ie, a normal gaming state).

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_normally short-symbol 1 or special figure 2_normally short-symbolized symbol 1, a game when the conditional device is activated based on the combination of the symbols. When the state is a high-probability state and a non-time-short state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the termination conditions of the variable time shortening function, The numbers of establishment of small hits according to FIG. 2_small hit symbol 2 and the special hits according to special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 100 times, 100 times, 100 times, and 100 times, respectively.

  Next, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is to be activated is special figure 1_specified short-time symbol 2 or special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 2 at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination. When the gaming state is a low-probability state and a non-time-short state (that is, a normal gaming state), the termination condition of the variable time reduction function is the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 Regardless of the number of small hits established by special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits established by special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 until the next condition device is activated ( Until the next special gaming state occurs).

  Therefore, if the game state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the selection of the special figure 1_special time short symbol 2 or the special figure 2_special time short symbol 2 is based on the symbol, The short time state that occurs after the special gaming state continues until the next special gaming state occurs.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_specified short-term symbol 2 or special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 2 game at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination When the state is a low-probability state and a short-time state (that is, a short-time game state), the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is the end condition of the variable time reduction function, The number of winnings per hit, the number of winnings per small hit by special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, and the number of winning hits per special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 10, 10, 7 and 3 respectively. ing.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_specified short-term symbol 2 or special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 2 game at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination When the state is a high-probability state and a non-time-short state, the end condition of the variable time reduction function is the number of activations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the number of establishment of the small hit by the special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, 2_ regardless of the number of small hits established by the small hit symbol 2 and the special figure 2_small hits symbol 3 until the next condition device is activated (that is, the special gaming state is next) Until it occurs).

  Therefore, if the game state at the time of the operation of the condition device based on the selection of the special figure 1_special time short symbol 2 or the special figure 2_special time short symbol 2 is based on the symbol The short time state that occurs after the special gaming state continues until the next special gaming state occurs.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols for which the conditional device is activated is special figure 1_specified short-term symbol 2 or special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 2 game at the time of activation of the conditional device based on the symbol combination When the state is a high-probability state and a short-time state, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the variable time reduction function, The number of small hits established by 2_small hit symbol 2 and the number of small hits established by special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are 0, 0, 0, and 0, respectively.

  Therefore, in a gaming state that is in a high probability state and a short-time state, when the condition device based on the special figure 1_specified short-time symbol 1 or the special figure 2_specific short-time symbol 1 is activated, When the operation of the condition device ends (that is, the special game state ends) immediately after the special game state ends), the variable time reduction function ends immediately, thereby causing the probability change game generated after the special game state ends. The internal gaming state of the state transitions from the time-short state to the non-time-short state.

  The main control board 920 is a jackpot symbol (special diagram 1_special time short symbol 1,2, special symbol 2_special time short symbol 1,2, special diagram 1_normal by special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) When a short time symbol, special figure 2_ normal time short symbol) is selected, as a condition for ending the variable time shortening function according to the combination of the symbol and the gaming state at the time of operating the condition device based on the symbol combination Number of activations of special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol (special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, special figure 2_small hit symbol 3) Are set as remaining periods in a remaining period counter (not shown) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM before the operation of the variable time shortening function corresponding to the symbol combination.

  The main control board 920, after the end of the special game state, every time the special symbol display device 471, 472 is activated (every time the unit game related to the special symbol is executed), the remaining period related to the special symbol display device 471, 472 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter stored, and if the final display displayed in the unit game is special figure 2_small hit symbol 1, the remaining period related to special figure 2_small hit symbol 1 is stored. 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter. Similarly, when the final display displayed in the unit game is special figure 2_small hit symbol 2, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 is stored, When the confirmed display displayed in the unit game is special figure 2_small hit symbol 3, 1 is subtracted from the remaining period counter in which the remaining period related to special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 is stored.

  The main control board 920 then determines the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the remaining period related to the special symbol 2_small hit symbol 1, the special figure 2_small hit symbol based on the content of the remaining period counter after the update. 2 and the remaining period related to the special figure 2_small hit symbol 3 are determined to have reached zero, it is determined in the corresponding unit game that the termination condition of the variable time reduction function is satisfied. After the display is displayed, the variable time reduction function is terminated. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 100, it shifts from the time-short state to the non-time-short state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a description will be given of a configuration that informs the player when the time-short state ends in the probability variation gaming state. FIG. 26 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the gaming state in the high probability state and the short time state.

  In the gaming state in the high probability state and the short time state (the probability variation gaming state in which the internal gaming state is the short time state), as shown in FIG. 26, the remaining period display portion 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 include decorative symbols. 1731, 1732, etc. are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The decorative symbol 1731 is a decorative symbol that is always displayed, and the decorative symbol 1732 that is displayed larger than the decorative symbol 1731 can be temporarily hidden in some situations such as when a predetermined effect is performed. It is a decorative design.

  The remaining period display portion 1711 displays information corresponding to the remaining period with respect to the execution period of the variable time shortening function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (in this embodiment, the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472) The number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter that stores the number of remaining operations until the end condition is reached is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. Note that the display control of the remaining period display unit 1711 is controlled by the sub control board 940.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 is set to a smaller value by 1 each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated. In the configuration in which the number corresponding to the remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, the number is not necessarily displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated. There is no need to update the numbers to be smaller by one. For example, in at least a part of the period during the execution of the variable time reduction function, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The configuration may be such that the value is updated by a smaller value.

  The post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 includes information for reporting the gaming state to the player when a gaming state that is a high-probability state and a non-short-time state occurs due to the end of the variable time shortening function (hereinafter, referred to as a gaming state). This information is also called “game state information”). In the example shown in FIG. 26, the game state information is composed of a character string “PERFECT RUSH”. Note that the game state information is not necessarily a character string, and may be a symbol or a pattern, or may be a combination of a character string and a symbol or a pattern. Note that display control of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  When the variation time shortening function ends, a predetermined effect display using the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is performed (for example, the decoration symbol 1732 is hidden and the transition is performed using the area where the decoration symbol 1732 is displayed). By displaying the post-game state display unit 1712 in a large size), the player can recognize that a game state having a high probability state and a non-time-short state has occurred.

  The pachinko machine of the present embodiment is configured such that the overlapping amount of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 gradually increases as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to 26 (C), the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 The amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 increases as the number decreases (that is, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 decreases). In this example, the size of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 gradually increases as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, thereby both display units 1711 and 1712. The amount of overlap increases.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are both on one side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (in the example shown in FIG. 26, on the upper end side of the screen). Therefore, the player should not move his / her line of sight greatly in the change of each display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition game state display unit 1712 or the change in the overlap amount of the display units 1711 and 1712. It is possible to visually recognize without.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment to which the example shown in FIG. 26 is applied, the visibility of the game state information (PERFECT RUSH) is improved as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. The display mode of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is configured to change as the remaining period changes.

  The change in the visibility of the game state information may be realized by changing the display mode of a predetermined image that overlaps the game state information, and the size and color of the game state information (for example, the background color) A configuration realized by a change in color difference may be used. In FIG. 26, a change in the visibility of the game state information is represented by overlaying the game state information with hatching.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the number of small hits is established as the termination condition of the variable time reduction function that has been activated after the special gaming state, in the gaming machine that can generate the small hit gaming state, It is possible to add a new gameability for ending the variable time shortening function according to the number of hits established.

  In particular, since there are multiple types of small hit symbols (small hit types) and the number of small hits is established for each type of small hit symbol as an end condition for the variable time reduction function, the variable time reduction function is terminated. The conditions can be diversified, and accordingly, it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the gameability for ending the variable time shortening function in accordance with the number of small hits established.

  In addition, the number of small hits achieved by each small hit symbol, which is the end condition of the variable time shortening function, is determined by the type of symbol combination that the condition device will operate and the condition device based on the combination of the symbol at the time of operation. Since it is determined according to the combination with the gaming state, the conditions for ending the variable time shortening function can be varied. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to suitably realize diversification of game play that terminates the variable time shortening function according to the number of small hits established.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the overlapping amount between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is configured to gradually increase as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. Is done. Since the number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, the player visually recognizes the change in the remaining period displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. Thus, while recognizing that the end time of the variable time shortening function is gradually approaching, by recognizing an increase in the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712, the probability variation gaming state It is possible to recognize that the time when the internal game state transitions to a non-time-short state where an increase in the number of acquired balls can be expected is approaching. Thereby, when the internal gaming state in the probability variation gaming state is the short-time state, the player can preferably expect the arrival of the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-short-time state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the numbers corresponding to the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 If the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of times of small hits by each small hit symbol before the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of operations, the remaining period display unit 1711 displays. A non-time-short state occurs when the number is not zero. On the other hand, when the end condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied by the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol before the end condition of the variable time reducing function is satisfied by the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 However, the remaining period display unit 1711 may display zero regardless of the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment described above, the probability variation function that is activated after the special gaming state is configured to continue until the next condition device is activated. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the probability variation function is terminated together with the variation time shortening function when the number of small wins (the number of small winnings) reaches a predetermined number. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to fourth embodiments described above, or the first to fourth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment, when the game state shifts to the probability change game state after the special game state, the internal game state (probability change) is determined according to the selected transition pattern. The states A to E) are changed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, parts different from the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described.

  In the probability variation gaming state, after winning the small winning lottery in the lottery for the small winning lot, the large winning device is operated a predetermined number of times with a predetermined allowable time, and the internal gaming state is in a non-short-time state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state C ~ E), if the number of small hits (the number of wins per small hit) has reached a predetermined upper limit predetermined as the termination condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function, the probability Assuming that the end conditions of the fluctuation function and the time fluctuation reduction function are satisfied, the probability fluctuation function and the time fluctuation reduction function are terminated. Thereby, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  It should be noted that the upper limit number of small hits, which is the end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function, may be configured such that one type of upper limit number is provided regardless of the type of the small hit symbol. Similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which an upper limit number of a plurality of types (for example, three types) according to the type of the small hit symbol may be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the upper limit number of small hits, which is the end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function, corresponds to each transition pattern for each transition pattern of the probability variation states A to E. Value is set. It should be noted that the upper limit of the number of small hits, which is the end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function, may be the same value common to a plurality of types of transition patterns.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of small hits that is the end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function is that the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state has transitioned to the non-time-shortening state. It is defined as the upper limit of the number of small hits that was established later. A predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920 is provided with a counter (not shown) for counting the number of times a small hit is established, and the main control board 920 has a non-probable gaming state in the internal gaming state. After the transition to the short time state, the counter is updated every time a small hit is won.

  The upper limit of the number of small hits, which is the end condition of the probability variation function and the time variation shortening function, is after the probability variation gaming state according to the transition pattern has started (that is, the first probability variation state A has started according to the transition pattern). The configuration may be defined as an upper limit value of the number of small hits established later).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the number of small hits is established as the termination condition of the probability variation function that has been activated after the special gaming state, in the gaming machine capable of generating the small hit gaming state, It is possible to add a new gameability that terminates the probability variation function in accordance with the number of times established.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment is characterized by a configuration relating to the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 that changes according to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It is provided as a configuration. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or the first to fifth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  As with the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment does not satisfy the probability variation function termination condition after the transition to the probability variation gaming state, and the variation time reduction function termination condition. It is configured so that the internal gaming state transitions from the short-time state to the non-short-time state while maintaining a high probability state when the set predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and the probability change gaming state as a gameability by small hit , The increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed (or the acquired number of balls gradually decreases) when the internal gaming state is in the short-time state, and the acquired number of balls gradually increases in the non-time-short state. Is done.

  FIG. 28 to FIG. 30 are schematic diagrams illustrating examples of display modes of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, the 1st characteristic in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIGS. 28A to 28D are display modes in a state where “100”, “60”, “10”, and “0” are displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, respectively. FIG. 28E shows a display mode when the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state transitions to a non-time-short state.

  As described above, the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 is the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (in this embodiment, the end of the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472). The remaining number of operations until the condition is reached indicates a numerical value corresponding to the content stored in the remaining period counter. Therefore, each figure of Drawing 28 (A)-(D) shows the case where the remaining periods concerning special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are decreasing in this order.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the recognizability of the game state information composed of a plurality of characters (more specifically, the recognizability with respect to the contents of the game state information) remains in the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The first feature is that the longer the period is, the worse it is and the improvement is as the remaining period is shortened.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C, in a situation where the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 remains to some extent, the game state information in the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 An image 1713 displayed in an overlapped manner in the display area 1714 hinders recognition of the game state information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 28, the game state information is a character string “PERFECT RUSH” composed of a plurality of characters (see FIG. 28E). As shown in FIG. 28A, in the situation where “100” is displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711, the image 1713 overlaps all the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH”. Is in a difficult or unrecognizable state. Further, in the situation shown in FIG. 28A, it is impossible to recognize or difficult to recognize how many characters the character string constituting the game state information is composed of by the image 1713 overlapping the characters constituting the game state information. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A to 28D, the amount of the image 1713 overlapping the display area 1714 decreases step by step as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. Note that display control of the image 1713 is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  Therefore, the ratio of characters in which all the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH” do not overlap the image 1713 or can be recognized with little overlap of the image 1713 is the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It gradually increases as it decreases.

  Even during execution of variable display based on the fact that the start condition of the last special symbol is satisfied in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, that is, even when “0” is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 A part of the characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH” is difficult to view or cannot be seen by the image 1713 (see FIG. 28D), but the start condition of the last special symbol is satisfied. In the special symbol lottery performed based on the above, if the big win is not won (that is, if it is lost in the special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. The image 1713 is not displayed in 1714A, and all characters constituting the character string “PERFECT RUSH” can be recognized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the recognizability to the contents of the game state information is gradually improved as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, and finally the special symbol display is performed. In a situation where the remaining period related to the devices 471 and 472 has ended and the internal gaming state has transitioned to a non-time saving state, the game state information can be completely recognized by the player. The player can recognize that the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state has transitioned to the non-short-time state because the gaming state information in the gaming state display unit 1712 after the transition can be completely visually recognized.

  It should be noted that when the variable display based on the start condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is completed, the player is given a predetermined input operation (for example, the press operation device 261). ) Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, etc., and in this configuration, when the player performs the input operation, the image 1713 displayed in the display area 1714 is hidden, and the character string is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which all characters constituting “PERFECT RUSH” are made recognizable (that is, the state shown in FIG. 28D is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 28E).

  In this way, by allowing the player to perform a predetermined input operation before the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 shifts to the state of FIG. 28E, the player can perform the character string “ It is difficult to overlook changes in which at least some of the characters that make up “PERFECT RUSH” are in a state in which all characters are recognizable from a state in which they are not recognizable or unrecognizable. It is possible to make the player appropriately recognize that the transition has been made. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a game in which the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state can transition from the short-time state to the non-short-time state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the 2nd characteristic in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is demonstrated.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 increases step by step each time the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 reaches a predetermined value. For example, the numbers displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 are “50”, “10”, “9”, “8”, “7”, “6”, “5”, “4”, “3”, In the case of “2”, “1”, and “0”, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is configured to be larger than the previous size.

  In such a configuration, when the size of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 changes, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 that is larger than the post-change size (hereinafter, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is referred to as the post-transition gaming state display). The second feature is that the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is displayed after the change is temporarily displayed.

  For example, as the number displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 is changed from “11” to “10”, the size of the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 is as shown in FIG. 29 (A) and FIG. 29 (C). If the game state changes greatly by one step, as shown in FIG. 29B before the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 of the changed size (the size shown in FIG. 29C) is displayed. The post-transition gaming state display unit 1712A, which is larger than the changed size, is configured to be temporarily displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the 3rd characteristic in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is demonstrated.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 also has a remaining period each time the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 reaches a predetermined value, like the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712. When the display unit 1711 is configured to increase in steps and the size of the remaining period display unit 1711 changes, the remaining period display unit 1711 larger than the changed size (hereinafter, the remaining period display unit 1711). The remaining period display unit 1711A) is temporarily displayed, and then the remaining period display unit 1711 having the changed size is displayed.

  In such a configuration, the time when only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily expanded and the remaining period display unit within the period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the termination condition of the variable time shortening function. A third feature is that both 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are provided with a time when they are synchronized and temporarily expanded.

  For example, as described above, the numbers displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 are “50”, “10”, “9”, “8” when the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 increases stepwise. , “7”, “6”, “5”, “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0”, while the remaining period display portion 1711 is stepwise When the number displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 is two or more digits, the first digit is zero (ie, 90, 80, 70,..., 20, 10), When the number displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 is one digit, it is set to a time when it is decreased by 1 (that is, 9, 8,..., 3, 2, 1, 0).

  Accordingly, when the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are both increased by one step, for example, when the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 changes from “11” to “10”. 29A to 29C, after the change, after the remaining period display portion 1711A and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712A larger than the changed size are temporarily displayed synchronously. A period display portion 1711 and a post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 of the size (the size shown in FIG. 29C) are displayed.

  On the other hand, when only the remaining period display portion 1711 increases by one step, for example, when the number displayed on the remaining period display portion 1711 changes from “61” to “60”, FIG. As shown in FIG. 30C, only the remaining period display portion 1711 is displayed after the remaining period display portion 1711A larger than the changed size is displayed, and then the changed size (the size shown in FIG. 30C). ) Is displayed. In such a case, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is simply displayed one step larger as the number displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711 changes.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  According to the first feature of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state information of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 composed of a plurality of characters such as the character string “PERFECT RUSH” In a predetermined initial state in which the display unit 1712 is displayed (that is, a state in which the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is maximum), all characters are displayed so as to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. As the remaining period becomes shorter, the recognizability of characters that are unrecognizable or difficult to recognize is enhanced so that all characters that make up the game state information can be recognized.

  Therefore, when the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state is the short-time state (high probability state and short-time state), the character string (character information) constituting the gaming state information of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 The overall image is completed as the remaining period (that is, the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472) with respect to the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is one of the end conditions of the variable time shortening function, is reduced. As the game state information becomes more and more recognizable (more specifically, the recognizability to the contents of the game state information), the player is given the end of the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, that is, The expectation for the arrival of the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time-saving state can be increased.

  In addition, according to the second feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the size of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is increased in stages, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 after the change is The post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 after the change is displayed after temporarily displaying a post-transition gaming state display unit 1712A.

  Therefore, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712A (for example, FIG. 29B) is temporarily displayed before the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 (for example, FIG. 29C) after the change is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 after the change is larger than the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 (for example, FIG. 29A). be able to. Thus, in the process of increasing the size of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 in a stepwise manner, the player feels as if the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 has become large at some time. Therefore, the player's consciousness about the transition of the internal gaming state of the probability-changing gaming state from the short-time state to the non-short-time state can be added, so that the internal gaming state transitions to the non-short-time state. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation for this.

  Further, according to the third feature of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which is one of the termination conditions of the variable time reduction function, reaches the termination condition. There are a plurality of periods in which the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 increases in stages, and the remaining period display unit 1711 and the transitions are included in some of the plurality of periods. Both the after-game state display unit 1712 is temporarily enlarged before being displayed in the changed size (that is, the remaining period display unit 1711A and the post-transition game state display unit 1712A are displayed). At other times, only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily enlarged before being displayed in the changed size.

  Therefore, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 at the end of the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, that is, in the process of gradually approaching the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time saving state. Both are temporarily enlarged, or only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily enlarged, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling monotonous in the process, thereby making the internal gaming state non-short-lived. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation for transition to the state.

  At this time, the interval of the time when both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are temporarily expanded is set to the remaining period until the termination condition of the variable time shortening function is satisfied (for example, a special symbol display). As the time when the internal gaming state transitions from the short-time state to the non-short-time state approaches, the remaining period display portion 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 Since the frequency at which both of these are temporarily expanded increases, it is possible to indicate to the player the time when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-time-short state due to the increase in the frequency. Also in this respect, the player's expectation for the internal gaming state to transition to the non-time saving state can be preferably increased.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As with the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment does not satisfy the termination condition of the probability variation function after the transition to the probability variation gaming state, and the termination condition of the variation time reduction function. When the set end condition is met, the internal gaming state is transitioned from the short-time state to the non-short-time state while maintaining a high probability state. , The increase in the number of acquired balls is suppressed (or the number of acquired balls gradually decreases) when the internal game state is in the short-time state, and the number of acquired balls gradually increases in the non-time-short state. Is done.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment having such a configuration, the start condition of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) which is the last in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established. In this case, a function is provided for changing the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) based on the start condition of the special symbol. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. The configuration described below in the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to sixth embodiments described above, or may be added to the first to sixth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 31 is a screen diagram for explaining the features of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. More specifically, it is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 in a high-probability state and a short-time state gaming state that occur after the special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a high-probability state and a short-time state, it is based on the fact that the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is satisfied. In the special symbol lottery performed in this way, if the big win is not won (that is, lost in the special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 31 (A), it is the last unit game in the remaining period The remaining period display unit 1711 on which the number (ie, “0”) is displayed, together with the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712, the special symbol display devices 471, 472 based on the establishment of the last special symbol start condition. Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in synchronism with the start of the symbol variation display executed in step.

  When the last unit game in the remaining period ends, the image 1713 displayed superimposed on the characters of the game state information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) in the post-transition game state display unit 1712 is hidden, and the probability change game state In the change display of the symbol after the internal game state transitions to the non-short-time state, as shown in FIG. 31B, all characters constituting the game state information are in a recognizable state.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high-probability state and a short-time state, it is a big win in the special symbol lottery performed based on the fact that the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established. In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the remaining period display unit 1711 is not displayed, and only the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is special based on the establishment of the starting condition of the last special symbol. The symbols are displayed in synchronization with the start of symbol variation display executed by the symbol display devices 471 and 472.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 in such a case is a transition in the case where the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition of the last special symbol. Similar to the post-game state display unit 1712, some of the characters constituting the game state information are difficult to view or cannot be viewed by the image 1713. Therefore, when the symbol variation display is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 31C, the player is in a state where the current gaming state is the time-varying state of the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state (that is, the non-time-shortening state). Can be recognized).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the internal gaming state of the probability variation gaming state is the short-time state (a gaming state that is a high-probability state and a short-time state), the last period in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 “0” is displayed when the internal gaming state of the probability-changing gaming state transitions to the non-short-time state after the end of the unit game based on the establishment of the special symbol starting condition (that is, after the confirmation display is displayed) The remaining period display unit 1711 is displayed.

  Therefore, in such a case, the player is displayed corresponding to the number “0” displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, that is, the predetermined zero state in which the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471, 472 has disappeared. (Hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “zero information”), and the symbol change display executed during the display of the zero information (that is, based on the establishment of the starting condition of the last special symbol) Since the change display of the symbol) can be recognized as the last change display when the internal game state of the probability change game state is the short-time state, the internal game state transitions to the non-short-time state after the change display ends. You can continue playing while expecting.

  On the other hand, when the internal game state of the probability variation game state is the short-time state, the probability variation game after the end of the unit game based on the establishment of the special symbol start condition which is the last in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 When the internal game state of the state does not transition to the non-time-short state, the remaining period display unit 1711 displaying “0” is not displayed.

  Therefore, in such a case, since the player cannot visually recognize the number “0” displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711, that is, zero information, there is no remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 (that is, It is difficult to recognize that the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 has reached the end condition of the variable time shortening function). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to hold the expectation for the transition from the short-time state to the non-short-time state as in the case where zero information is displayed (that is, the situation shown in FIG. 31A). It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding when the internal gaming state transitions to the non-short-time state after execution of the variable display of the last symbol in the remaining period related to the display devices 471 and 472.

  As a result, a game state different from the situation expected by the player through misunderstanding occurs after the end of the variable display of the last symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, and the player plays a game based on that. It can suppress feeling that it is not interesting. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state in which the internal gaming state can transition from the short-time state to the non-short-time state, it is possible to more suitably realize the gameability that the player expects to transition to the non-short-time state.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. The pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment is configured to be able to detect the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B). The status display unit 2591 that displays a predetermined error set in advance for the machine 100 is used to display the result based on the detection.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, as with the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting a game ball exit rate (machine discount, payout rate). Configured so that setting suggestion information can be output when the lowest initial hit probability (ie, first stage probability) is set for each of the three types (top type, middle type, and bottom type). Is done.

  In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. The configuration described below in the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to seventh embodiments described above, or may be added to the first to seventh embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 32 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 33 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 32, a notification unit 2491 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The notification unit 2491 includes a light emitter such as a light emitting diode (LED), and performs predetermined notification by light emission of the light emitter. In the present embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is in a state in which the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) is improper (hereinafter referred to as this). The light is emitted when it is determined that the state is also referred to as “base error”.

  Note that the notification unit 2491 may include a display device that can display characters or the like, an output device that can output sound, or the like instead of or in addition to the light emitter. The configuration may be such that notification is performed using a display or output sound from the output device.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the notification unit 2491 is provided as a part of the main control board 920, and the output is controlled by the control of the main control board 920. The notification unit 2491 is located inside a translucent substrate case 371 (see FIG. 4) that accommodates the main control substrate 920 and can be visually recognized through the substrate case 371. Note that the notification unit 2491 may be provided as a separate component electrically connected to the main control board 920 or may be provided outside the board case 371.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a state display unit 2591 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The state display unit 2591 is configured by a 7-segment display, and displays a display corresponding to the error when a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 is detected. Note that the status display unit 2591 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be another display device that can display characters or the like, such as a liquid crystal display device.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the status display unit 2591 is connected to the payout control board 930 and is display-controlled by the payout control board 930. The state display unit 2591 is located inside a translucent substrate case that houses the payout control substrate 930 and can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

  As an error set as an error display target by the status display unit 2591 (a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100), for example, a ball in which game balls are not normally replenished in the case rail 530 Out-of-charge state, overfilled state where game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241, payout error caused by ball clogging of the payout motor 542, and the front block 102 or the intermediate block 103 are the intermediate block 103 or the back block, respectively. There are a state of being open to the terminal 104, a command failure (command abnormality) due to damage of the harness, a communication failure of a card unit (not shown), and the like.

  The state display unit 2591 displays, for example, “1” when a ball-out state is detected, “2” when a ball-overflow state is detected, and “3” when a payout error is detected. ”Is displayed,“ 4 ”is displayed when the open state of the previous block 102 or the intermediate block 103 is detected,“ C ”is displayed when a command abnormality is detected, and a communication failure of the card unit is detected. "U" is displayed when it is done.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a base error is detected and notification by the notification unit 2491 is performed (in this embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is turned on), When the enable switch 907 is operated (pressed), information related to the base error (in this embodiment, the result of the base error determination) is displayed on the status display unit 2591.

  The display corresponding to the error displayed on the status display unit 2591 when a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 is generated is erased by eliminating the error. Further, the information regarding the base error displayed on the status display unit 2591 by the operation of the initialization switch 907 is displayed while the operation is being performed, and is deleted when the operation is terminated.

  A state return switch 2592 is provided on the right side of the state display unit 2591. The state return switch 2592 is connected to the payout control board 930 as shown in FIG. The state return switch 2592 functions as a switch for canceling the payout error (returning to a normal state) when a payout error is detected, for example. Further, the state return switch 2592 also functions as a switch for terminating the notification when the notification by the notification unit 2491 is performed. The state return switch 2592 functions as a switch that deletes the display corresponding to the error displayed on the state display unit 2591 by operating the state return switch 2592 after eliminating a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100. A configuration may be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 920 is provided with a base data storage unit 2492. More specifically, the base data storage unit 2492 is provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920. In the base data storage unit 2492, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning device) are used until the number of game balls (number of shot balls) fired in the game area reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50000 balls). 439A and 439B) are stored (hereinafter, the number of game balls is also referred to as “base data”).

  Note that the RAM provided with the base data storage unit 2492 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 901. Therefore, even when the supply of the drive voltage and the control voltage from the power supply unit 901 is stopped, The stored contents of the general winning number counter are retained. That is, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the base data storage unit 2492 are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power failure state. Note that the predetermined switch is not necessarily provided, and the content stored in the base data storage unit 2492 may be configured not to be erased by an external operation by a game hall employee or the like. Further, even if the operation for initializing information on the game control of the main control board 920 is performed by the initialization switch 907 and the information regarding the game is initialized, the storage of the information in the base data storage unit 2492 is retained. It is good also as a structure.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base data storage unit 2492 includes base data measured last (hereinafter also referred to as “current base data”) and base data measured one time before the current base data ( Hereinafter, it is configured so as to be able to store “previous base data” and base data measured immediately before the previous base data (hereinafter also referred to as “previous base data”). That is, the base data storage unit 2492 is configured to be able to store the latest three consecutive base data. Further, the base data storage unit 2492 is configured to be able to store the results of base error determination (see S1704 in FIG. 34) for each of these three pieces of base data in association with each base data.

  Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. On the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, main processing (see FIG. 17) and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) similar to those of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the nail state-related process S1222 executed in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process) of the present embodiment. The nail state-related processing S1222 executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the nail state-related processing S1222 (see FIG. 13) executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B ( Alternatively, it is a process of detecting the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A, 439B) and displaying the result based on the detection.

  In the following, among the processes executed in the nail state-related process S1222 of the present embodiment, portions that are different from the nail state-related process S1222 of the first embodiment will be mainly described. In the nail state-related process S1222 of the present embodiment, in addition to the processes S1401 to S1405 related to the detection of the state of the nail 411 and the processes S1501 to S1504 related to the display of the nail state level based on the detection, Each process S1701 to S1706 related to the determination and each process S1721 to S1727 related to the output of the base error are configured.

  The processes S1701 to S1706 related to the detection of the base error are executed after S1401 to S1405 and before S1501 to S1504. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, when it is determined in the determination process S1404 that the fired ball is not detected (S1404: N), or after S1405, the determination process S1701 is executed.

  In the determination processing S1701, whether or not the number of shot balls counter (hereinafter also referred to as “second shot ball number counter”) for counting the number of shot balls to be used for base error determination has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50000). It is the process which determines. In the determination process S1701, when it is determined that the second shot ball number counter has not reached the predetermined number (S1701: N), the process of S1501 is executed without executing the processes of S1702 to S1706 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination process S1701 that the second shot ball number counter has reached a predetermined number (S1701: Y), a general winning number counter (hereinafter, referred to as a general winning number counter that counts the number of general winnings used for base error determination). The value of “second general winning number counter” is also stored as base data in a predetermined area in the base data storage unit 2492 (S1702).
The “second firing number counter” is a counter provided in a predetermined area in the RAM (RAM to which the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901) of the main control board 920, and the shot ball is detected in the determination process S1404. Is determined in step S1405. That is, the second firing number counter is an independent firing number counter that is different from the firing ball number counter used for calculating the nail state level in the first embodiment, and is similar to the firing number counter of the first embodiment in advance. It is a counter that counts the number of game balls fired in the game area during a predetermined period after a predetermined count start condition is satisfied.

  The “second general winning number counter” is a counter provided in a predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920 (a RAM to which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901). In the determination process S1402, the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. If it is determined that an entry of a game ball to (or the general winning devices 439A, 439B) is detected, the update is made in S1403. That is, the second general winning number counter is an independent general winning number counter different from the general winning number counter used for calculating the nail state level in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a counter that counts the number of game balls won in the general winning device during a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the base data storage unit 2492 includes an area for storing current base data (hereinafter also referred to as “current base data storage area”) and an area for storing previous base data (hereinafter referred to as “previous time”). A base data storage area) and an area for storing the base data two times before (hereinafter also referred to as a “previous base data storage area”).

  In S1702, the base data stored in the current base data storage area and the previous base data storage area and the base error determination result associated with each database are respectively stored in the previous base data storage area and the previous base data storage area. After shifting to the data storage area by overwriting, the value of the second general winning number counter is stored in the current base data storage area by overwriting. As a result, the base data storage unit 2492 stores the number of winnings to the general winning device every time a predetermined number (for example, 50000 balls) of game balls are fired in the gaming area as the base data. The order of measurement and the order of measurement (the order of storage in the base data storage unit 2492) are stored in an identifiable manner.

  Each base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 is added to the base data for three times stored in the base data storage unit 2492 by adding information capable of identifying the storage order in the base data storage unit 2492. A configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to identify whether the data is current base data, previous base data, or previous base data.

  After S1702, the second general winning number counter and the second firing ball number counter are reset (S1703). After S1703, base error determination is performed on the current base data (S1704).

  Specifically, in S1704, the current base data is a first lower threshold value (for example, the number of fired balls is 50,000) that makes the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning device appropriate. When the value is smaller than 500 balls in the case of, the first base error is determined, and the upper limit second threshold value (for example, the number of shot balls is 50000 balls) that makes the nail 411 appropriate. If the value is larger than 5000 balls), it is determined as the second base error. On the other hand, if the current base data is a value between the first threshold value and the second threshold value, it is determined that there is no base error. The result of the base error determination in S1704 is stored in the current base data storage area in association with the current base data.

  If it is determined that there is a base error (first base error or second base error) for the base data this time (S1705: Y), the notification unit 2491 is turned on and notified (S1706), and the process of S1501 is executed. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no base error for the current base data (S1705: N), the process of S1501 is executed without executing the process of S1706.

  As shown in FIG. 34, when it is determined in the determination process S1401 that it is not in the counting period (S1401: N), or when it is determined in S1501 that the previous block 102 is not in the open state (S1501: N), or After S1504, determination processing S1721 is executed. The determination process S1721 is a process for determining whether the notification unit 2491 is turned on.

  If it is determined in the determination process S1721 that the notification unit 2491 is turned on (S1721: Y), a determination process S1722 is performed to determine whether the initialization switch 907 has been operated (pressed). When the main control board 920 receives a signal based on the operation of the initialization switch 907, it is determined in the determination process S1722 that the initialization switch 907 has been operated. If it is determined in the determination process S1722 that the initialization switch 907 has been operated (S1722: Y), the base error determination result is displayed on the status display unit 2591 (S1723).

  When the initialization switch 907 is operated while the display corresponding to a predetermined error preset for the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the status display unit 2591 while the notification unit 2491 is lit. Displays the result of base error determination on the status display unit 2591 instead of the display corresponding to the error.

  The status display unit 2591 displays “L” when the base error determination result is the first base error, and displays “H” when the base error determination result is the second base error. If the result of the base error determination is that there is no base error, “A” is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the result of base error determination for each base data is displayed while the operation of the initialization switch 907 is continued (that is, while the initialization switch 907 is pressed). The unit 2591 is configured to be displayed sequentially.

  Specifically, when the initialization switch 907 is operated, first, a base error determination result for the current base data is displayed on the status display unit 2591, and thereafter, while the operation is continued, the previous base data → the last time base data The result of base error determination for each base data is displayed on the status display unit 2591 in the order of data → current base data → previous base data →.

  If it is determined that the operation of the initialization switch 907 has ended (S1724: N), the base error determination result displayed on the status display unit 2591 is hidden (S1725). If the display corresponding to the predetermined error set in advance is to be displayed on the pachinko machine 100, the base error determination result is hidden and the error is dealt with. Is displayed on the status display unit 2591.

  When it is determined that the state return switch 2592 has been operated (pressed) after the result of the base error determination displayed on the state display unit 2591 is not displayed (S1726: Y), the notification unit 2491 is displayed. Is turned off (S1727), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. It should be noted that when the result of the base error determination is not displayed (that is, when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed) or when the result of the base error determination is not displayed, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) The configuration may be such that the notification unit 2491 is turned off without operating the state return switch 2592 when it has elapsed or when the initialization switch 907 is operated in S1722.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination process S1721 that the notification unit 2491 is not lit (S1721: N), or when it is determined in the determination process S1722 that the initialization switch 907 is not operated (S1722: N). The processing returns to the main control interrupt processing without executing the processing of S1723 to S1727.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion information related process S2021 executed in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process) of the present embodiment. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is similar to the setting suggestion information related process S2021 (see FIG. 19) executed in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment. This is processing for outputting setting suggestion information when a condition set as a condition is satisfied.

  In the following, among the processes executed in the setting suggestion information related process S2021 of the present embodiment, a part that is different from the setting suggestion information related process S2021 of the second embodiment will be mainly described. The setting suggestion information related process S2021 of the present embodiment includes determination processes S1801 to S1804 as a determination process of whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied.

  The determination process S1801 determines whether or not the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability. It is processing to do.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, when the initial hit probability is the lowest in the type (that is, the first stage probability), in the determination process S1801, It is determined that the game mode has the lowest first hit probability. In other words, when the first-stage probability game mode is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the first hit probability is determined in the determination process S1801. Is determined to be the lowest game mode.

  When it is determined that the game mode has the lowest initial hit probability (S1801: Y), a determination process (determination processes S1802 to S1804) is performed as to whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the top type, middle type, and bottom type have the same profit rate for the player if the probability setting state stage is the same for all types. In the setting suggestion information related process S2021, the determination process (determination processes S1802 to S1804) of whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied is executed when the most unfavorable probability is set for the player. Is done.

  When it is determined in any one of the determination processes S1802 to S1804 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output (S1606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game mode has the lowest probability of first hit (S1801: N), the processing returns to the main control interrupt processing without executing the processing of S1802 to S1804.

  The determination processing S1802 to S1804 will be specifically described. The determination process 1802 is a process of determining whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the display state of the customer waiting effect. Specifically, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed, it is determined in the determination process S1802 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the display state of the customer waiting effect. The “waiting for customer effect” is not related to the game state such as the title display or the demo display, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player for a predetermined time. It is an effect display. If it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the display state of the customer waiting effect (S1802: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

  The determination process S1803 is a process of determining whether or not a setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for a predetermined operation. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a dedicated operation device (not shown) for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition is provided, and when the operation device is operated, in the determination process S1803 It is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. Note that a dedicated operation device for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition is connected to the sub-control board 940, and when the operation device is operated, operation information corresponding to the operation is transmitted from the operation device to the sub-control board 940. Input to the control board 940.

  When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for a predetermined operation (in this embodiment, an operation on a dedicated operation device for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition) (S1803; Y), The output is executed (S1606).

  As a predetermined operation for satisfying the setting suggestion information output condition, in place of or in addition to the dedicated operation device for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition, The operation that can be performed by the player in the same manner as the operation on the dedicated device, for example, the operation on the operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 or the operation on the launching handle 252 may be used. For example, when a pressing operation device 261 or a dedicated operation device for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition is operated, or after an operation on the firing handle 252 has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) from the previous time. In such a case, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in the determination process S1803.

  Also, the opening / closing operation of the front block 102 (that is, the operation of opening the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103 and then closing it again), or the opening / closing operation of the intermediate block 103 (that is, the intermediate block 103 with respect to the rear block 104). Open and then close again) and open / close operation of the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, after opening the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrally with the outer frame 101, An operation that can be performed by a specific person other than the player (for example, an employee of the game hall), such as an operation to close again), is at least included as a predetermined operation for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition. May be. For example, when an employee of a game hall opens the front block 102 and closes the front block 102 after performing some work (for example, cleaning of the game board or work for eliminating ball clogging), In a determination process S1803, after an employee of the game hall performs some work (for example, operation of the initialization switch 907, etc.) by opening the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrally with the outer frame 101, It may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for a predetermined operation and the setting suggestion information is output.

  The determination process S1804 is a process for determining whether or not a setting suggestion information output condition that is established by playing a game is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the start winning of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Therefore, when the special symbol start winning is generated a predetermined number of times, it is determined in the determination process S1804 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied.

  In addition to the case where the special design start winning has occurred a predetermined number of times, or in place of the case where the special symbol start winning has occurred a predetermined number of times, the contact with the firing handle 252 is made for a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour). Special symbol lottery, etc., similar to the case where a special symbol start winning has occurred a predetermined number of times, such as when a predetermined number (for example, 5000) of game balls are fired from the launching device 330, such as when detected continuously. When an event that can be achieved by the player is established regardless of the winning probability of various lotteries, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in the determination process S1804.

  Or, in addition to or in place of an event that a player can achieve regardless of the winning probability of various lotteries such as the special symbol lottery mentioned above, a special symbol starting prize is generated a predetermined number of times. In addition to the case where the special game start prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, or when the special gaming state has occurred a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), or the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state has a predetermined number of times. In the determination process S1804, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when the game state is continuous (for example, 10 times) or when the gaming state that is in a high-probability state and non-short-time state continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) It may be configured to.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a first base error or a second base error (a base error is detected), a related party on the game hall side (for example, an employee of the game hall) A member) or an external person (for example, a member of an inspection institution of the gaming machine) operates the initialization switch 907 to perform base error determination performed on the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492. A display corresponding to the result can be displayed.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, three times of base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492 (that is, three consecutive times from the latest) while the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The base error determination result for each of the base data) is sequentially displayed on the status display unit 2591, so that a game hall employee, a gaming machine inspection agency member, etc. It is possible to grasp a history of base error determination results for each of the base data.

  Therefore, not only the result of the base error determination for the latest base data (that is, the current base data) but also the result of the base error determination for the previous base data and the previous base data is detected for the current base data. The base error is a temporary one caused by the occurrence of a clogged ball or the like, or at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) or in the vicinity thereof. Whether the base error is caused by the state of the provided nail 411 can be suitably determined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined error set in advance occurs in the pachinko machine 100, a status display unit 2591 that displays the error without requiring any operation by the player. Is used as the output destination of the result of base error determination, so there is no need to provide a dedicated display unit for outputting the result of base error determination, and it is necessary to output the result of base error determination. Cost can be reduced.

  Further, the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and in the vicinity thereof is basically the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the design value. Therefore, there are basically few opportunities to display the result of the base error determination. For this reason, when a dedicated display unit for outputting the result of base error determination is provided, it is difficult to find a failure of the display unit because there are few opportunities for use, and there is an opportunity to display the result of base error determination. When this occurs, there is a possibility that the display unit cannot display the result due to a failure or the like. On the other hand, since the status display unit 2591 operates (displays) every time a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 occurs, a failure or malfunction of the status display unit 2591 can be detected from the operation status. Easy to find. Therefore, by diverting the state display unit 2591 as an output destination of the result of base error determination, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the result cannot be displayed when an opportunity to display the result of base error determination occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is configured to be lit (emitted) when a base error is detected, and the notification unit 2491 is lit (the notification unit 2491 is lit). Only in the middle), the result of the base error determination can be displayed on the status display unit 2591 by operating the initialization switch 907. Accordingly, in the state display unit 2591 that also serves as a display unit that displays a predetermined error that is set in advance for the pachinko machine 100, the notification unit 2491 emits light when the result of the base error determination can be displayed ( In other words, it is possible to limit the period to a case where a base error is detected, and to allow a game hall employee or a member of a gaming machine inspection organization to recognize the time.

  In addition, since the notification unit 2491 is configured to be output-controlled by the main control board 920, fraud with respect to the output control of the notification unit 2491 is not easily performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud that hides that the state of the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (or the general winning devices 439A and 439B) and the nail 411 provided in the vicinity thereof is inappropriate.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the first stage probability is set in each of the three types (top type, middle type, bottom type), that is, the currently set gaming mode is each When the game type has the lowest initial hit probability in the type, setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed and output. The top type, the middle type, and the bottom type have the same profit rate for the player if the stage of the probability setting state is the same in any type. The pachinko machine 100 has a configuration in which setting suggestion information is displayed and output when the most unfavorable probability is set for the player. Therefore, it is preferable that the player visually recognizes the setting suggestion information to set the lowest initial hit probability (that is, the most disadvantageous probability for the player) among the types in the pachinko machine 100. Can be guessed or identified.

  Thereby, for example, the player considers whether the gaming machine he / she plays is a gaming machine suitable for his / her preference, or a different gaming machine, and whether or not to continue the game with the current gaming machine, As one of the selection factors such as whether to move to another gaming machine, the estimated current gaming mode can be used, so the gaming nature of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in which the gaming mode can be set in multiple stages Can be improved.

  In addition, for example, a start port related to the establishment of the start condition, or a winning port to which a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a probabilistic gaming state, etc.) is given when entering a special gaming state (for example, so-called “V winning”). The probability of the game ball entering the winning mouth called “mouth” depends on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100, such as individual differences and attachment angles of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, the pachinko machine 100 is an advantageous game machine for the player depending on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. There is a possibility.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the currently set game mode is a game mode with the lowest initial hit probability for each type, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is shown to the player. This makes it possible for the player to use the setting suggestion information as one of information for selecting the pachinko machine 100 that he / she plays while considering the physical state of the pachinko machine 100. It is possible to provide new enjoyment for selecting the machine 100.

  In particular, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to display the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability when the customer waiting effect is being displayed. When the player selects the pachinko machine 100, or when the player in the game selects another pachinko machine 100 that is not the pachinko machine 100 being played, the setting suggestion information is used by the player as a selection element. Can do.

  For example, in the case of a new model that a large number of players want to play, if the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is displayed, The game of time is easy to avoid, and it is possible to make it easier for a large number of players to experience the game with the new model.

  In addition, when the event that can be achieved by the player regardless of the winning probability of various lotteries such as special symbol lottery, such as when a special symbol start prize has occurred a predetermined number of times, the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability will be With the configuration in which the corresponding setting suggestion information is displayed, the setting suggestion information can be provided fairly to the player who plays the game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide all the players with the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages.

  In addition, when an operation that can be performed by the player such as an operation on a dedicated operation device for establishing the setting suggestion information output condition is performed, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability is displayed. With the displayed configuration, the setting suggestion information is confirmed by the player's intention, and the selection of whether to continue the game with the current gaming machine or move to another gaming machine is performed based on the setting suggestion information Can be made.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, if it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for a predetermined operation (S1803: Y), the setting suggestion information is output as the setting suggestion information in step S1606. It is good also as a structure which is output over the said predetermined period only for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to the predetermined display part (for example, decoration design display apparatus 479) previously. As a result, the display probability of the setting suggestion information (for example, the setting suggestion information is displayed every 10 seconds) in a local period of a predetermined period (predetermined period) after the predetermined operation is performed, compared to other periods. Since the displayed time ratio is increased, it is easy for the player to recognize the displayed setting suggestion information.

  At this time, if the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased in a certain period after an operation that can be performed by the player compared to other periods, after the operation performed by the player's own intention Therefore, the displayed setting suggestion information can be easily associated with the user's own operation, and in this respect, the displayed setting suggestion information can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, in a certain period after an operation that can be performed by a specific person other than the player (for example, an employee of the game hall), the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased as compared with other periods. In this case, by making it easier for the player to recognize the setting suggestion information after some work is performed by a specific person other than the player, it is possible to suppress the player from having distrust in the work. .

  Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 100 is configured to periodically display the setting suggestion information on a predetermined display unit at a predetermined interval that is less likely to be viewed by the player (for example, every hour), When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the operation, the predetermined operation is performed by shortening the display interval (for example, every 2 seconds) only for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In a local period of a certain period (predetermined period) after that, the configuration suggestion information may be displayed with a higher probability than other periods. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when the setting suggestion information is displayed over a certain period after a predetermined operation is performed.

  In addition, as a condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player, it is a predetermined operation during the game in which the player is playing or immediately after the game is stopped, or before the player plays the game. Alternatively, it may be added as one of the conditions whether a predetermined operation after a certain period of time has passed without a game (for example, during a customer waiting effect). For example, during the game and after the player has stopped launching the game ball, it is a period until the customer waiting effect is started (including during the change display of special symbols and normal symbols), or waiting for customers The conditions for outputting the setting suggestion information so as to be visible to the player may be varied depending on whether the production is being executed.

  In other words, one of the output conditions of the setting suggestion information is that an employee of the game hall opens the front block 102 and performs some work, and a predetermined operation corresponding to the output condition is during the game or immediately after the game is stopped. In such a case, the setting suggestion information may be output to the player so as to be visible to the player with a higher probability than in the customer waiting effect. Thereby, the setting suggestion information can be output to the player so as to be visible as one of the compensations when the player is interrupted by an employee of the game hall. Further, the length of time during which the game is interrupted may be one of the conditions for outputting the setting suggestion information so that the player can see it. For example, the time during which the previous block 102 is opened is counted, and the time May be output with a higher probability than before, or be sure to output the setting suggestion information to the player so that it can be visually recognized.

  In addition, when the operation is a predetermined operation other than immediately after the game is stopped or when the game is stopped, for example, when a predetermined operation is performed during the customer waiting effect, the probability is higher than before the operation or The setting suggestion information may be output so as to be visible to the player. As a result, when a game hall employee performs some operation on a gaming machine that is not playing a game, the player can be expected to output the setting suggestion information and be interested. It is possible to improve the operation.

  In addition, the setting suggestion information may be set so as not to be output to the player so as to be visible to the player or the probability of outputting the setting suggestion information may be set by an employee of the game hall, for example, a part of the input operation device 260. Even if the front block 102 is closed while pressing the button, the setting suggestion information is not output so as to be visible to the player for a predetermined period (for example, up to 1 hour after the operation). Good. Thereby, it is possible to set at least a part of whether or not the setting suggestion information can be output by an employee of the game hall and the like, and the degree of freedom of setting on the game hall side can be increased.

  In addition, when a condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player is established, the player exists in front of the gaming machine as a timing to start outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player. It may be after the situation is detected by a detection device such as a camera or a sensor or after the game is started by touching the launch handle 252. That is, the information output may be in a standby state until the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion information, and thereafter, the setting suggestion information may be output to be visible to the player.

  Further, when the condition for outputting the setting suggestion information to be visible to the player is established, the setting suggestion information is output to be visible to the player in a certain mode (for example, a small character), and then the same or When another output condition is established within a certain period of time, in a different mode (for example, a mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize, and a display with larger characters or a setting that is easier to determine) The setting suggestion information may be output so as to be visible to the player.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment has a function for preventing the game from being sunk (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “sinking function”). In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to eighth embodiments described above, or the first to eighth embodiments described above. Instead of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram relating to an example of a sinking countermeasure function provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, as with the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting the game ball exit rate (machine discount, payout rate). Configured as

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a caution display that prompts the player to pay attention to an excessive game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at a predetermined time as a countermeasure against the game. Specifically, in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol or second special symbol jackpot lottery), a caution display is displayed when a losing (big hit non-winning) continues for a predetermined number of times selected by lottery. Is done.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000, select any number from the range of 200 to 400 by lottery. Display of the caution symbol after the end of the last losing variation display when the losing variation display of the given number of times (that is, the variation display of the special symbol when it is lost in the special symbol lottery) occurs continuously. 479 configured to display.

  On the other hand, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times or more, one of the numbers from the range of 100 to 200 is selected by lottery, and the variation fluctuation display of the selected number of times is displayed. Is displayed continuously after the last loss variation display is completed. That is, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times or more, a caution display can be displayed at a shorter interval than when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times.

  Specifically, the sub control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a continuous loss counter (not shown). The lost continuous number counter is a counter that counts the number of consecutive lost times in the special symbol lottery. When the sub control board 940 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 920, it indicates that the fluctuation pattern command has won a big win in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) In this case, the consecutive loss count counter is reset, and when the variation pattern command indicates that the special symbol lottery has not won a big win (that is, it is a loss), 1 is added to the consecutive loss count counter.

  The variation pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). In S1217 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the main control board 920 displays the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game related to the special symbol, the current game state, lottery As a result, a stop pattern random number value, various variable pattern random number values, and the number of reserved unit game rights related to the first special symbol are selected, and a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is set in S1219. . The main control board 920 outputs the variation pattern command set in S1219 to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  Further, the sub control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a display time lottery counter (not shown), a conversion table (not shown), and a display time monitoring counter (not shown). . The display time lottery counter is a counter for performing a lottery for the next display time of the caution display. The display time lottery counter is configured as a loop counter within a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “200”), and is updated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 ms (milliseconds)).

  The conversion table is a table for converting from the value of the display time lottery counter to the continuous number of lost variation display as the next display time of the caution display. The conversion table is prepared for each type of range set as the continuous number of loss variation displays as the next display timing of the caution display. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, the type of the range set as the number of consecutive times of the loss variation display as the next display timing of the caution display is the case where the number of consecutive times of the loss in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000 times. When there are two types of cases, the conversion table for converting the value of the display time lottery counter to each number of times from 200 to 400 times (hereinafter, this table is referred to as “first conversion for convenience”). And a conversion table (hereinafter, this table is also referred to as a “second conversion table” for convenience) for converting the value of the display time lottery counter into each number of times from 100 to 200 times. ing.

  The sub control board 940 reads the value of the display time lottery counter when a predetermined reading time comes. The reading time of the display time lottery counter includes the time when a predetermined value (for example, “2”) set as the reading initial value of the display time lottery counter in the continuous loss counter is reached, and the next display time of the caution display It is the time when the continuous number of times of the variation display determined as has elapsed.

  When the sub-control board 940 reads the value of the display time lottery counter, the sub-control board 940 refers to the conversion table, and selects the number of consecutive fluctuation display corresponding to the read value as the next display time of the caution display. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control board 940 reads the value of the consecutive loss counter when the read time has come, and the conversion corresponding to the read value in the first conversion table or the second conversion table. Select a table to browse.

  If there are multiple types of ranges set as the number of consecutive losing fluctuation displays as the next display time for the caution display, a different display time lottery counter is prepared for each type of the range. Also good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 36, the loop counter from “0” to “200” used when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000, and the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery are A configuration may be provided in which a loop counter of “0” to “100” used in the case of 1000 times or more is provided.

  The display time monitoring counter is a counter for monitoring the arrival of the display time of the caution display. The sub-control board 940 sets the selected number of times in the display time monitoring counter when the consecutive number of loss variation displays as the next display time of the caution display is selected based on the value of the display time standby counter. If the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that the special symbol lottery is lost, the sub control board 940 subtracts 1 from the display time monitoring counter, and the display time monitoring counter after subtraction reaches zero. In such a case, it is determined that the display time of the caution display has come. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the sub control board 940 resets the display time monitoring counter.

  The sub control board 940 may be configured to add 1 to the display time monitoring counter when the variation pattern command received from the main control board 920 indicates that the special symbol lottery is lost. In such a case, when the number of consecutive fluctuation display times to be used as the next display time of the caution display is selected, the selected number is stored in a predetermined position in the RAM of the sub-control board 940, and the display time monitoring counter after addition is added. It may be configured that it is determined that the display time of the caution display has arrived when the value of the value reaches the value stored in the RAM.

  If the sub control board 940 determines that the display time of the caution display has arrived based on the value of the display time monitoring counter, the sub control board 940 displays the caution display on the decorative symbol display device 479 for a predetermined period after the last loss variation display. To display. The display period of the caution display may be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or a period until the change display executed after the last loss change display is completed.

  The caution display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is a character string that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming, such as “Let's be careful about excessive gaming.” It may be a combination of the character string and a predetermined image. Or the structure which displays images, such as a mark which reminds a player of attention to an excessive game, as a caution display may be sufficient.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set as a countermeasure against the game, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed at a predetermined time. Configured to For example, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, when the game mode (that is, the first stage probability) having the lowest initial hit probability within the type is set, When the number of consecutive loses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the decorative design display device displays the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10) after displaying the attention information. 479 configured to display.

  The setting suggestion information may be configured to be displayed after the display of the caution information is completed, or may be displayed together with the caution information after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the display of the caution information is started. It may be a configuration. Further, the setting suggestion information display period may be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or may be a period until the display of the caution information ends.

  On the other hand, the number of consecutive lost games in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000 even if the game type with the lowest initial hit probability is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. In such a case, the setting suggestion information is not displayed. In addition, a special symbol is set when a game mode (ie, second stage probability, third stage probability) in which the first hit probability is not the lowest in the type in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set. The setting suggestion information is configured not to be displayed regardless of the number of consecutive losses in the lottery.

  Specifically, the sub control board 940 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment includes a display lottery counter (not shown). The display lottery counter is a counter for performing lottery for selecting whether to display the setting suggestion information. The display lottery counter is configured as a loop counter within a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “9”), and is updated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 ms (milliseconds)). For the value of the display lottery counter, a value corresponding to the display of the setting suggestion information is set in advance with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10).

  When the sub control board 940 determines that the display time of the caution display has arrived based on the value of the display time monitoring counter, the currently set game mode is the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability (this embodiment) Then, in the case of a first-stage probability game mode in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the value of the display lottery counter is read. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, every time the game mode setting is changed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the main control board 920 sets a value corresponding to the selected game mode. The data is output to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 stores the value received from the main control board 920.

  When the value of the display lottery counter is read, if the read value is a value corresponding to the display of the setting suggestion information, the sub-control board 940 displays the attention display on the decorative symbol display device 479 and then sets the current setting. Setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode being played (that is, the game mode having the lowest initial hit probability) is displayed. When setting suggestion information is displayed, it may be configured to display the setting suggestion information in synchronization with the display of the caution display, or may be configured to display the caution display after displaying the setting suggestion information. Also good.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the case of a special symbol lottery (a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol), if the losing continues for the number of times selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter, A caution display that prompts the player to pay attention to a particular game is displayed. Therefore, in the special symbol lottery, the situation in which the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of game balls (game value) has occurred because the loss has continued for a predetermined number of times (the number of times selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter). In such a case, since the caution display is displayed with a higher probability than before the situation, the player can easily recognize the caution display in the situation. Thus, in a situation where the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of the game balls, the player who has fallen into the situation can be urged to suppress the game, so that the player can move away from the pachinko machine 100 and Can provide an opportunity to reconfirm.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times or more, the caution display is displayed at a shorter interval than when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times. Since the frequency of alerting the player as the accumulation of game ball consumption increases, the player can be suitably encouraged to pay attention to excessive gaming. .

  Moreover, since the display interval of the caution display is randomly selected from a predetermined range based on the value of the display time lottery counter, it is possible to suppress the display interval from becoming constant. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display interval of the caution display from being constant, and the player's consciousness about the caution display from being diluted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when each type (top type, middle type, bottom type) has the lowest game probability (that is, the first stage probability) within the type, the first hit probability is set. When the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 or more, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed with a predetermined probability.

  Therefore, in such a case as well, the player consumes more than a predetermined amount of game balls (game value), such that the losing continues for a predetermined number of times (the number selected based on the value of the display time lottery counter) in the special symbol lottery. When the situation occurs, the setting suggestion information is displayed with a higher probability than before the situation is reached, so that the player in the situation can easily recognize the setting suggestion information.

  The setting suggestion information displayed in such a case is the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode having the lowest first hit probability in each type (top type, middle type, bottom type), so the game is continued. However, since the situation may not improve, it is easy for the player to select to stop the game. Therefore, since the setting suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to suitably encourage a player who has fallen into a situation where a predetermined amount or more of game balls have been consumed, so that the player can It is possible to provide an opportunity to reconfirm the current situation once away.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times or more, the setting suggestion information is displayed after the attention information is displayed, but the number of continuous times is less than 1000 times. In some cases, the setting suggestion information is not displayed after the attention information is displayed, and the frequency of alerting the player as the accumulation of the amount of game balls consumed increases. Attention to excessive games can be preferably promoted.

  In addition, since the setting suggestion information is displayed with a predetermined probability with respect to the number of times the caution information is displayed, the setting suggestion information is displayed after the caution information is displayed and after the caution information is displayed. The case where the setting suggestion information is not displayed can be randomly generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness about the display of the setting suggestion information and the caution display displayed before the setting suggestion information.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, a right start winning device 3432 and a big winning device 3434 that are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 are characteristically configured.

  In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the tenth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments described above, or the first to ninth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the game board 400X1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37, the game board 400X includes a flow changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base 401, medium start winning devices 431A and 431B, Winning devices 439A, 439B and the like are provided in the same manner as the game board 400 (see FIG. 7), and the right start winning device 3432 is located on the lower right side of the central structure 420 and downstream of the starting device 436. And a big winning device 3433 is provided below the right start winning device 3432.

  The right start winning device 3432 and the big winning device 3433 are constituted by a part of a winning device unit 3200 (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, and win a big prize with respect to the front surface of the base 401 that forms a game area where game balls flow down. The entrance portion of the device 3433 is located on the front side, and most of the winning device unit 3200 including the right start winning device 3432 is located behind the front surface of the base 401. As shown in FIG. 37, the game ball that has entered the starter 436 is configured to be guided only by the nail 411 to the entrance portion 3211 that is one of the entrances of the winning device unit 3200.

  The right start winning device 3432 is a start winning device according to the second special symbol, similarly to the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). The game board 400X1 has a switch similar to the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) as a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the right start winning device 3432 (hereinafter, this switch is referred to as “right start” for convenience). A winning switch 3442 ").

  The entrance portion (advance entrance) of the game ball in the right start winning device 3432 is configured as a winning opening, and the passing of the game ball that has entered the winning opening is detected by the right start winning switch 3442, and then the back of the base 401. Guided to a recovery discharge passage (not shown) formed on the side.

  The right start winning device 3432 includes an entry restriction mechanism 3452 that changes the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowance posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a right entry that drives the entry restriction mechanism 3452. A solenoid similar to the restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter, this solenoid is also referred to as “entry restriction solenoid 3462” for convenience) is provided.

  The entry restriction mechanism 3452 includes a movable member 3452A (see FIGS. 38 and 39) driven by an entry restriction solenoid 3462. When the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture (first guiding state), the movable member 3452A is arranged to close (or narrow) the entrance (winning port), so that the game ball receives the right start prize. Although it is not possible to enter the device 3432, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture (second guidance state), the movable member 3452A is arranged to open the game ball in the entrance so that the game ball can be guided. The right start winning device 3432 can be entered.

  The right entry restriction mechanism 3452 responds to driving by the entry restriction solenoid 3462 when a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) based on detection of the game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the ordinary symbol is detected by the start switch 446. Then, it shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  The big prize device 3434 is a prize device that functions as a big prize device similar to the upper prize device 434. The game board 400X1 is provided with a big winning switch 3444 (see FIG. 38) similar to the upper big winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the big winning device 3434. ing.

  The entrance portion (advance entrance) of the game ball in the big prize device 3434 forms a prize opening, and the game ball that has entered the prize opening is detected by the big prize switch 3444, and then formed on the base 401. It is guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401 through the through hole.

  The big prize winning device 3434 has an entrance restriction mechanism 3454 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the inside and a top entry restriction that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 by transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. An entrance restriction solenoid similar to the solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) (hereinafter, this solenoid is also referred to as “entry restriction solenoid 3464” for convenience) is provided.

  The entry restriction mechanism 3454 includes a movable member 3454A (see FIG. 38) driven by an entry restriction solenoid 3464. When the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition posture (entry restricted state), the movable member 3454A is arranged to close the entrance (winning port), so that the game ball cannot enter the big prize device 3434, but the entry When the restricting mechanism 3454 is in the approach permitting posture (entrance permitting state), the movable member 3454A is arranged to open the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the grand prize winning device 3434.

  The big winning device 3434 allows a game ball to enter when a big win lottery is won. Specifically, the lottery (that is, the first special symbol lottery) based on the fact that the game balls that have entered the middle start prize winning devices 431A and 431B relating to the first special symbol are detected by the middle start winning switch 441A and 441B are won. Or when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 3432 relating to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 3442 (ie, the second special symbol lottery) The entry restriction solenoid 3464 is activated. By this operation, the entry restriction mechanism 3454 takes the entry allowable posture for a predetermined time over a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots, the normal jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state via the short-time gaming state after the special gaming state ends, and the short-time gaming state after the special gaming state ends. Thus, there is provided a probable big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the normal big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game shifts to the normal gaming state via the short-time gaming state after the special gaming state which shifts based on the winning. On the other hand, when winning a promising big hit in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game shifts to the normal gaming state via the probable gaming state after the special gaming state that shifts based on the winning.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big prize device 3434 is configured not to have a specific passage and a non-specific passage like the lower big prize device 433 (see FIG. 7), but the big prize device 3434. Is configured as a big prize device similar to the lower grand prize device 433, and when a game ball that has entered the big prize device 3434 in a special game state passes through a specific passage, it shifts to a probability change game state after the special game state. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the configuration of a winning device unit 3200 including a right start winning device 3432 and a big winning device 3434 will be described. FIG. 38 is a schematic front view of the winning device unit 3200, and FIG. 39 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the winning device unit 3200 as viewed from the front side. Note that FIG. 38 illustrates a case where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right start winning device 3432 is in the entry prohibition posture and the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the big winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibition posture.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the right start winning device 3432 and the big winning device 3434 are arranged on the game board 400X1 in the form of a winning device unit 3200 obtained by unitizing them. As shown in FIG. 39, the winning device unit 3200 includes a first member 3210 in which a path for a game ball is formed, and a second member 3240 that is disposed on the rear side of the first member 3210 and constitutes a big winning device 3434. And a third member 3270 including a right start winning device 3432 disposed on the rear side of the second member 3240.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41, the flow path of game balls in the winning device unit 3200 will be described. 40 (A) to 40 (C) are simplified cross-sectional views of the winning device unit 3200 along the lines X1-X1, X2-X2, and X3-X3 in FIG. FIG. 41 is an enlarged cross-sectional view in which the vicinity of a right start winning device 3432 (entry restricting mechanism 3452) is enlarged in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG.

  40A to 40C, the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the big winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibition posture is illustrated. FIG. 40B shows a case where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right start winning device 3432 is in the entry prohibition posture. In FIG. 40C, for reference, the arrangement of the entry restricting mechanism 3452 and the passage portions 3216 and 3217 in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B is illustrated by a one-dot chain line, and the front side of the winning device unit 3200 is shown. A light-transmitting rear plate 223 located in FIG. 40 and 41, for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the winning device unit 3200 is illustrated, and the flow path of the game ball is illustrated by a solid line or a one-dot chain line arrow.

  The prize winning device unit 3200 can pass through two entrance portions 3211 and 3212 that serve as entrances into which the game balls flowing down the region on the right side of the central structure 420 can enter, and the game balls that have entered the entrance portion 3211 or the entrance portion 3212 can pass therethrough. These passage portions 3213 to 3221 and 3241 are provided. Each of the passage portions 3213 to 3221 and 3241 provided in the winning device unit 3200 is configured as a passage through which game balls can pass one by one (in a line).

  The passage portion 3213 is a passage that is provided on the downstream side of the inlet portion 3212 and communicates with a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401. A game ball that has entered from the inlet portion 3212 is basically In particular, it passes through the passage portion 3213 and is discharged to the recovery discharge passage.

  The passage portion 3214 is a passage that is provided on the downstream side of the inlet portion 3211 and guides the game ball that has entered from the inlet portion 3211 to the left side (the direction of the arrow Q1 in FIG. 40A). The passage portion 3215 is a passage provided on the downstream side of the passage portion 3214 and extending in the vertical direction, and guides a game ball that has entered through the passage portion 3214 to the vertical direction side.

  The passage portion 3216 and the passage portion 3217 are passages branched on the downstream side of the passage portion 3215, and game balls that have passed through the passage portion 3215 can enter. As shown in FIG. 38, the passage portion 3215 is formed with an opening through which a game ball can pass, so that a part of the game ball passing through the passage portion 3215 can be part of the passage portion 3216 or the passage. Without entering any of the portions 3217, it can be discharged (guided) from the opening to the front side with respect to the opening. A configuration in which the game ball passing through the passage portion 3215 is discharged to the front side will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  Therefore, among the game balls that pass through the passage portion 3215, game balls that are not discharged forward from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 enter either the passage portion 3216 or the passage portion 3217. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the passage portion 3215 is basically configured to fall on the support surface 3217A of the game ball that is inclined downward to the right side. Many of the game balls that have passed through the passage portion 3215 without being discharged to the side are guided to the right side by the support surface 3217A and enter the passage portion 3217.

  As shown by an arrow Q2 in FIG. 40B, the passage portion 3216 is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered through the passage portion 3215 to the left side and then to the front side. As shown in FIG. 40B, an opening 3216A opening forward is formed on the downstream side of the passage 3216, so that the game ball passing through the passage 3216 is discharged from the opening 3216A. It falls to the passage portion 3220 located on the front lower side with respect to the opening portion 3216A.

  The passage portion 3217 is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered through the passage portion 3215 to the right side, as indicated by an arrow Q3 in FIG. The game ball is guided to the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right start prize-winning device 3432 by the passage portion 3217, and enters the movable member 3452A from the entrance portion 3452A1 (see FIG. 41).

  The game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to either the passage portion 3218 or the passage portion 3241 in accordance with the posture of the entry restriction mechanism 3452. As shown in FIG. 41 (A), when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture (first guiding state), the game ball outlet 3452A2 in the movable member 3452A is a partition between the passage portion 3218 and the passage portion 3241. Among the wall portions that are directed to the front side (i.e., the side of the passage portion 3218) that also serves as the support portion 3452A3 that supports the game ball from the lower side in the movable member 3452A, of the wall portions. The portion 3452A4 is disposed at a position that restricts the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3241. Therefore, in the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A travels in the direction of the arrow Q4 in FIG. 41A and enters the passage portion 3218.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry-permitted posture (second guidance state), the outlet portion 3452A2 is behind the wall portion 3218B (that is, the passage portion 3241 side). Among the wall portions erected around the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A, the wall portion 3452A5 is disposed at a position that restricts the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3218. Therefore, in the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A travels in the direction of the arrow Q5 in FIG. 41B and enters the passage portion 3241.

  The passage portion 3218 is a passage that guides the game ball to the right side and then to the front side as indicated by an arrow Q6 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), an opening 3218A opening forward is formed on the downstream side of the passage 3218, so that the game ball passing through the passage 3218 is discharged from the opening 3218A, It falls to the passage part 3219 located on the front lower side with respect to the opening part 3218A. Accordingly, the game ball discharged from the movable member 3252A to the passage portion 3218 falls onto the passage portion 3219 through the opening portion 3218A. The passage portion 3219 is a passage for guiding the game ball to the left side as indicated by an arrow Q7 in FIG.

  On the downstream side with respect to the passage portion 3219, an entrance (winning port) of the big winning device 3434 is provided. Therefore, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 of the big winning device 3434 is in the approach allowing posture, the game ball passing through the passage portion 3218 is a passage portion 3221 provided in the internal space of the big winning device 3434 (see FIG. 38). , And is guided to the big winning switch 3444 by the passage portion 3221.

  On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the big prize winning device 3434 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball passing through the passage portion 3219 is movable member 3454A of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 as indicated by an arrow Q8 in FIG. The game ball proceeds to the left side on the support surface of the game ball (the surface that supports the lower side of the game ball) and enters the passage portion 3220.

  The passage portion 3220 is a passage for guiding the game ball to the left side as indicated by an arrow Q9 in FIG. Since the downstream side of the passage portion 3219 is the lower side with respect to the central structure 420 and is open to the right side region with respect to the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion 3219 Discharged into the area.

  The passage portion 3241 is a passage provided in the right start winning device 3432, and is provided on the downstream side of the movable member 3454A of the entry restriction mechanism 3454. In the right start winning device 3432 of the present embodiment, the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241 constitutes the entrance (winning port) of the right start winning device 3432. The passage portion 3241 guides the game ball discharged from the movable member 3352A to the right start winning switch 3442. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the movable member 3453A to the passage portion 3241 is detected by the right start winning switch 3442.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. 45, the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 in the right start winning device 3432 will be described. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the movable member 3452A viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the movable member 3452A viewed from the rear left side. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along a plane that passes through the rotation shaft 3452B for rotating the movable member 3452A of the entry restricting mechanism 3452 taking the entry prohibition posture, and the upstream-side passage portion 3217 and the downstream-side passage portion 3218 with respect to the movable member 3452A. It is sectional drawing which looked at the cross section at the time of doing from the front.

  FIG. 44A is a top view of the movable member 3452A when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 takes the entry prohibition posture, and FIG. 44B shows the movable member 3452A when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 takes the entry permission posture. FIG. FIG. 45 is a top view of the movable member 3452A for explaining the behavior of the game ball in contact with the wall portions 3452A4 and 3453A5.

  For reference, in FIGS. 44 (A) and 45 (A), the movable member 3452A in the case where the entry restricting mechanism 3452 assumes the approach allowing posture is illustrated by a one-dot chain line, and FIG. 44 (B) and FIG. In FIG. 45 (B), the movable member 3452A in the case where the entry restricting mechanism 3452 takes the approach allowing posture is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. 44 and 45, the wall 3218B is shown for reference, and the rotation direction of the movable member 3452A is shown by an arrow for reference. In FIG. 45, for reference, an example of a game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A is illustrated, and an example of the advancing direction of the game ball is illustrated by an arrow.

  The movable member 3452A includes an entrance portion 3452A1 serving as an entrance for the game ball, an exit portion 3452A2 serving as an exit for the game ball, a support surface 3452A3 formed between the entrance portion 3452A1 and the exit portion 3452A2, and a support surface 3452A3. It is provided with wall portions 3452A4 and 3452A5 and a ball escape portion 3452A6 which are provided around the periphery and are provided between the inlet portion 3452A1 and the outlet portion 3452A2.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the entrance portion 3452A1 functions as an entrance through which a game ball flowing down the passage portion 3217 can enter even when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 takes either the entry prohibition posture or the entry permission posture.

  In the state where the right start prize-winning device 3432 is disposed on the game board 400X1, the entrance portion 3453A1 is supported by the support surface 3217A of the game ball in the passage portion 3217 and flows down the passage portion 3217 while being supported by the support surface 3217A. Is disposed at a position where it can enter (for example, a position below the support surface 3217A as shown in FIG. 43).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the outlet portion 3452A2 is formed between the wall portion 3452A4 and the wall portion 3452A5. As shown in FIG. 41, the exit portion 3452A2 discharges the game ball to the passage portion 3218 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture, and the game ball when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry permission posture. Functions as an outlet for discharging the gas to the passage portion 3241.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the support surface 3452A3 is a surface that is inclined downward from the upstream side (the inlet portion 3452A1 side) toward the downstream side (the outlet portion 3452A2 side). As a result, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A via the inlet portion 3453A1 is guided to the outlet portion 3352A2 while the lower side thereof is supported by the support surface 3452A3.

  As shown in FIG. 43, there is a step between the support surface 3452A3 and the inlet portion 3452A1 so that the upstream side (the inlet portion 3452A1 side) of the support surface 3452A3 is lower than the inlet portion 3452A1 (downward in the vertical direction). Since the stepped portion is formed, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (support surface 3452A3) through the inlet portion 3452A1 is discharged from the movable member 3452A through the inlet portion 3452A1 and returns to the passage portion 3217 again. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the state where the right start winning device 3432 is disposed on the game board 400X1, the upstream side (in the support surface 3352A3) between the support surface 3452A3 and the support surface 3217A of the game ball in the passage portion 3217 ( A step (stepped portion) is formed in which the inlet portion 3452A1 side is located below the support surface 3217A (downward in the vertical direction).

  As described above, the support surface 3452A3 is provided such that its upstream side is below the step with respect to the support surface 3217A. Therefore, the movement of the game ball to the downstream side can be slowed down the step. . In addition, the angle (gradient) of the descending slope of the support surface 3352A3 is reduced by the size of the step between the support surface 3217A and the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 (inlet portion 3452A1 side), to the downstream side of the game ball Can move at low speed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452 </ b> A (support surface 3452 </ b> A <b> 3) from returning to the passage portion 3217 again.

  As shown in FIG. 43, a rotation shaft 3452B extending in the vertical direction is provided at a position serving as the rotation center of the movable member 3452A on the lower side of the member on which the support surface 3452A3 is formed. The rotation shaft 3452B is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that rotates the rotation shaft 3452B around the axis by the driving force of the entry restriction solenoid 3462, and is rotated around the axis by the drive of the entry restriction solenoid 3462. .

  The movable member 3452A rotates about the vertical direction side (that is, the side in the direction in which 3452A6 extends) by the rotation of the rotation shaft 3452B. That is, the movable member 3452A is configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction side in accordance with the operation of the entry restriction solenoid 3462. The “vertical direction side” does not necessarily have to be in the vertical direction, and may be slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Specifically, in the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3492 is in the entry prohibition posture and the entry restriction solenoid 3462 is operated, the rotation shaft 3352B is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above, whereby the movable member 3452A. Rotates counterclockwise in the top view (in the direction of arrow RA in FIG. 44A). In the following description, the counterclockwise direction in the top view with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 3452B is also simply referred to as “counterclockwise”.

  The movable member 3452A has an outwardly projecting portion 3452A7 formed on the side of the wall portion 3152A4 with respect to the outlet portion 3452A2, and is movable in the arrow RA direction (counterclockwise direction). 3452A stops at the position where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowing posture, with the protrusion 3452A7 coming into contact with the protrusion K (see FIG. 41) formed in the winning device unit 3200.

  As a result, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the approach permitting posture, the outlet portion 3452A2 of the movable member 3452A faces the rear side (that is, the passage portion 3241 side) from the wall portion 3218B (FIG. 44B). Reference), the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 (the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3) can be discharged to the passage portion 3241.

  On the other hand, in the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry-permitted posture and the entry restriction solenoid 3462 is operated, the rotation shaft 3452B is rotated clockwise in the top view, whereby the movable member 3452A is seen in the top view. In FIG. 44B (in the direction of arrow RB in FIG. 44B). In the following description, the clockwise direction in the top view of the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 3452B is also simply referred to as “clockwise”.

  The movable member 3452A that rotates in the direction of the arrow RB (clockwise direction) stops at a position where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 assumes the entry prohibition posture. As a result, when the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the outlet portion 3452A2 of the movable member 3452A faces the passage portion 3218 from the wall portion 3218B (see FIGS. 41A and 44A). ), The game ball on the support surface 3453A3 can be discharged to the passage portion 3218.

  As described above, the entry restricting mechanism 3452 of the right start prize-winning device 3432 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the entry prohibition posture and the entry by the turning operation of the movable member 3452A configured to be rotatable around the vertical direction side. The permissible posture can be switched.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the wall portion 3452A4 functions as a portion that restricts the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3241 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture, and the wall portion 3452A5 is the entry restriction mechanism 3452. Functions as a portion that restricts the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3218 when the is an approaching allowable posture.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, each of the wall portion 3452A4 and the wall portion 3352A5 is located on each end portion side of the inlet portion 3352A1, and is located on each end portion side of the outlet portion 3352A2, Thus, it functions as a portion for guiding the game ball, the lower side of which is supported by the support surface 3452A3, to the outlet portion 3452A2.

  The size of the wall portion 3452A5 is smaller than the size of the wall portion 3452A4. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the wall portion 3452A5 is configured such that the length (that is, the height) on the vertical direction side with respect to the support surface 3452A3 is lower than the wall portion 3452A4.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the wall portion 3452A5 is a wall portion located on the front side in a state in which the right start winning device 3432 is disposed on the game board 400X1, and thus the height thereof is configured lower than that of the wall portion 3452A4. By doing so, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (that is, the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43, the wall portion 3452A5 has a larger notch on the outlet portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A5 is viewed from the front than the outlet portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A4 is viewed from the front. Configured in shape.

  More specifically, the wall portion 3452A5 is positioned such that the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A5 is farther from the outlet portion 3452A2 than the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A4. The angle formed between the direction in which the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A5 extends and the support surface 3452A3 is larger than the angle formed between the direction in which the end side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side extends in the wall portion 3452A4 and the support surface 3452A3. Configured with a small acute angle.

  As described above, the shape of the wall 3452A5 of the movable member 3452A that is largely cut off on the outlet portion 3452A2 side (more specifically, the shape of the wall portion 3452A4 that is largely cut out compared to the shape of the wall portion 3452A4 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side). 43, as shown in FIG. 43, the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A5 is more upstream than the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the wall portion 3452A4 (that is, the outlet portion 3452A2). Located on the side away from the

  Thus, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture, the wall portion 3452A4 hardly opens the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241 (that is, the game ball to the passage portion 3241 by the wall portion 3252A4). ) And the wall portion 3452A5 is difficult to close the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218 (that is, the entry of the game ball to the passage portion 3218 by the wall portion 3252A5 is difficult to be restricted).

  Specifically, when the movable member 3452A rotates counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow RA in FIG. 44A), the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts (switches) from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture. The period from the start of the transition until the wall portion 3452A5 reaches a position where the game ball cannot enter the passage portion 3218 (that is, even if the movable member 3452A rotates, The period from the time when the wall portion 3451A4 reaches the position where the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241 after the start of the transition, and the time period until the entry restriction mechanism 3452 reaches the allowable entry posture (the period during which the entry is possible). That is, it can be made longer than the period during which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241 during the rotation of the movable member 3452A.

  On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry-permitted posture to the entry-prohibited posture, the wall portion 3452A4 can easily close the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241 (that is, the game ball is moved to the passage portion 3241 by the wall portion 3252A4). Entry is easy to be controlled), and the wall portion 3452A5 is easy to open the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218 (that is, the restriction of the entry of the game ball to the passage portion 3218 by the wall portion 3252A5 is easy to be released).

  Specifically, when the movable member 3452A rotates clockwise (in the direction of the arrow RB in FIG. 44B) and the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the allowable entry posture to the prohibited entry posture, the start of the change is performed. The period from the time when the wall portion 3452A5 reaches the position at which the game ball can enter the passage portion 3218 to the time when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 reaches the entry prohibition posture (that is, the passage portion during the rotation of the movable member 3452A). The period during which the game ball can enter the 3218) from the start of the transition to the time when the wall portion 3492A4 reaches a position where the game ball cannot enter the passage portion 3241 (that is, the movable member). The period can be longer than the period when the game ball can enter the passage portion 3241 even if the 3452A rotates.

  Therefore, since the wall portion 3452A5 is configured to have a shape that is largely cut out on the outlet portion 3452A2 side as compared with the shape on the outlet portion 3452A2 side in the wall portion 3452A4, the entry restriction mechanism 3451 can be moved from one posture to another. During the transition of the posture in the case of transition to the posture (that is, from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, or from the entry permission posture to the entry prohibition posture), the game ball flowing down on the support surface 3453A3 enters the passage portion 3218. It can be done easily.

  Further, the end portion of the wall portion 3452A4 on the outlet portion 3452A2 side is formed on the downstream side (the outlet portion 3452A2 side) of the end portion on the outlet portion 3452A2 side in the wall portion 3452A4, so that the downstream side of the wall portion 3452A5. It is possible to contact the game ball at the position.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), in a state where the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry-permitted posture (one-dot chain line), the game balls on the support surface 3452A3 are separated from the wall portion 3453A4 and the wall portion 3352A5 in the vicinity of the outlet portion 3452A2. When the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the approach allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture (that is, when the movable member 3452A rotates in the direction of the arrow RB), the game ball is a movable member. As a result of coming into contact with the wall portion 3452A4 that is relatively approached by the rotation of 3452A and bounced back to the wall portion 3452A5 side, it is possible to enter the passage portion 3218 formed in front of the wall portion 3218B.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture (that is, when the movable member 3452A rotates in the arrow RA direction), the entry restriction mechanism 3452 enters. Even if the game ball is located at the same position as that in the case of FIG. 45A in a state where the restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry prohibition posture (one-dot chain line), the game ball cannot sufficiently come into contact with the wall portion 3452A5. In such a case, since the traveling direction of the game ball does not change significantly, the game ball cannot enter the passage portion 3241 formed on the rear side of the wall portion 3218B, and the wall portion 3218B It enters the passage portion 3218 formed on the front side.

  Therefore, even at this point, support is provided during the transition in which the entry restriction mechanism 3452 moves from one posture to another (that is, from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture or from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture). A game ball flowing down on the surface 3452A3 easily enters the passage portion 3218.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a stepped portion in which the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3 is on the lower side with respect to the wall portion 3452A4 side. Since the ball escape portion 3452A6 is a stepped portion, it is easy for a game ball to enter, and it is difficult for the entered game ball to return to the upper side of the step. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the ball escape portion 3452A6 is discharged from the outlet portion 3451A2 located on the downstream side of the ball escape portion 3452A6.

  When the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture (that is, when the movable member 3452A rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow RA in FIG. 44A), the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 It is easy to move to the wall 3452A5 side that is the opposite direction side relative to the moving direction. Therefore, during the transition from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture of the entry restriction mechanism 3452, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 is a ball escape portion 3452A6 provided on the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3. Therefore, the game ball supported by the support surface 3453A3 can be easily discharged to the passage portion 3218 side.

  In addition, with respect to a game ball heading toward the wall portion 3452A5 by rebounding due to contact with the wall portion 3452A4, the game ball can easily reach the ball escape portion 3452A6. In particular, when the game ball comes into contact with the wall portion 3452A4 during the transition from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibition posture of the entry restriction mechanism 3452, as described above, the game ball is suitably guided to the wall portion 3452A5 side. Therefore, also in such a case, the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 can be easily discharged to the passage portion 3218 side.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the entrance portion of the ball escape portion 3452A6 has a length in the direction from the wall portion 3452A4 to the wall portion 3452A5 on the support surface 3452A3, which is the length between the wall portion 3452A4 and the wall portion 3452A5. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A from the entrance portion 3452A1 is likely to reach the ball escape portion 3452A6.

  In other words, since the ball escape portion 3452A6 is provided on the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A from the inlet portion 3452A1 side Thus, the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is easily discharged to the passage portion 3218.

  Thus, according to the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has traveled to a position in contact with the movable member 3452A is likely to travel at a low speed on the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A, and the passage portion. It is configured to be easily discharged to 3218. For this reason, even if the time for shifting to the approach allowable posture is set longer, it is possible to reduce the entry of the game ball into the passage portion 3241 constituting the winning opening of the right start winning device 3432. Therefore, it is possible to provide a winning device that makes it easy for the player to recognize the operation of the right start winning device 3432 and can suppress the occurrence of a winning in a situation where the occurrence of the winning is desired (for example, in a non-short time). .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the big winning device 3434 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 46, the structural configuration and operation of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 46 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 in the winning device unit 3200. FIG. More specifically, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a case where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition posture, and FIG. 46B is an entry restriction mechanism 3454 during the transition from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture. FIG. 46C is a diagram illustrating a case where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture.

  46 shows a state in which the plate portion on the front side of the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the first member 3210 and the second member 3240) is cut out, and the cross section generated by the cutting is shown. The hatching is not shown. For reference, in FIG. 46 (B), the position of the movable member 3454A at the time shown in FIG. 46 (A) is shown by a one-dot chain line, and in FIG. 46 (C), FIG. 46 (B) is shown. The position of the movable member 3454A at the time shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 includes a movable member 3454A, a first link portion 3454B, a second link portion 3454C, a first operating portion 3454D, and a second operating portion 3454E. Each of these portions 3454A to 3454E is made of a resin material.

  The first link portion 3454B is disposed below the movable member 3454A, and one end side of the first link portion 3454B is connected to the movable member 3454A so as to be rotatable around the shaft portion J1A via the shaft portion J1A. Is done. The second link portion 3454C is disposed on the lower side of the movable member 3454A and on the upstream side (passage portion 3219 side) of the first link portion 3454B, and one end side of the second link portion 3454C is interposed via the shaft portion J2A. The movable member 3454A is connected to the shaft portion J2A so as to be rotatable around the shaft portion J2A.

  At a position inside the axial position of the shaft portion J1A in the longitudinal direction of the first link portion 3454B, the shaft portion J1B is threaded so that the first link portion 3454B can rotate around the shaft portion J1B. At the other end side of the second link portion 3454C, the shaft portion J2B is passed through so that the second link portion 3454C can rotate around the shaft portion J2B. Both the shaft portion J1B and the shaft portion J1B are fixed to the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240). In the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the distance between the shaft portion J2A and the shaft portion J2B is longer than the distance between the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B.

  Accordingly, the movable member 3454A, the first link portion 3454B, and the second link portion 3454C constitute a four-bar linkage mechanism in which the movable member 3454A is an intermediate link portion. As will be described later, the first link portion 3454B functions as a drive link portion in the four-bar link mechanism, and the second link portion 3454C functions as a driven link portion.

  A weight portion 3454F is attached to the other end side of the first link portion 3454B (an end side different from the axial position of the shaft portion J1A). The weight portion 3454F includes a weight made of a material having a higher specific gravity than the resin material (for example, a metal such as iron). The weight portion 3454F is rotated around the shaft portion J1B in the first link portion 3454B in a predetermined direction. Thus, when it moves upward, a restoring force that rotates the first link portion 3454B in the opposite direction is given by its weight.

  In addition, in the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240), the weight portion 3454F has a weight counterclockwise in the front view beyond the predetermined first position around the shaft portion J1B. A first stopper portion (not shown) is provided for restricting the rotation of the first stopper portion. The first link portion 3454B is maintained at the initial position by the first stopper portion in a state where the entry restriction solenoid 3464 is not driven.

  Further, when the first link portion 3454B is rotated around the shaft portion J1B in the clockwise direction (in the direction of arrow F3) around the shaft portion J1B, the second member 3240 rotates beyond a predetermined second position. A second stopper portion (not shown) that restricts the operation is provided. Thus, the first link portion 3454B is configured to be rotatable between a first position that is an initial position and a second position that is a predetermined maximum displacement position that is displaced to the maximum from the initial position.

  In the following, regarding the rotation direction around the shaft portion J1B in the first link portion 3454B and the rotation direction around the shaft portion J2B in the second link portion 3454C, the clockwise direction in front view is simply referred to as “clockwise”. The counterclockwise direction in front view is also simply referred to as “counterclockwise”.

  When the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position (first position), the movable member 3454A is disposed at a position where the entrance of the big prize winning device 3434 is closed as shown in FIG. 46 (A). That is, when the first link portion 3454B is at the initial position, the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is placed in the entry prohibition posture (the entry restricted state). When the first link portion 3454B is in the initial position, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A is provided so as to be inclined downward from the passage portion 3219 side toward the passage portion 3220 side. Therefore, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A allows the game ball that has entered from the passage portion 3219 to pass through the game ball when the first link portion 3454B is in the initial position (that is, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition posture). It functions as a support surface that guides to the downstream side (passage portion 3220 side) while supporting the lower side.

  Between the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B in the first link portion 3454B, the surface on the rear side of the first link portion 3454B on the second link portion 3454C side with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B. A projecting portion 3454B1 projecting in a shaft shape is provided on the rear side (the first actuating portion 3454D side). Although details will be described later, when the first link portion 3454B is in the initial position, the first link portion 3454B is rotated clockwise (arrow F3) around the axis J1B by applying a downward force to the protrusion 3454B1. Direction).

  The first operating portion 3454D is made of a dendritic material, and is disposed on the rear side of the link portions 3454B and 3454C and between the first link portion 3454B and the second link portion 3454C. The first operating part 3454D functions as a part that operates the first link part 3454B.

  The first actuating portion 3454D is configured to be gently bent, and at the bent portion, a shaft portion J3A fixed to the winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240) is connected to the shaft portion J3A. The first operating portion 3454D is pivoted around so as to be rotatable. In the following, regarding the rotation direction around the shaft portion J3A in the first operating portion 3454D, the clockwise direction in the front view is simply referred to as “clockwise”, and the counterclockwise direction in the front view is also simply referred to as “counterclockwise”. .

  An opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending from the tip to the shaft portion J3A side is formed on one end side facing the first link portion 3454B side of the first operating portion 3454D, and is substantially U-shaped in front view. Engaging portion 3454D1 is provided. By inserting the protruding portion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B into the opening formed inside the engaging portion 3454D1, the first operating portion 3454D and the first link portion 3454B are engaged.

  On the other end side of the first operating portion 3454D, a protruding portion 3454D2 that protrudes in a shaft shape from the rear surface of the first operating portion 3454D to the rear side (the second operating portion 3454E side) is provided.

  The second operating part 3454E is made of a dendritic material and is arranged on the rear side of the first operating part 3454D. The second actuating unit 3454E has an initial position and a predetermined maximum displacement position displaced to the maximum from the initial position on the left side (arrow F1 direction side) from the initial position by the driving force of the entry restriction solenoid 3464. It is configured to be movable between.

  Specifically, when the entry restricting solenoid 3464 is in the non-driven state, the second operating portion 3454E is disposed at the initial position, and when the entry restricting solenoid 3464 is changed from the non-driven state to the driven state, the second action is performed. The portion 3454E is moved leftward from the initial position to a predetermined maximum displacement position. On the other hand, when the entry restriction solenoid 3464 is changed from the driving state to the non-driving state, the second operating portion 3454E located at the maximum displacement position is moved to the right side to the initial position.

  The second operating part 3454E functions as a part that operates the first operating part 3454D. On the front end side of the second actuating portion 3454E, a groove-like engaging portion is provided that is open at the front and extends upward from the lower end. By inserting the protruding portion 3454D2 of the first operating portion 3454D into the groove-shaped engaging portion, the second operating portion 3454E and the first operating portion 3454D are engaged.

  Accordingly, when the second operating portion 3454E is moved in the left-right direction, a leftward or rightward force is applied to the protruding portion 3454D2 in accordance with the movement, so the second operating portion By moving 3454E, the first operating portion 3454D can be rotated around the shaft portion J3A.

  Since the protruding portion 3454D2 of the first operating portion 3454D is inserted into the engaging portion formed on the front end side of the second operating portion 3454E, the first operating portion when the second operating portion 3454E is in the initial position. The position of 3454D is the initial position of the first operating part 3454D, and the position of the first operating part 3454D when the second operating part 3454E is the maximum displacement position is the maximum displacement of the first operating part 3454D relative to the initial position. Position.

  When the entry restricting solenoid 3464 is in a non-driven state, that is, when the first operating part 3454D and the second operating part 3454E are in the initial positions, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), the first operating part 3454D The engaging portion 3454D1 does not contact the upper side of the protruding portion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B in the initial position. Therefore, when the entry restriction solenoid 3464 is in the non-driven state, the first link portion 3454B is maintained at the initial position, so that the entry restriction mechanism 3454 assumes an entry prohibition posture.

  When the entry restriction solenoid 3464 changes from the non-driving state to the driving state, the second operating portion 3454E is moved to the left side (the direction of the arrow F1), and thus a left side force is applied to the projecting portion 3454D2. Accordingly, the first operating portion 3454D rotates counterclockwise (arrow F2 direction) around the shaft portion J3A.

  When the first operating portion 3454D is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft portion J3A, the engaging portion 3454D1 of the first operating portion 3454D applies a downward force to the protruding portion 3454B1 of the first link portion 3454B. Accordingly, the first link portion 3454B rotates clockwise around the shaft portion J1B (in the direction of arrow F3). As the first link portion 3454B is rotated clockwise around the shaft portion J1B, the movable member 3454A moves toward the second link portion 3454C, and the second link portion 3454C rotates clockwise around the shaft portion J2B. It rotates in the direction of arrow F4.

  As described above, since the distance between the shaft portion J2A and the shaft portion J2B is longer than the distance between the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B, the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the second link portion 3454C is the first. The moving amount of the movable member 3454A on the lower side on the second link portion 3454C side is smaller than the moving amount on the lower side of the first link portion 3454B side. Therefore, as the clockwise rotation of the first link portion 3454B proceeds, that is, as the movement of the second operating portion 3454E toward the left side proceeds, the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A increases (that is, The angle of descent becomes steep.

  The winning device unit 3200 (more specifically, the second member 3240) has a second link portion 3454C that rotates around the shaft portion J2B in the clockwise direction following the rotation of the first link portion 3454B. A third stopper portion (not shown) is provided for restricting the first link portion 3454B from rotating beyond a predetermined position reached before reaching the maximum displacement position.

  Therefore, when the entry restriction solenoid 3464 is changed from the non-driven state to the driven state, that is, when the first link portion 3454B is driven by the first operating portion 3454D, the rotation of the second link portion 3454C is the third stopper portion. The second link portion 3454C is rotated in the clockwise direction following the rotation of the first link portion 3454B until the second link portion 3454C is rotated by the first link portion 3454B. As the movement proceeds, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the upper surface (displacement side 3219 side) is displaced so that the downward inclination angle of the upper surface is increased. A part of the movable member 3454A, which is positioned as the first link portion 3454B is driven, is part of the passage portion 3219 (specifically, a support surface that constitutes the passage portion 3219 and supports the lower side of the game ball). Housed on the lower side.

  Thereafter, after the rotation of the second link portion 3454C is restricted by the third stopper portion, the second link portion 3454C does not rotate, and only the first link portion 3454B is the maximum displacement defined by the second stopper portion. Since it rotates to the position, the movable member 3454A is displaced so that only the downward inclination angle of the upper surface gradually increases as the first link portion 3454B rotates clockwise.

  When the first link portion 3454B that rotates the shaft portion J1B in the clockwise direction reaches the maximum displacement position, the entry restriction mechanism 3454 assumes an entry allowable posture (an entry allowable state). When the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the approach allowing posture, as shown in FIG. 46C, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A supports the game ball that has entered from the passage portion 3219 while supporting the lower side of the game ball. It functions as a support surface for guiding to the passage portion 3221 side.

  In the case where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture, as shown in FIG. 46C, the downward inclination angle of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A is the downward inclination angle of the support surface of the game ball in the passage portion 3219. The angle is larger than Accordingly, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the big prize device 3434 moves on the movable member 3454A at a speed higher than the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage portion 3219. Flow down.

  In addition, when the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the approach allowing posture, the movable member 3454A is displaced to the upstream side, so that a part of the upstream side (the passage portion 3219 side) of the movable member 3454A is below the passage portion 3219. Accordingly, the distance that the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the big prize winning device 3434 can flow down on the movable member 3454A is shortened accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the straight line connecting the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B and the straight line connecting the shaft portion J2A and the shaft portion J2B are Since both are inclined slightly to the left side (counterclockwise side) from the vertical direction, when the attitude change of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 that is the entry prohibition attitude is started, the movable member is initially set In 3454A, both the first link portion 3454B side and the second link portion 3454C side move upward. In such a case, the amount of movement of the movable member 3454A on the first link portion 3454B side is larger than the amount of movement of the second link portion 3454C side on the upper side. The downward inclination angle is temporarily relaxed in a short period after the start of the attitude change of the entry restricting mechanism 3454, which is the approach prohibition attitude.

  When the entry restriction solenoid 3464 is changed from the driving state to the non-driving state, the second operating portion 3454E located at the maximum displacement position is moved in the direction returning to the initial position (direction opposite to the arrow F1 direction). Accordingly, accordingly, the first operating part 3454D also rotates in a direction to return to the initial position.

  As the first operating portion 3454D rotates in the direction to return to the initial position, the first link portion 3454B also rotates in the direction to return to the initial position (direction opposite to the direction of the arrow F3) and is movable accordingly. Each of the member 3454A and the second link portion 3454C also rotates in a direction to return to the initial position.

  The first operating part 3454D that rotates toward the initial position returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the weight part 3454F. As the first operating part 3454D returns to the initial position, the movable member 3454A and the second link part 3454C also return to the initial position, whereby the entry restricting mechanism 3454 assumes the entry prohibition posture.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of the behavior of two game balls P1 and P2 that continuously enter the entrance of the big prize device 3434 from the passage portion 3219 when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment is in the entry allowable posture. It is a schematic diagram shown. In addition, in FIG. 47, illustration of the 2nd action | operation part 3454E is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, when the posture shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, the angle of descending inclination of the support surface of the movable member 3454A (hereinafter simply “movable”). (Also referred to as “the angle of descending inclination of the member 3454A”) can increase the speed at which the game ball entering from the entrance of the big prize device 3434 flows down on the movable member 3454A, and the movable member 3454A By displacing to the upstream side, the distance that the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the big prize winning device 3434 can flow down on the movable member 3454A can be shortened.

  Therefore, by setting the amount of displacement of the movable member 3454A to the upstream side and the magnitude of the downward inclination angle of the movable member 3454A when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, a big prize is awarded. It is possible to control the time that the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the device 3434 stays on the movable member 3454A.

  In the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, basically, two or more game balls are simultaneously on the support surface of the game ball in the movable member 3454A (that is, the upper surface of the movable member 3454A) when the approach is allowed to enter. The amount of displacement of the movable member 3454A to the upstream side and the magnitude of the downward tilt angle of the movable member 3454A when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture are set so as not to flow down.

  That is, in the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the movable member 3454A to the upstream side when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, and the downward inclination angle of the movable member 3454A. In the situation where the two game balls P1 and P2 continuously flow down on the passage portion 3219 when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture (FIG. 47 (A)), The game ball P1 that has entered the entrance of the grand prize winning device 3434 flows down on the support surface of the movable member 3454A at a faster speed than the game ball P2 that flows down on the passage portion 3219 (FIG. 47B). Before the P2 reaches the support surface of the movable member 3454A, it is detected by the big prize switch 3444 (FIG. 47C).

  FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram for explaining the possibility of occurrence of ball biting in the big prize device 3434 including the entry restriction mechanism 3454 of the present embodiment. In FIG. 48, the second operating portion 3454E is not shown, and a line segment passing through the center of the game ball P in the game ball P (that is, the diameter of the game ball P) is indicated by a one-dot chain line. .

  As shown in FIG. 48, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 of this embodiment has a distance equal to the diameter of the game ball P between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A facing the tip at the downstream side of the tip. In a separated state, that is, in a state where the distance between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A is one game ball P, the contact point D1 between the game ball P and the tip of the movable member 3454A and the game ball A line segment connecting P and the contact point D2 between the wall portion 3220A is set so as to pass substantially horizontally through a position substantially corresponding to the center C of the game ball P.

  By setting the entry restricting mechanism 3454 in this way, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 is in the transition to move from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowable posture, and the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the transition to move from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture. Then, the occurrence of a state where the game ball is sandwiched between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A (so-called ball biting) is suppressed.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 48 or a state close to that state occurs during the transition of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, the force transmitted to the movable member 3454A by the weight of the game ball is The tip of the movable member 3454A acts in the direction of moving toward the upstream side (that is, the passage portion 3219 side), and the space between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A is larger than one of the game balls P. It is easy to be done. For this reason, the game ball P can be allowed to enter the big winning device 3434 without causing the ball biting.

  Further, when the state shown in FIG. 48 or a state close to that state occurs during the transition in which the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture, the movable member 3454A is transferred as the transition to the entry prohibited posture. The force transmitted to the movable member 3454A due to the weight of the game ball is a line segment connecting the contact point D1 and the contact point D2, and the center C of the game ball P is about to move to the downstream side (that is, the wall portion 3220A side). Since it passes through a position substantially corresponding to the position approximately horizontally, it acts strongly in a direction to push the movable member 3454A back to the approach allowable posture like a wedge. For this reason, the movement (displacement) of the movable member 3454A to the downstream side is prevented, and the tip of the movable member 3454A is temporarily returned to the position where the entry of the game ball is allowed, and the game ball P passes downward. After that, it shifts to the approach prohibition posture again. Therefore, the game ball P can be made to enter the big prize device 3434 without the ball biting.

  Further, when the game ball P that contacts the tip of the movable member 3454A is positioned sufficiently high, the game ball P is gradually pushed upward by the movable member 3454A and is guided to the passage portion 3220 side. In other words, during the transition where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry allowance posture to the entry prohibition posture, in a situation where the distance between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A is sufficiently shorter than the diameter of the game ball, When the distal end of the movable member 3454A is reached, the distal end of the movable member 3454A is located sufficiently below the substantially horizontal position passing through the center of the game ball, and as the movable member 3454A moves downstream. Thus, the game ball can be gradually pushed upward by the tip of the movable member 3454A and guided to the passage portion 3220 side. Therefore, also in this case, the occurrence of ball biting is suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49 to FIG. 51, a configuration in which game balls passing through the passage portion 3215 are discharged to the front side will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic front view of a winning device unit 3200 showing an example of a state in which game balls are stacked one above the other in the passage portion 3215, and FIG. 50 is a drawing of the winning device unit 3200 in the YY line of FIG. It is a simplified sectional view. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the behavior of the game ball PB discharged forward from an opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215.

  49 to 51, for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the winning device unit 3200 is illustrated by a solid line or a one-dot chain line, and an example of the traveling direction of the game ball PB is indicated by a solid arrow. It is shown. In FIG. 49, for reference, a vertical center line passing through the center of the game ball PA is shown by a one-dot chain line. In FIG. 50, the position of the game ball support surface 3214 </ b> A in the passage portion 3214 is shown by a one-dot chain line for reference. Further, in FIG. 51, for reference, a straight line E passing through the shaft portion J1B on the vertical direction side is illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

  When the game ball guided to the vertical direction side by the passage portion 3215 reaches the support surface 3217A that guides the game ball to the horizontal direction side (more specifically, the left direction side), the guidance direction of the game ball is changed before and after that. Since it changes greatly, the flow speed (advance speed) of the game ball is greatly reduced. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the passage portion 3215 next to the game ball may come into contact with the game ball that has previously entered the passage portion 3215 and reached the support surface 3217A.

  In FIG. 49 (A), with respect to the game ball PA that has passed through the passage portion 3215 and reached the support surface 3217A (that is, the lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A), the passage portion 3215 is next to the game ball PA. The game ball PB that enters the ball and flows down in the vertical direction is guided in the horizontal direction of the game ball by the support surface 3217A from the center of the game ball PA (in the example of the winning device unit 3200 shown in FIG. An example in the case of contact at a position opposite to (direction) is shown.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 49 (A), the lower game ball PA receives a force directed toward the horizontal direction of the game ball by the support surface 3217A due to contact with the game ball PB. Entry into is smooth. As the game ball PA smoothly enters the passage portion 3217, the game ball PB following the game ball PA is placed on the support surface 3217A before being discharged from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side. Accordingly, the passage portion 3217 is guided to the movable member 3454A of the entry restriction mechanism 3454.

  In FIG. 49B, the game ball PB that has passed through the passage portion 3215 and reached the support surface 3217A enters the passage portion 3215 next to the game ball PA and flows down to the vertical direction side. An example of a case where the game ball PA is in contact with the center of the game ball PA at a position on the side of the guide direction (left direction in the example of the winning device unit 3200 shown in FIG. 49A) of the game ball by the support surface 3217A. Is illustrated.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 49 (B), the lower game ball PA is in contact with the game ball PB. The force is directed in the direction opposite to the guide direction on the horizontal direction side of the game ball by the support surface 3217A. Since a force in a direction to cancel the movement of the game ball along the inclination of the support surface 3217A is received, the state is temporarily stopped or almost stopped. Therefore, the game ball PB that has contacted the game ball PA is likely to be discharged (guided) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side of the opening before reaching the support surface 3217A. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, the rear wall portion 3215A of the passage portion 3215 is the front surface of the upper portion 3215A1 above the support surface 3214A of the game ball in the passage portion 3214 (ie, the surface facing the passage portion 3215). However, it is comprised in the shape which protruded ahead from the lower side part 3215A2 below the support surface 3214A.

  As a result, among the game balls stacked vertically in the passage portion 3215, the upper game ball PB is restricted from moving backward by the front surface of the upper portion 3215A1, so the game ball PB is lowered by the support surface 3217A. The game ball is supported on the side, and the center of the game ball PA with respect to the game ball PA positioned between the wall 3217B standing on the front side of the support surface 3217A and the lower side 3215A2 of the wall 3215A Contact at a more forward position. Therefore, the upper game ball PB is easily guided to the front side, and is easily discharged (guided) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side with respect to the opening.

  The game ball PB discharged to the front side from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 falls to the front lower side with respect to the opening as indicated by an arrow Q11. At the destination of the fall, an entrance (winning port) of the big winning device 3434 is provided. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball PB that has fallen (discharged) from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 is supported by the upper surface of the movable member 3454A, and the passage portion. You are directed to 3220. On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball PB dropped from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 is placed in the big prize device 3434 as shown in FIG. You can enter.

  Further, in a situation where the game ball PB discharged to the front side from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion When the straight line connecting J1B is inclined to the right side with respect to the straight line E passing through the shaft portion J1B, the movable member 3454A shifts to the approach allowing posture.

  Specifically, the movable member 3454A that has received the downward force by the game ball PB falling from the upper side has an end portion on the side where the shaft portion J1 is passed through the first link portion 3454B by the weight portion 3454F. Since the first link portion 3454B is pushed downward around the shaft portion J1B by a force exceeding the restoring force, the movable member 3454A opens the entrance of the big prize winning device 3434. (That is, the side where the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts to the entry allowable posture).

  That is, even if the game ball PB discharged from the opening formed in the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A in the middle of the posture change when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 changes from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture. Since the movable member 3454A moves to the side of opening the entrance of the big winning device 3434, the game ball PB can be entered into the big winning device 3434.

  Further, in a situation where the game ball PB discharged to the front side from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A, a situation near the end of shifting to the entry prohibition posture (specifically, In a situation where the straight line connecting the shaft portion J1A and the shaft portion J1B overlaps the straight line E), the upper surface of the movable member 3454A (the support surface capable of supporting the game ball facing upward) is located below the passage portion 3215. It will be placed waiting for game balls. In this situation, even if the game ball from the passage portion 3215 contacts the movable member 3454A, the game ball can be supported on the upper surface of the movable member 3454A, and the movable member 3454A can be shifted to the entry prohibition posture. it can. For this reason, in a situation near the end of the transition to the entry prohibition posture, a situation in which the game ball contacts the end portion of the movable member 3454A on the side close to the wall portion 3220A cannot occur.

  That is, when the game ball PB discharged from the opening formed in the passage portion 3215 falls on the movable member 3454A during the posture transition when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry allowable posture to the entry prohibited posture. The game ball PB is sandwiched between the tip of the movable member 3454A and the wall portion 3220A, and the occurrence of the ball biting can be suppressed. Therefore, even when the game ball falls from the passage portion 3215 toward the entrance of the big winning device 3434 and comes into contact with the movable member 3454A, the occurrence or damage of the big winning device 3434 including the movable member 3454A is suppressed. can do.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right start prize-winning device 3432 is configured to be prevented from entering and allowed to enter by a pivoting motion of a movable member 3452A configured to be pivotable about the vertical side. And when the movable member 3452A is in the entry prohibition posture (first guidance state), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to the passage portion 3218, and the movable member 3452A is allowed to enter. In the case of the posture (second guidance state), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is guided to the passage portion 3241.

  Since the movable member 3452A is pivotable about the vertical direction side, the support member 3452A3 that supports the lower side of the game ball in the movable member 3452A is upstream of the pivot center of the movable member 3452A (ie, the movable surface 3452A). In the section on the entrance part 3542A1 side), when the movable member 3452A is pivoted about the vertical direction side, the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 in the section is subjected to centrifugal force due to the pivoting action. A force for moving the game ball in the direction returning to the upstream side can be generated.

  Therefore, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 in any of the case where the movable member 3452A is shifted from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowable posture and the case where the movable member 3452A is shifted from the entry allowable posture to the advance prohibition posture. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3452A3 to travel in the direction from the upstream side (inlet portion 3452A1) toward the downstream side (outlet portion 3452A2).

  This makes it difficult to advance the game ball to the side where the game ball is guided (that is, the side of the passage portion 3241) in the entry allowable posture, while setting a long time for shifting (switching) from the entry prohibited posture to the entry allowable posture. That is, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls entering the passage portion 3241 side.

  Therefore, according to the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the present embodiment, it is easy for the game ball to visually recognize the situation in which the movable member 3452A has shifted to the approach allowable posture, and the number of game balls entering the passage portion 3241 is reduced. A right start winning device 3432 that is easy to set can be configured.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A in the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is provided to be below the level difference with respect to the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 provided on the upstream side. Therefore, the angle (gradient) of the descending slope in the support surface 3352A3 can be reduced by the size of the step between the support surface 3217A and the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 (the inlet portion 3452A1 side).

  The smaller the downward inclination angle of the support surface 3442A3, the slower the progress of the game ball by the support surface 3452A3. Therefore, the game ball advances to the side where the game ball is guided (that is, the passage portion 3241 side) in the approach allowing posture. It can be made difficult. Therefore, at this point as well, the game ball is easy to visually recognize the situation where the movable member 3452A is transitioning to the approaching allowable posture, and the number of game balls that enter the path portion 3241 (the number of wins) is set small. An easy right start winning device 3432 can be configured.

  Further, a step is formed between the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 and the upstream side of the support surface 3452A3 (the inlet portion 3452A1 side), so that the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A (support surface 3452A3) can be obtained. The return to the passage portion 3217 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the movable surface 3452A of the movable member 3452A is movable when the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3352A2 side, that is, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture. A ball escape portion 3452A6 is provided on the side opposite to the direction of rotation of the member 3452A. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 3451 is shifted (switched) from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 moves relative to the rotation direction in the opposite direction side. Since it is easy, it is easy to reach the ball escape portion 3452A6 provided on the opposite direction side (that is, the wall portion 3352A5 side).

  The ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a stepped portion in which the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3 is on the lower side with respect to the wall portion 3452A4 side. The game ball can be discharged from the outlet portion 3492A2. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is changed (switched) from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture, the game ball supported by the support surface 3452A3 can be easily discharged to the passage portion 3218 side during the change.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game ball to the passage portion 3241 is placed on the outer edge side of the support surface 3452A3 of the movable member 3452A of the entry restriction mechanism 3452 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the entry allowable posture. A wall portion 3452A4 that functions as a portion that restricts entry, and a wall portion 3452A5 that functions as a portion that restricts the entry of a game ball into the passage portion 3218 when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 is in the approach-permitted posture. In addition, an outlet portion 3452A2 is formed between the wall portion 3452A4 and the wall portion 3452A5.

  Since the wall portion 3452A5 is configured to have a shape in which the outlet portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A5 is viewed from the front is greatly cut out as compared with the outlet portion 3452A2 side when the wall portion 3452A4 is viewed from the front. When the mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture, the wall portion 3452A4 is difficult to open the entrance portion of the passage portion 3241, and the wall portion 3452A5 is difficult to close the entrance portion of the passage portion 3218, On the other hand, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry-permitted posture to the entry-prohibited posture, the wall portion 3452A4 can easily close the inlet portion of the passage portion 3241, and the wall portion 3252A5 becomes the inlet portion of the passage portion 3218. Can be opened easily. Therefore, during the posture transition when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 moves from one posture to another posture (that is, from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture or from the entry permission posture to the entry prohibition posture), the support surface It is possible to make it easier for a game ball flowing down on 3452A3 to enter the passage portion 3218.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 in the big prize device 3434 shifts from the entry prohibition posture (the entry restricted state) to the entry allowable posture (the entry allowable state), the movable member 3454A is The movable member 3454A is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball travels (that is, the upstream side), and the descending inclination angle of the movable member 3454A is larger (steeper) than that in the approach prohibition posture. The inclination of guiding the game ball to the passage portion 3221.

  Since the movable member 3454A is displaced to the upstream side in accordance with the posture change of the entry restriction mechanism 3454, a part of the upstream side of the movable member 3454A is accommodated on the lower side of the passage portion 3219, so that the entry restriction mechanism 3454 enters. In the case of the allowable posture, the game ball cannot pass through (contact with) the portion of the support surface of the game ball in the movable member 3454A that is accommodated on the lower side of the passage portion 3219.

  Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 3454 is in the entry permission posture, the position at which the game ball discharged from the downstream side of the passage portion 3219 reaches (falls) the movable member 3454A is the entry restriction mechanism 3454 in the entry prohibition posture. Since the position is downstream of the position reached in some cases, the arrival position (falling position) of the game balls discharged from the downstream side of the passage portion 3219 is dispersed. Therefore, since the position of the load applied to the upper surface (support surface) of the movable member 3454A can be dispersed, the progress of aging deterioration in the movable member 3454A is suppressed, and thereby the movable member 3454A can be easily kept in a suitable state. .

  In particular, the displacement of the position of the movable member 3454A and the displacement of the descending inclination accompanying the change in the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 3454 are mechanically realized by a four-bar linkage mechanism having the movable member 3454A as an intermediate link portion. The movable member 3454A can be suitably displaced while suppressing the above.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction side and the downstream side thereof are connected to guide the game ball to a predetermined horizontal direction side (more specifically, to the right side). In the configuration including the passage portion 3217, an opening is formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215. Accordingly, when another game ball is stacked on the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217, the upper game ball among the stacked game balls is From the opening formed in the front side, it discharges | emits to the front side with respect to the said opening.

  Therefore, the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction side is a predetermined direction side (more specifically, the passage) that intersects the upper game ball with the vertical direction side among the game balls stacked vertically. Since the portion 3217 can function as a guiding portion that guides to a predetermined direction crossing a plane including the continuous direction side and the vertical direction side, the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction side and the passage portion 3215 In a configuration in which a passage portion 3217 that guides the game ball that has passed through a predetermined horizontal direction is provided in a row, another game ball is stacked on the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217. The occurrence of clogged balls (ball biting) can be suppressed.

  In particular, on the lower side of the direction in which the game balls are discharged by the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 (that is, the front side), an entrance (winning port) for the big prize device 3434 is provided. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball discharged to the front side from the opening may win the big winning device 3434. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the situation where the game ball is discharged from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215.

  In particular, a game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 is not only guided to a predetermined horizontal direction side (more specifically, the right direction side) by the support surface 3217A, but also by the wall portion 3217B. , A predetermined direction side intersecting with the vertical direction side (more specifically, a predetermined direction side intersecting with a plane including the direction side where the passage portion 3217 continues and the vertical direction side), and the entry of the big prize device 3434 Guide to the side where the mouth is provided is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 from being guided in the predetermined direction, and selectively play the game balls stacked on the upper side of the game ball. It can be guided to the direction side.

  Moreover, since the opening formed in the front side of the channel | path part 3215 is formed as an opening above the wall part 3217B and facing the said predetermined direction side, the upper end of the wall part 3217B can be diverted as the lower end of the said opening. . Therefore, it is possible to realize the occurrence of a ball clogging caused by another game ball stacked on the game ball whose lower side is supported by the support surface 3217A of the passage portion 3217 with a simple configuration.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the passage portions 3214, 3215, 3217, and 3218 including the entrance portion of the right start winning device 3432 are located on the rear side with respect to the front surface of the base body 401. The passage portions 3219 and 3220 including the entrance portion (advance entrance) are arranged so as to be located on the front side with respect to the front surface of the base body 401. For this reason, the entrance portion between the big prize winning device 3433 and the right starting prize winning device 3432 is compared with the configuration in which the passage including the entrance portions of the big prize winning device and the right start winning prize device is provided in front of the front surface of the base body 401. Can be reduced, and the size of the winning device unit 3200 in the front view can be reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which the entrance portion of the big winning device 3433 and most of the winning device unit 3200 including the right start winning device 3432 are provided as described above with respect to the front surface of the base body 401, the entrance device 436 is entered. Since the game ball is configured to enter only the entrance 3211 of the winning device unit 3200, a path through which the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 reaches the entrance portion (advance entrance) of the big winning device 3433 , The passage entering the passage portion 3219 through the opening portion 3218A of the passage portion 3218 (the route in the direction of the arrow Q6 and arrow Q7 in FIG. 40) or the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 is discharged to the front side. It can be limited to any one of the routes (route in the direction of arrow Q11 in FIG. 51). Thereby, the occurrence of breakage or failure of the big prize device 3434 including the movable member 3454A by the game ball can be suitably suppressed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the display time of the normal symbol variation display executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery is characteristically configured. The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment includes a game board in which a right start prize winning device 3432 is provided on the downstream side of the starter 436, similar to the game board 400X1 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment. Is done.

  In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to tenth embodiments described above, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the eleventh embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to tenth embodiments described above, or the first to tenth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the timing of the detection of the game ball by the start switch 466 and the transition to the entry allowable posture in the entry restricting mechanism 3452 of the right start winning device 3432. 52, for reference, each position of the game ball at each time measured from the time (time t1) when the game ball is detected by the start switch 466 is shown in the flow path of the game ball shown in FIG. It represents with the code | symbol (Q1, Q3, Q4, Q6, Q7) attached | subjected to the arrow shown.

  The timing chart of FIG. 52 represents the operation timing at each time, and does not accurately indicate the positional relationship of each time on the time axis (horizontal axis) (that is, the time interval of each time).

  When a game ball fired by the right-handed game technique enters the starter 436, the start switch 446 detects the game ball and shifts to an on state at time t1. When a game ball is detected by the start switch 446, a normal symbol lottery is executed based on the detection.

  After the start switch 446 is turned on, the start switch 446 is turned off at time t2. If it is not during the unit game related to the normal symbol, the normal symbol display device 473 starts the variation display of the normal symbol at the timing when the start switch 446 shifts to the OFF state (that is, time t2).

  When the game ball that has passed through the starter 436 enters the entrance portion 3211 of the winning device unit 3200, the game ball enters the entrance portion 3211 at time t3 during which the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display device 473 is being executed. Enter. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion 3211 travels the passage portion 3214 (see FIG. 40A) to the left side (the direction of the arrow Q1) and then travels the passage portion 3215 to the vertical direction side at time t4. Then, the passage portion 3217 (see FIG. 40B) is entered.

  The game ball that has entered the passage portion 3217 advances to the right side (arrow Q4 direction) through the passage portion 3217, and enters the movable member 3452A in the entry restriction mechanism 3452 in the entry prohibition posture at time t5. The game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A flows down toward the outlet portion 3452A2 while being supported by the support surface 3452A3 (while contacting the support surface 3452A3).

  At time t6 after the timing at which the game ball enters the movable member 3452A (that is, time t5), the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed on the normal symbol display device 473, thereby stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. (finish. When the normal symbol lottery is won in the non-short-time state (the normal game state and the special game state), the entry restriction mechanism 3452 enters from the entry prohibition posture at the timing when the normal symbol variation display ends (that is, at time t6). Move to an acceptable posture.

  When the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry allowable posture by winning the normal symbol lottery in the non-time-short state, a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, corresponding to the non-time-short state) (for example, , Approximately 0.3 seconds), the approaching allowable posture is maintained, and then the state is again shifted to the approach prohibition posture at time t7.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the entry restriction is performed over a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.3 seconds) corresponding to the non-shortening state by winning in the normal symbol lottery in the non-shortening state. At time t6 when the mechanism 3452 shifts to the allowable entry posture (that is, the time when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the allowable entry posture), the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A at the time t5 cannot enter the passage portion 3241. Such a time is set in advance.

  Note that the transition time (ie, the period from time t1 to time t6) from when the game ball is detected by the start switch 446 to when the entry restricting mechanism 3452 is shifted to the entry allowable posture is the start device 436 and the winning device unit. Depending on the arrangement position and shape of the 3200, it is within a certain time range, and the time from the detection timing of the game ball by the starter 436 until the game ball is positioned on the movable member 3452A is also based on the actually measured value. It can be estimated in advance. Based on the average value of the values estimated from the actual measurement values, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the transition time is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 920. In the normal symbol related process S1218 (see FIG. 12), the main control board 920 displays a change according to the change time of the normal symbol set based on the transition time. Control to shift to the approach allowable posture.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the period from when the normal symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped (that is, the normal symbol variation display time) is the timing at which the start switch 446 is turned off. The period is set in advance from (time t2) to time t6 set as described above. Therefore, when the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture at the time t7, the game ball on the movable member 3452A is not the passage portion 3241 (see FIG. 40B) but the passage portion 3218 ( Enter (see FIG. 40B). Then, the game ball proceeds through the passage portion 3218 in the direction of the arrow Q6, then enters the passage portion 3219 (see FIG. 40C), and proceeds through the passage portion 3219 in the direction of the arrow Q7.

  When the normal symbol lottery is won in the short time state (the short time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state), the normal symbol currently being executed in the normal symbol display device 473 at the same time t6 as the case where the normal symbol lottery is won in the non-short time state. , The entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture.

  When the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the approach allowable posture by winning the normal symbol lottery in the time reduction state, the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately It shifts to the approaching allowable posture intermittently (for example, divided into three times) for 4.8 seconds). When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the right start winning switch 3442, the entry restriction mechanism 3452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse, Further, even when the number of times of transition to the approaching allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 3432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  Note that it is not necessary to set only the above-mentioned variation display time as the variation display time of the normal symbol, and select any variation display time by lottery including other variation display times. Also good.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start switch 466 in a non-time-short state (that is, when a normal symbol start condition is satisfied), the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 473 is displayed. The variable display is started after entering the movable member 3452A in the entry prohibition posture, and then the movable member 3452A that has shifted to the entry allowable posture based on the winning in the normal symbol lottery, the game ball on the support surface 3452A3 is It is configured to be executed until a time (time t6) at which the passage portion 3241 cannot be entered.

  That is, the length of the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol executed when the normal symbol start condition is satisfied in the non-time-short state is in contact with the movable member 3452A taking the approaching allowable posture (more Specifically, the length of the game ball (contacted on the support surface 3452A3) cannot enter the passage portion 3241 due to the shift of the movable member 3452A to the entry prohibition posture.

  As a result, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time-saving state, the player hits the normal member display unit 473 and displays the game ball on the movable member 3452A in the allowed entry posture at the timing when the symbol is displayed as the stop symbol. Can be visually confirmed that they have contacted (that is, contacted on the support surface 3452A3), and that the game ball that has contacted the movable member 3452A could not enter the passage portion 3241. Therefore, even when the maximum allowable entry time is set to an extremely short time such as 0.1 second, such as when the normal symbol start condition is satisfied in the non-time-short state, the movable member 3452A is allowed to enter the allowable posture. It is possible to make the player easily see the situation that has shifted to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the game ball is detected by the start switch 466 in the time-short state, the game ball is started by the start switch 466 in the non-time-short state. Is the same length as the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol fluctuation display.

  As a result, even when the normal symbol start condition is established in the time-short state, the player can set the normal symbol start condition in the non-time-short state at the timing when the symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 473 and displayed as a stop symbol. As in the case where it is established, it is possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member 3452A in the allowed entry posture, so that the player can easily recognize the situation where the movable member 3452A has shifted to the permitted entry posture. it can.

  Further, in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, at the timing when the symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 473 and displayed as a stop symbol, the player has detected that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member 3452A in the allowed entry posture. Since it can be visually recognized, it is easy to identify a difference in the maximum allowable entry time of the movable member 3452A according to the gaming state, and thereby, it is easy to identify whether the gaming state is the short-time state or the non-short-time state.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment, similar to the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is configured as a pachinko machine having a setting change function for setting a game ball exit rate (machine discount, payout rate). Is done. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment provided with such a setting change function, measures are taken to prevent the ball pitch rate from being set illegally.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eleventh embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the twelfth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to eleventh embodiments described above, or the first to eleventh embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 53). The main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a process that is started when the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment returns from the power failure state.

  Hereinafter, parts different from the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment will be described. In the main process of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907 in the setting change process S2003, the back setting switch 905 is selected. Open / close detection switch for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 (see FIG. 1) is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIG. 1) when the setting signal from is turned off (S2004: Y) A process 3001 for determining the output state of the signal from 108 (see FIG. 16) is performed.

  Specifically, when the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 is in an on state indicating that the intermediate block 103 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (ie, in an open state) (S3001: Y). ), RAM change setting processing S2005 is executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the back setting switch 905 is used. Is not operated by the predetermined key (that is, the operation of the back setting switch 905 by the predetermined key is ended), the gaming mode (the ball-out rate) in the pachinko machine 100 is changed to the back setting switch 905. The game mode after the change by the operation of the initialization switch 907 is set (that is, the game mode setting change is validated).

  On the other hand, when the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 is in an off state indicating that the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (S3001: N), the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is output. It is determined whether or not the state has changed from the off state to the on state (determination process S3002). If it is determined in the determination process S3002 that the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state (S3002: N), a temporary setting notification process S3003 is executed.

  In the temporary setting notification process S3003, the main control board 920 executes control for executing a predetermined temporary setting notification. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 outputs a control signal for causing the acoustic devices 281 and 282 to output temporary setting notification sounds to the sub-control board 940. Thereby, a predetermined temporary setting notification sound is output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 as the temporary setting notification. The temporary setting notification sound may be, for example, a repeated sound such as “setting change is not enabled”, or may be a predetermined pattern of electronic sound such as “beep beep”.

  In the determination process S3002, when it is determined that the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 has changed from the off state to the on state (S3002: Y), a RAM change setting process S2005 is executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a game mode change operation (selection operation) is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In this case, on the condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 after the change operation, the game mode (outcome rate) in the pachinko machine 100 is determined by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. The game mode after the change by operation is set.

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart relating to setting changes by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. More specifically, FIG. 54A is a timing chart when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. FIG. 54B is a timing chart when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101.

  Each timing chart in FIGS. 54A and 54B represents the timing of the operation or state at each time, and the positional relationship of each time on the time axis (horizontal axis) (that is, each time). It is not an accurate indication of the time interval.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is on), at time t11, When the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (specifically, rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise), the setting signal from the switch 905 is turned on.

  While the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (that is, while an ON setting signal is output from the switch 905), the main control board 920 executes the setting change process S2003 described above. Specifically, every time the initialization switch 907 is pressed while the ON state setting signal is output from the rear surface setting switch 905 (that is, every time the ON state initialization signal is output from the initialization switch 907). ), The main control board 920 cyclically selects a plurality of predetermined (for example, nine) game modes one by one, and sets a value corresponding to the selected game mode in a predetermined area of the RAM. Store as correspondence information.

  When the operation of the rear surface setting switch 905 with a predetermined key is finished at time t12 (that is, when the setting signal from the switch 905 changes to the OFF state), the main control board 920 reads the RAM change setting process S2005 described above. Execute. As a result, the game mode (ball-out rate) in the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 (that is, the game mode setting change is validated). )

  Therefore, when a game mode change operation is performed by the switches 905 and 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the timing at which the change operation ends, that is, a predetermined key The game mode changed by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 at the timing when the operation of the back setting switch 905 is completed (time t12) before the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is operated. It is newly set in place of the game mode (old game mode) that has been set.

  Until the intermediate block 103 is closed at time t13 with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, while the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is in the ON state), the ON state output from the open / close detection switch 108 is maintained. The main control board 920 that receives the signal executes control for executing a predetermined opening / closing notification. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control board 920 outputs a control signal for outputting an opening / closing notification sound from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 to the sub control board 940. Thereby, a predetermined opening / closing notification sound is output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 as the opening / closing notification.

  Note that the opening / closing notification sound that is output until the intermediate block 103 is closed at the time t13 with respect to the outer frame 101 is the control start process (after the program start process S1001 is executed, until the random number initial setting process S1019 is executed). When the intermediate block 103 is released to the outer frame 101 during the execution of each process related to the normal game after each process is performed, the release period (period from time tA to time tB) Thus, the opening / closing notification sound output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 is the same.

  As the opening / closing notification sound, for example, a sound such as “the door is open” may be repeated, or an electronic sound of a predetermined pattern such as “PPP ...” may be used. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing notification sound is an electronic sound of a predetermined pattern, the electronic sound pattern is different from the electronic sound as the temporary setting notification sound.

  As described above, when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the temporary setting neglecting process S3003 is not executed, and thus the acoustic device 281 is performed. , 282, the temporary setting notification sound is not output.

  As shown in FIG. 54B, when the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is in the OFF state), the rear setting switch 905 The main control board 920 executes the above-described setting change processing S2003 while the ON setting signal is output from the back setting switch 905 due to the operation of the predetermined key (from time t21 to time t22). To do. Therefore, between the time t21 and the time t22, each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed, a plurality of predetermined game modes are sequentially selected one by one in order, and the selected game mode is set. The corresponding value is stored as setting correspondence information in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  At the time t22, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is finished (that is, when the setting signal from the switch 905 is turned off), the temporary setting leaving process S3003 described above is executed, thereby The output of the temporary setting notification sound is started from the acoustic devices 281 and 282.

  After that, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 at time t23 (that is, when the signal output from the open / close detection switch 108 is turned on), the main control board 920 changes the above-described RAM change. A setting process S2005 is executed. As a result, the game mode (ball-out rate) in the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 (that is, the game mode setting change is validated). )

  Therefore, when a game mode change operation is performed by the switches 905 and 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, after the change operation is completed, At the timing when the intermediate block 103 is released (time t23), the game mode changed by the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is set before the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is operated. It is newly set instead of the game mode.

  Further, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 at time t23, the temporary setting leaving processing S3003 is not executed, so that the output of the temporary setting notification sound started from time t22 is stopped at time t23. .

  On the other hand, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, the main control board 920 starts control for executing a predetermined opening / closing notification at time t23. Thereby, the output of the opening / closing notification sound is started from the acoustic devices 281 and 282. That is, at time t23, the sound output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 is switched from the temporary setting notification sound to the opening / closing notification sound.

  Note that the opening / closing notification sound that starts output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 at time t23 is subjected to the control start process, similar to the opening / closing notification sound that starts output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 at time t12. Same as the opening / closing notification sound that is output from the sound devices 281 and 282 when the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 during the execution of each process related to the subsequent normal game (that is, at time tA). Is.

  After that, when the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at time 24, the control for executing the predetermined opening / closing notification is not performed, so the output of the opening / closing notification sound started from time 23 is Stop at time t24.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  Like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine is configured such that the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 provided on the back side can be operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In the machine, even if the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in this situation, the operation may not be detected from the front side of the pachinko machine, so that the game mode (the rate of play) is illegally changed. There was a risk of being.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game mode (out-going rate) is changed by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. When an operation is performed, the main block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101 after the change operation is completed (that is, after the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key). The game mode in the pachinko machine 100 is set to the game mode after the change by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907.

  Therefore, in order for the game mode changed (selected) by pressing the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 to be set as a new game mode, Since employees of the field need to perform an opening operation of the intermediate block 103 (an operation to open the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101), it is possible to suppress an illegal change of the game mode in this state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, a predetermined key is used. When the operation of the back setting switch 905 is terminated, the temporary setting notification (in this embodiment, the output of the temporary setting notification sound) is performed. Therefore, also in this respect, the game mode is illegally changed in this state. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in a situation where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged, workers of the manufacturing plant and employees of the game hall can make various actions from the back side (back side) of the pachinko machine 100 in which the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. After the game mode change operation (setting change operation) is performed by the switches 905 and 907, the pachinko machine 100 that has performed the changing operation can be easily recognized by the temporary setting notification. Or it is easy to avoid a situation where the setting of another pachinko machine is accidentally changed.

  The temporary setting notification is configured to stop (end) on condition that the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. Therefore, when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, in order to stop the temporary setting notification output thereby, Since an employee or the like needs to perform the opening operation of the intermediate block 103, an illegal change of the game mode can be suitably suppressed in this respect.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment, as with the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 has a setting change function for setting the game ball launch rate (machine discount, payout rate), and the exit rate. Is configured as a pachinko machine with measures to prevent unauthorized setting. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment in that a notification of the same content as the door opening notification is performed as the temporary setting notification.

  In the following description, the same components as those in the first to twelfth embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, the configuration described below in the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to twelfth embodiments described above, or the first to twelfth embodiments described above. Instead of a partial configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it may be provided.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the temporary setting notification process S3003 (see FIG. 53), the main control board 920 sends a control signal for outputting an opening / closing notification sound from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 to the sub-control board 940. Output. Thereby, a predetermined opening / closing notification sound is output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 as the temporary setting notification. The opening / closing notification sound starts to be output from the audio devices 281 and 282 when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 during execution of each process related to the normal game after the control start process is performed. This is the same as the opening / closing notification sound.

  FIG. 55 is a timing chart relating to the setting change by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907. More specifically, FIG. 54 is a timing chart when the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are operated in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101.

  Hereinafter, the back setting switch 905 and the initialization are performed in a state different from the timing chart of FIG. 54B described above, that is, in the state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment. A portion different from the case where the switch 907 is operated will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 55, at the time t22, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is finished (that is, when the setting signal from the switch 905 is turned off), the temporary setting negation described above is performed. Processing S3003 is performed, and thereby, output of the opening / closing notification sound is started from the sound devices 281 and 282 as temporary setting notification.

  Thereafter, when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 at time t23, the temporary setting neglect processing S3003 is not executed, but on the other hand, control for executing a predetermined opening / closing notification is started. Therefore, the opening / closing notification sound is continuously output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282.

  Therefore, when the opening / closing notification sound is constituted by, for example, repeating a voice “opening the door”, after the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is finished, the intermediate block 103 is set to the outer frame 101. Until the door is opened and closed (that is, from time t22 to time t24), the sound “the door is open” is repeatedly output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 as an opening / closing notification sound. .

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 provided on the back side is performed with the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, An opening / closing notification sound is output as the temporary setting notification. The opening / closing notification sound is a notification sound that is output even when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101, and is a sound included in a general pachinko machine. There is no need to prepare.

  In addition, since the opening / closing notification sound that is output even when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101 is a notification sound that has a relatively large number of opportunities to be output, the opening / closing notification sound is determined by the player's attention. It is a sound that is difficult to become. Therefore, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 performed in a state in which the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 is an operation that is legitimately performed by a game hall employee or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player who has no failure from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, this invention is not restricted to the said embodiment, For example, you may deform | transform and implement as described below. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.
(1) Counting period In the above embodiment, by providing a count invalid period after the continuous insertion of game balls to the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B are entered during the count invalid period. The game balls are not counted as general prizes. In this case, the game ball used for detection of continuous insertion is counted as a general winning number by the general winning number counter, but when continuous insertion is detected, the game used for the detection is detected from the general winning number counter. It is good also as a structure which subtracts a value by the number of spheres.

  In the embodiment described above, several examples of the period that can be the “counting period” that is the determination criterion of S1401 are illustrated, but like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are In the case of being arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, instead of the above example or in addition to the above example, the start of the normal gaming state is used as a counting start condition, and the normal gaming state is ended. The period until this is set as the “counting period”.

  Among the general winning devices 439A and 439B, the general winning device 439A disposed on the left side of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B can enter (win) a game ball only by a left-handed gaming technique. The game balls can enter (win) the general winning device 439B arranged on the right side of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B by either the left-handed gaming method or the right-handed gaming method. Here, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, in the special gaming state, the player The game is played by the hitting technique. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general winning device 439B during the special gaming state, the nail state calculated based on the general winning number counted by the general winning number counter and the general winning number thus counted. The level may be a value that does not appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at or near the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

  On the other hand, the start of the normal gaming state is used as a counting start condition, and the period until the normal gaming state ends is set as the “counting period”, so that the player enters the general winning device 439B during the special gaming state. The game ball can be suitably excluded from the counting target. Therefore, the number of general winnings counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the number of general winnings counted in this way are placed at or near the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B. It is possible to obtain with high accuracy as a value appropriately reflecting the state of the nail 411 provided.

  The start of the normal gaming state can be determined based on, for example, the output state of a signal from the external terminal board 580. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating that the special gaming state is in effect is not output from the external terminal board 580, it can be determined that the normal gaming state has started.

  Or, like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are arranged on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420, during the special gaming state It is unlikely that left-handed gaming techniques are being used. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the left-handed gaming technique is being performed based on the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 and to assume that the left-handed gaming technique is being performed in the normal gaming state.

  In the above embodiment, the period in which the previous block 102 is in the open state is exemplified as an example of the “count invalid period”, but the period in which the previous block 102 is in the closed state may be referred to as the “count invalid period”. Further, the subsequent predetermined period when the front block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected may be set as the “count invalid period”. By setting the subsequent predetermined period as the “count invalid period” when the previous block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected, for example, the game area The game ball stays in a part of the game area, and the game ball stays in succession to the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B. When an entry situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the general winning number counter from being updated for the entry of at least a part of these game balls. As a result, in the case where the player keeps firing the game balls in a blocked state and the game balls are illegally continuously entered into the general winning devices 439A and 439B, It is possible to correspond to the number of game balls that have entered, excluding some of the game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. In addition, when an illegal act of continuously entering the game balls 439A and 439B using the magnet illegally is performed, the general winning number counter is updated for at least a part of the game balls. The performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be evaluated more appropriately.

(2) Value calculated in S1502 In the above embodiment, in S1502, a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the value of the firing ball number counter (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the firing ball number counter). ) Is calculated, but if the value used as the divisor (how to divide) is a value that increases as the number of game balls fired from the launch device 330 into the game area increases, the fire ball is not necessarily used. It need not be a number (ie, a value counted by a firing ball number counter).

  For example, during a predetermined period, such as during a counting period or during all periods when power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of display variations of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the number of display times of a normal symbol, The number of occurrences of the special gaming state may be adopted as a divisor for the value of the general winning number counter (dividend). Alternatively, the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 is counted, and the counted number of game balls or the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 but cannot reach the game area in advance from the number of game balls. A value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value may be adopted as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter.

(3) Nail state level calculated in S1503 In the above embodiment, the case where the nail state level is divided into three stages is exemplified, but the nail state level is not necessarily divided into three stages. For example, the nail state level is divided into two stages: at least a section indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate and a section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state. Also good. Further, the nail state level may be divided into four or more levels.

  In the above embodiment, the section indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state is subdivided into two sections, while the section indicating that the nail 411 is in the appropriate state is subdivided. Although the case where it is set as one division without exemplifying was illustrated, it is good also as composition which subdivides the division which shows that the state of nail 411 is suitable into two or more divisions.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to “1” which is the minimum value, and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail state level is. The nail state level indicating that the state of the nail 411 is appropriate is set to the maximum value, and the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state is higher, the nail state level is reduced. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the shot ball counter). However, the nail state level is calculated from the value of the general winning number counter. The state level may be calculated. In other words, the nail state level may be calculated without using the value of the shot ball counter.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed on the condition that the previous block 102 is in the open state. However, the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed in the previous block 102. The configuration may be performed regardless of the state.

(5) Output destination of nail state level in S1504 In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. However, the output destination of the nail state level is not necessarily the nail state level display device. A display device such as 474 is not required. For example, the output destination of the nail state level is set as a management device (for example, a management device called a “hall computer”) or a portable terminal device, and data indicating the nail state level is transmitted to the management device or the terminal device in S1504. It is good also as composition to do. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level may be a printing device such as a printer, and in S1504, print data indicating the nail state level may be output to the printing device, and the printing device may be configured to print the nail state level. Alternatively, the output destination of the nail state level is a sound output device such as a speaker, and in S1504, sound data indicating the nail state level is output to the sound output device, and sound indicating the nail state level is output from the sound output device. It is good.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 configured by a 7-segment display is exemplified as the output destination of the nail state level. However, the nail state level display device 474 is not necessarily configured by the 7-segment display. There is no. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be configured by a display device that can display various images, such as an LCD.

  In the above embodiment, the display device dedicated to displaying the nail state level (that is, the nail state level display device 474) is provided as the output destination of the nail state level. It is not necessary to be a dedicated display device, and a display device used for other purposes may be configured to function as a display device at a nail state level. For example, the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display the nail state level.

  Here, when the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the display location of the nail state level is preferably on the corner side of the decorative symbol display device 479. By displaying the nail state level on the corner side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the displayed nail state level can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the nail state level displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, so that information unrelated to the game (that is, the nail state level) is displayed, so that the distrust of the game. It is possible to suitably suppress the player from feeling a feeling.

  Further, when the nail state level is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the nail state level may be displayed during the execution of the first special symbol variation display. Thus, a person who confirms the nail state level (for example, an outsider such as a member of the inspection machine of the gaming machine) can play the nail state level during the game by the player (that is, without opening the front block 102). Can be confirmed. Instead of displaying the nail state level on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is in the open state, the decorative symbol display device 479 at a predetermined time such as during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. It is good also as a structure displayed on these.

  In the above-described embodiment, the nail state level display device 474 is provided at a position where the nail state level display device 474 is visible when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is not necessarily the place exemplified above. For example, the nail state level display device 474 may be provided at a position that is not visible to the player who is playing the game (for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 100). That is, the nail state level display device 474 is a position that is visible from the back side of the intermediate block 103 and may be provided on any of the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, or the sub-control board 940.

(6) Display contents of nail state level displayed in S1504 In the above embodiment, the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. If it is information, the display content (output content) indicating the nail state level is not necessarily a numerical value. For example, when the nail state level display device 474 is composed of, for example, an LCD, even if the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed as a number, it is displayed as a symbol, character, figure, or the like corresponding to each numerical value. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the form of the number of figures such as circles and squares according to each numerical value, or a barcode (for example, two-dimensional barcode) indicating each numerical value.

  In the above embodiment, the nail state level value calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. However, the value calculated in S1502 is displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or LCD. It is good also as composition to do. That is, a configuration in which the process of S1503 is omitted may be employed.

  In the above embodiment, the numerical value of the nail state level calculated in S1503 is displayed on the nail state level display device 474. However, the numerical value calculated in S1503 or the value calculated in S1502 is a predetermined value. Information encrypted based on the calculation may be displayed on a display device such as a 7-segment display or LCD. By displaying the encrypted information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that information unrelated to the game (that is, the nail state level or the like) is displayed. Thereby, it can suppress suitably giving a player the distrust with respect to a game.

  The predetermined calculation may be performed by a fixed arithmetic expression, or periodically (for example, every hour) or at a predetermined timing (for example, a winning random number counter related to a special symbol becomes a predetermined value). It is good also as a structure performed by the arithmetic expression changed based on a predetermined pattern at the time. Regardless of whether the arithmetic expression is fixed or variable, the person who confirms the encrypted information (for example, an outsider such as a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine) ) Is known to be decodable.

(7) Nail state level output timing In the above embodiment, the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is in the open state. As such, it is not always necessary that the front block 102 is in an open state. For example, the nail state level may be displayed on the nail state level display device 474 at all times. Further, the nail state level may be displayed on the nail state level display device 474 when the front block 102 is opened and a predetermined operation is input. Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 100 receives an output request transmitted from a terminal device, a management device, or the like, the nail state level is displayed on the nail state level display device 474, or the terminal device or the management device from which the output request is transmitted Data indicating the nail state level may be output to a device or the like.

  (8) In the above embodiment, a prize ball is awarded for entering the winning device to be counted, but there is also a movable piece that is irrelevant to the big hit lottery and that can change the entry probability. Although not limited to the general winning devices 439A and 439B that are not included, a winning device in which a jackpot lottery is performed by entering the start winning devices 431A, 431B, and 432, or a movable piece that can change the entrance probability is entered. The right start winning device 432 and the like provided in the portion may be counted, and the nail state level may be calculated for each winning device.

  In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B that respectively detect game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B are separately provided. The path of game balls that have entered 439B may be merged on the downstream side, and the number of general winnings may be counted by a common winning switch. Further, the winning switch used for counting the number of general winnings may be a switch used for paying out a winning ball, or may be provided separately from a switch used for paying out a winning ball.

  In the above embodiment, the general winning numbers are collectively counted for the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B that detect the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively. A general winning number counter may be separately provided corresponding to the plurality of general winning switches 449A and 449B, and may be separately displayed on the plurality of general winning devices 439A and 439B as the general winning number and the nail state level. . In this case, the winning switch for counting the number of winnings by the winning number counter allows the game ball to enter only by the gaming technique when a specific gaming technique (for example, left-handed gaming technique) is performed. A winning device (or a winning port, for example, a general winning device 439A) and a winning device (or a winning port, for example, a general winning device 439B) that allows a game ball to enter by another game method (for example, a right-handed game method). It is preferable to provide separately for each of the above, and accordingly, a value that appropriately reflects the arrangement state of the members that influence the flow of the game ball such as the nail 411 provided in the vicinity of the entrance of the winning opening or in the vicinity thereof As a result, it is possible to accurately obtain the number of general winnings and the nail state level.

  In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the number of general winnings is counted for one counting period and the nail state level is displayed has been described. However, the configuration in which the general winning numbers are separately counted for a plurality of counting periods. It is good. For example, a general winning number counter is provided separately corresponding to a plurality of gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state and a special gaming state), and separately according to each gaming state as a general winning number or a nail state level. May be displayed.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the general winning number and the number of shot balls are counted by the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920). However, the general winning device 439A, The management device may be configured to acquire the number of game balls that have entered 439B and the number of shot balls during the counting period, and the management device may calculate the nail state level.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the information regarding the nail state level such as the number-of-balls counter and the general prize counter is supplied from the power supply unit 901 and is necessary for returning to the game state before the power failure. Stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 for storing the stored information, and when the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the stored contents of the firing ball number counter and the general winning number counter However, the stored information may be stored in a different manner from the stored information. For example, even if the stored information in the RAM is deleted by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the values of the shot ball counter and the general winning number counter are not deleted, which is different from the case where the stored information is deleted. It may be configured to be erased only when a specific operation is performed. For example, when a predetermined switch is pressed longer than a predetermined time, when an erasing operation is performed by a predetermined communication device, when an erasing operation is performed with a predetermined key (for example, the main control board 920 can be rotated by a key operation) When a predetermined erasable operation is performed (for example, in a state where the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 of the front block 102 is maximized, the storage information of the predetermined switch (not shown) is stored). For example, when an erasing operation is executed). In addition, the information may be stored in a storage medium (for example, a flash memory or an IC chip) different from the storage information necessary for returning to the game state before the power failure. It is preferable that a storage medium that can be stored is provided in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the main control board 920), and information related to the nail state level such as a firing ball number counter and a general winning number counter is stored in the storage medium.

(11) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment In the second embodiment, a switch (rear setting switch 905, initialization) provided by the pachinko machine 100 by a setting changer such as a game hall manager or the like. The configuration is such that the setting of the pitching rate is changed (that is, the setting of the game mode is changed) by operating the switch 907). Instead, an external device that can communicate with the pachinko machine 100 (for example, a management device called a “hall computer”) or a mobile terminal device (portable terminal device) changes the game mode to the next game mode. A signal corresponding to the instruction or information indicating the game mode to be set may be input to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

  In the second embodiment, the determination process S1601 is configured to determine whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the nail state level calculated in the process of S1503. In the determination process S1601, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the value calculated in the process of S1502, that is, (the value of the general winning number counter / the value of the shot ball counter). Good. Further, in the determination process S1601, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour).

  Or, when the variable display count of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the display count of the normal symbol, the occurrence count of the special gaming state, etc. are adopted as a divisor for the value of the general winning number counter (dividend) In addition, it may be configured to determine whether the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied in the determination process S1601 with respect to the value obtained by adding the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor.

  Further, the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 is counted, and from the counted number of game balls, or the number of game balls, the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 but cannot reach the game area in advance. When a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value is used as a divisor for the value of the general winning number counter (dividend), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601 for the value in which the value of the general winning number counter is ordered by the divisor It may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition is satisfied.

  In the second embodiment, the determination process S1601 determines that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the nail state level is “2” or higher. However, the nail state level is “1”. For example, when the nail 411 is a value indicating that there is a high possibility that the nail 411 is in an appropriate state, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied.

  In the second embodiment, the determination process S1602 is configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. , 2439B, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the entry of the game ball to the winning device including the starting winning device such as the middle starting winning device 2431.

  In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, the setting suggestion information Although the configuration in which it is determined that the output condition is satisfied is illustrated, the setting suggestion information is output when a predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls enter a predetermined one general winning device. It may be configured to determine that the condition is satisfied.

  In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters one of the predetermined general winning devices (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, the setting suggestion information Although the configuration for determining that the output condition is satisfied has been exemplified, the configuration may be such that the output condition for the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the game ball enters either the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B. . That is, when a game ball enters one of a plurality of (two or more) predetermined winning devices, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in the determination process S1601. Also good. Further, even when a game ball enters both of a plurality of predetermined (two or more) winning devices, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in the determination process S1601. Good.

  Further, in the case where game balls have entered a predetermined plurality of winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), the setting suggestion information in the determination process S1601 It may be configured to determine whether or not the output condition is satisfied. In other words, when a plurality of predetermined winning devices are provided, not only the entry of game balls into the plurality of winning devices, but also the order of entry may be included as a requirement for the output condition of the setting suggestion information. Good. Thereby, the player can obtain the setting suggestion information as a privilege that allows the game balls to enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which the game balls are entered in a predetermined order in a plurality of predetermined winning devices.

  In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the setting suggestion information output condition can be established by an operation capable of selecting whether or not to execute according to the player's intention during the special game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information may be satisfied by other operations. For example, in a normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player by playing a game using the left-handed gaming method, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is easily satisfied when a right-handed gaming method different from the left-handed gaming method is used. In this case, for example, a game ball fired by a right-handed game technique such as the combination actuating device 435 can pass with a high probability (preferably about 50% or more, preferably about 70% or more). It is preferable that the player can easily establish the output condition of the setting suggestion information, and the game ball is an area to which other functions are added and is not used in the normal gaming state. It is preferable to set the passing condition as the output condition of the setting suggestion information because the game ball can be easily set to pass through the area with high probability while suppressing the number of parts. Further, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal gaming state, the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied, and the game ball lending operation is performed. The setting suggestion information is obtained by the player who has performed a positive operation by operating the ball removal operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) and excessively storing game balls from the ball overflow switch 249 to the storage unit 241. You may add the game nature which acquires.

  In the second embodiment, in the setting suggestion information-related process S2021, if it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the setting is performed. Although the suggestion information is output, some of the setting suggestion information output conditions are set individually in multiple judgment processes, and the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when all the conditions are satisfied The setting suggestion information may be output. For example, when it is determined that all the setting suggestion information output conditions are satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605, the configuration suggestion information may be output.

  In the second embodiment, the game mode in which the variable display time (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) is currently set. However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period set within a period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. It is good also as a structure which can select the production | presentation time of the predetermined suggestion production to appear corresponding to the game aspect currently set. The “suggesting effect” is an effect that suggests the degree (or expectation) of the ease of transition to the special gaming state after the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the second embodiment, when a lottery for drawing whether to change the variable display time corresponding to the game mode is won, the currently set game mode (that is, the main control board 920 at that time). In this configuration, the variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is selected, but whether or not the variable display time is changed corresponding to the game mode is selected by lottery. In the case of winning, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the variable display time allocated to the game mode currently set in the sub control board 940 It is also possible to select a variation pattern. Moreover, the structure which performs the lottery which draws | lots whether to change the variable display time corresponding to a game aspect in the sub control board 940 may be sufficient.

  In the RAM clear process S2002 of the main process (see FIG. 17) of the main control board 920 in the second embodiment, information in substantially all areas except for the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted. However, the RAM clear processing S2002 may be configured to erase all the stored information in the RAM including the setting correspondence information.

  In the main process (see FIG. 17) of the main control board 920 in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is on (S2001: Y), It was set as the structure by which each process (S2002-S2006) which concerns on the setting of a gaming state is performed. In addition, even if it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), if the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, the game A configuration in which each process (S2002 to S2006) related to the state setting is executed may be employed. Specifically, after execution of the RAM clear process S1008, the process waits until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned on, and when it is determined that the setting signal has been switched to the on state, It may be configured to execute the processes (S2002 to S2006).

(12) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment In the third embodiment, nine types of settings that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 are used. (The value obtained by subtracting the probability variation continuity from 1) is the same value, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability (the jackpot probability in the probability variation gaming state) is changed for each setting as the setting of the three-stage probability in each type The configuration in which the probability change game end probabilities for each setting are varied has been described as an example. Instead of this, the probability of jackpot at the time of high probability in each of the nine types of settings may be the same value, and the probability variation end rate may be different for each setting, so that the probability variation game end probability for each setting may be different. The jackpot probability at the time of high probability in each of the nine types of settings may be different from each other, and the probability change end rate in each of the nine types of settings may be different to change the probability change game end probabilities.

  In the third embodiment, the nine types of settings that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 have different probability variation game end probabilities for each setting. However, the probability variation game end probability is not necessarily different. However, it is not necessary to make it different in all settings, and it may be configured to include a setting with the same probability variation game end probability. For example, for each of the three-stage settings belonging to each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, so that the probability change game end probability is the same value within the same type, the jackpot probability at the high probability and the probability change end in each setting It is good also as a structure which sets a rate.

  In the third embodiment, a period from the first unit game in the probability variation game state to the unit game one time before the lottery reach occurrence unit game (that is, the unit game in the probability variation states A and B is executed). In the period), the increase in the number of acquired balls by winning a small hit is limited. However, the number of acquired balls may be increased by winning a small hit from the first unit game in the probability variation gaming state.

  In a gaming machine having a structure in which the number of acquired balls increases by winning a small hit from the initial unit game in the probable gaming state, the acquired ball in the probable gaming state increases as the number of unit games that can be acquired by the small winning game increases. The number of balls (acquired per hit) increases, so the lower the hit probability (high probability) in the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the harder the winner is), the smaller the number of hits per win can be. The lower the probability of transitioning to the normal gaming state later (that is, the higher the probability variation continuation rate), the greater the number of small hits can be obtained.

  For this reason, if the top type with a significantly low probability of initial hit but a significantly high probability change continuation rate is set by the setting change function, it is difficult to win the big hit lottery in the normal gaming state, but from the normal gaming state, Once the special game state is entered into the probability variation game state, it is possible to increase the chance of acquiring a game ball with a small hit privilege in the unit game in the probability variation game state, so that the number of acquired balls is greatly increased. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if the bottom type with a significantly high initial hit probability but a significantly low probability change continuation rate is set by the setting change function, it will be easy to win the big hit lottery in the normal gaming state, but then the normal gaming state Easy to return. It is difficult to acquire a game ball by the small hit privilege in the probability variation game state, and thereby, the number of acquired balls can be increased mainly by acquiring the game ball in the special game state.

  For example, as a big hit probability in the bottom type gaming mode, the low probability is 1/10 and the high probability is 1/5, while the low probability in the top type gaming mode is 1/100 and the high probability is 1 /. 50, and the probability variation continuation rate is not limited to the type and is set to be common (for example, 1/2).

  In addition, the average number of balls acquired in one special game state is 10 balls regardless of the type such as the top type or the bottom type, while as a payout privilege for the transition to one probability change game state. When the average number of acquired balls is 40 in the bottom type and 490 in the top type, the expected value of the number of acquired balls per initial hit (big hit in the normal gaming state) is 50 in the bottom type. (= 10 + 40), and 500 balls (= 10 + 490) in the top type. If the probability variation gaming state continues on average for two consecutive times, the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the bottom type is 100 (= 50 × 2), and the expected value of the number of acquired balls in the top type is 1000 (= 500 × 2) )

  Therefore, in such an example, the bottom type is a setting in which the first hit occurs with a probability of 1/10, but the expected number of acquired balls is 100 balls. The top type is a setting in which the first hit occurs with a probability of 1/100 lower than the bottom type, but the expected value of the number of acquired balls is 1000 balls, which is more than the bottom type.

  In other words, when it is set to the bottom type, it is easy to hit the game first, but it is difficult to acquire a game ball, and when it is set to the top type, it is difficult to hit the game but it is easy to acquire a game ball. . In the above example, the top type has a 10 times the initial hit probability compared to the bottom type, and the number of obtained balls (out) is 10 times. It will be almost the same.

  In the third embodiment, the protrusion 1537A located on the most upstream side of the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the opening of the first flow-down passage 1532A when viewed from above (see FIG. 20 (C)), the protruding portion 1537 or the protruding portion 1538 may be provided at a position overlapping the opening of the first downflow passage portion 1532A when viewed from above. By providing the projecting portion 1537 or the projecting portion 1538 at a position overlapping the opening of the first flow-down passage portion 1532A in a top view, the course direction of the game ball is changed due to the collision with the projecting portions 1537 and 1538. A situation may easily occur in which the one-downflow passage portion 1532A enters.

  The positional relationship between the opening of the first flow-down passage portion 1532A and the protrusions 1537 and 1538 is such that the opening of the first flow-down passage portion 1532A is meandered in the front-rear direction by the protrusions 1537 and 1538 in the top view. It is preferable that it is located on the upper side of the position. The “position where the game balls meander in the front-rear direction by the protrusions 1537 and 1538” is a position before the game balls reach the protrusions 1537 and 1538 as in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. It may be a position where the game ball has moved forward or backward by the protrusions 1537 and 1538.

  In the third embodiment, the right start winning device 1432 includes two flowing down passage portions 1532A and 1532B as flowing down passage portions through which game balls entering from the entrance of the right starting winning device 1432 can pass. However, if the first downflow passage portion 1532A has the shape described in the third embodiment, a configuration including three or more downflow passage portions may be used.

  In the third embodiment, the maximum allowable entry time of the right big prize device 1434 opened as a small bonus is different depending on the game mode changed by changing the setting of the ball exit rate. A game in which the number of times the right grand prize-winning device 1434 is released as a bonus and the interval time provided between each opening when the right big prize-winning device 1434 is opened multiple times are changed by changing the setting of the pitch rate It may be configured to vary depending on the mode.

  In the third embodiment, the right big prize device 1434 is configured not to have a specific passage and a non-specific passage like the upper big prize device 2433 (see FIG. 14). It may be configured as a big winning device similar to the big winning device 2433, and when a game ball that has entered the right big winning device 1434 in a special gaming state passes through a specific passage, it may be shifted to a probability change gaming state after the special gaming state. Good.

(13) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 that are the end conditions of the variable time reduction function In addition, the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol is determined according to the combination of the type of symbol combination that the condition device will operate and the gaming state when the conditional device is activated based on the symbol combination. Although it is configured as described above, it becomes a condition for ending the variable time shortening function for the type of symbol combination that the condition device is to operate or the gaming state when the condition device is activated based on the symbol combination. The number of activations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol may be determined.

  Alternatively, the number of activations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, which are the end conditions of the variable time shortening function, and the number of establishment of the small hits by each small hit symbol are the type of symbol combination that the conditional device is to operate and the symbol The configuration may be determined regardless of the gaming state at the time of operation of the condition device based on the combination.

  In the fourth embodiment, the operation of the next condition device is included as one of the end conditions of the variable time shortening function. However, the operation of the next condition device is not included in the end conditions of the variable time reduction function. It is good. In addition to the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of small hits established by each small hit symbol, the operation of the next condition device is added to the end condition of the variable time reduction function, thereby reducing the variable time reduction function. The conditions for ending can be suitably diversified.

  In the fourth embodiment, three types of small hit symbols are provided in the second special symbol. However, the number of small hit symbols in the second special symbol is not limited to three, but may be one or two types. There may be four or more types.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number of small winnings (the number of small winnings) is the end condition of the variable time shortening function. However, the number of times the right big winning device 1434 is opened based on the small winnings ( The configuration may be such that the number of times that the entry restriction mechanism 1454 becomes the entry allowable posture) is set as the end condition of the variable time shortening function.

  In the fourth embodiment, after the special game state and before the change time reduction function is activated, the remaining period until the change time reduction function ends is set in the remaining period counter, and the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are set. The remaining period stored in the remaining period counter is decremented by one each time the is operated, but it is not always necessary to store information corresponding to the remaining period based on the information that matches the remaining period. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the set value by the value set to the table etc., and the information which can calculate a remaining period may be memorize | stored. For example, each time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the number of times of operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 and the number of establishment of small hits by each small hit symbol are counted by a predetermined counter, and based on the value of the counter Thus, it may be configured to determine whether or not the termination condition for the variable time shortening function is satisfied.

  In the configuration in which the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is counted by the predetermined counter as described above every time the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are operated, the main control board 920 has a special symbol display device. Each time 471 or 472 is activated, the stored contents of the predetermined counter (the number of times the special symbol display device 471 or 472 has been activated) and the special symbol display device 471 or 472 set as the end condition of the variable time reduction function A remaining period until the variable time shortening function ends may be calculated from the number of actuations, and the calculated remaining period value may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM.

  In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display portion 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the high-probability state and the short-time state gaming state, and the display of each of the display portions 1711 and 1712 is displayed. Although the mode and the overlapping amount of the display units 1711 and 1712 are changed according to the change of the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the display is a gaming state in a high probability state and a short time state. The display may be performed in various game states such as a low-probability state and a short-time state.

  In the fourth embodiment, the display of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is gradually increased as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases. 1711 and 1712 are configured to increase the amount of overlap, but by increasing the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712, the amount of overlap between the display units 1711 and 1712 is increased. A configuration may be adopted.

  Alternatively, the amount of overlap between the display units 1711 and 1712 is increased by moving at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 without changing the sizes of the display units 1711 and 1712. It may be configured, and the movement of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 and the change in the size of at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 A configuration in which the amount of overlap between the display units 1711 and 1712 is increased by a combination is also possible.

  In the configuration in which the overlapping amount of both the display units 1711 and 1712 is increased, as shown in FIG. 26, the display units 1711 and 1712 do not need to be separated from each other at the initial position. A configuration in which they overlap each other at the initial position may be employed.

  In the fourth embodiment, the amount of overlap between the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 increases as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that the transition timing of the gaming state is increased. Although it is configured to be expected to arrive, the display units 1711 and 1712 do not overlap, and the mutual distance becomes shorter as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 decreases, so that the transition timing of the gaming state It is good also as a structure which expects arrival.

  In the fourth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are displayed on the upper end side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the display positions of these display units 1711 and 1712 are displayed. Is not limited to the upper end side of the screen, and may be any of the lower end side, the left end side, or the right end side.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number corresponding to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711. However, it corresponds to the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. The remaining period related to establishment of the small hits by each small hit symbol may be displayed without displaying the numbers corresponding to the remaining periods related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472.

(14) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment In the fifth embodiment, the number of small hits (the number of wins for small hits) is the end condition of the probability variation function. The number of times the right big prize device 1434 is released based on the small winning prize (the number of times the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is allowed to enter) may be used as a condition for the transition to another gaming state. The configuration may be an end condition, or a configuration that generates the same special gaming state as the big win when the number of small hits in the normal gaming state (the number of wins in the small win) satisfies a predetermined condition It is good.

(15) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the gaming state of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 becomes shorter. The information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) is configured to be more recognizable, but instead of this, or in addition to this, as the remaining period related to the establishment of the small hit by the small hit symbol becomes shorter, the transition The configuration may be such that the recognizability of the game state information of the post-game state display unit 1712 is enhanced.

  In the sixth embodiment, the gaming state information of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is a character string composed of a plurality of characters. However, the gaming state information includes a character string, a symbol, a pattern, and the like. May be combined.

  In the sixth embodiment, all characters constituting the game state information (character string “PERFECT RUSH”) are displayed in a predetermined initial state or a time close to the initial state when the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is displayed. Although the image 1713 is displayed so as to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize, it is not always necessary that all characters constituting the game state information are unrecognizable or difficult to recognize in the initial state, and the game state information is configured. It may be configured that a part of the character to be displayed is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28 (E), the time when all the characters constituting the game state information become recognizable is after the internal game state of the probability variation game state transitions to the non-time-short state. However, the time when all the characters constituting the game state information become recognizable is not limited to after the internal game state of the probability variation game state transitions to the non-time-short state, and “0” is displayed in the remaining period display portion 1711. Time when displayed (see FIG. 28D) and time when the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, time when “5” is displayed on the remaining period display unit 1711) It may be.

  In the sixth embodiment, one or a plurality of rectangular blocks are displayed as an image 1713 in which at least a part of characters constituting the game state information is unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. Any image can be used as the image 1713 as long as at least a part of the characters constituting the character can be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize. For example, an image of a chain wound around the game state display unit 1712 after the transition is adopted as the image 1713, and as the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 becomes shorter, the chain is unwound and the game state You may comprise so that the character which comprises information may become recognizable gradually.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 changes greatly by one step, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 (post-transition gaming state display unit 1712A) larger than the post-change size. After the temporary display, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 of the changed size is displayed. However, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 that is smaller than the changed size is temporarily displayed, and then changed. It is good also as a structure which displays the after-transition game state display part 1712 of a later magnitude | size.

  In the sixth embodiment, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is configured to increase stepwise in accordance with the change in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It may be configured to decrease stepwise in accordance with the change in the remaining period. In the configuration in which the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 becomes smaller in steps, when the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 changes by one step, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 that is larger than the changed size. Alternatively, the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 smaller than the changed size may be temporarily displayed, and then the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 of the changed size may be displayed.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 is configured to increase stepwise in accordance with the change in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472. It may be configured to decrease stepwise in accordance with changes in the remaining period. In the configuration in which the remaining period display unit 1711 is reduced stepwise, when the size of the remaining period display unit 1711 changes by one step, the remaining period display unit 1711 larger than the changed size or the changed size. The remaining period display unit 1711 having a smaller size may be displayed after the remaining period display unit 1711 having a smaller size is temporarily displayed.

  In the sixth embodiment, after the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 larger than the size after the change is temporarily displayed, the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition game of the size after the change is temporarily displayed. Although the state display unit 1712 is configured to be displayed, the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is displayed before the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 having the changed size. The shape may be temporarily deformed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are provided within a period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function. However, at least one of the remaining period display portion 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 has a size that is a special symbol display device 471,472. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of actuations does not change over a period until reaching the end condition of the variable time shortening function.

  In such a configuration, only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily changed (enlarged, reduced, or deformed) within a period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function. (Or a combination of two or more thereof) and a period of time in which both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are temporarily changed in synchronization.

  In the sixth embodiment, when only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily expanded within the period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function, Although the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are both configured to be synchronized and temporarily expanded, only the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 is temporarily expanded And the structure which provides the time when both the remaining period display part 1711 and the game state display part 1712 after a transition are expanded temporarily synchronously may be sufficient.

  In the sixth embodiment, only the remaining period display unit 1711 is temporarily expanded within the period until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the termination condition of the variable time shortening function (hereinafter referred to as “the remaining period display unit 1711”). , This time is also referred to as “first time” for convenience) and time when both the remaining period display portion 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display portion 1712 are temporarily expanded synchronously (hereinafter, this time is referred to as “first time” for convenience). However, the temporal change mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 in the first period or the second period is not necessarily enlarged. Instead, it may be enlarged, reduced, or modified, or a combination of two or more of these.

  Further, in the second period, the mode of temporary change of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the mode of temporary change of the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 do not necessarily have to be the same. A configuration in which the mode of temporary change 1711 and the mode of temporary change in the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 may be different. In addition, the temporal change mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 (or the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712) in the first period is at least one of the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 in the second period. The configuration may be different from that of one temporary change.

  In the sixth embodiment, only the remaining period display portion 1711 is temporarily expanded (the first time) until the number of operations of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 reaches the end condition of the variable time reduction function. 1 period) and a period (second period) in which both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 are temporarily expanded synchronously. It is good also as a structure which provides the time which is neither a time nor a 2nd time. For example, the time when both the remaining period display unit 1711 and the post-transition gaming state display unit 1712 disappear temporarily synchronously as the time that is neither the first time nor the second time within the period, or the post-transition gaming state It is good also as a structure which provides the time when only the display part 1712 is expanded temporarily.

  In the sixth embodiment, the present invention (first to third features) has been described by exemplifying the gaming state in the high probability state and the short time state. However, in the case of the gaming state in the high probability state and the short time state The first to third features described above may be applied in various game states such as a low-probability state and a short-time state game state.

(16) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to seventh embodiment In the seventh embodiment, based on the fact that the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is satisfied. When the special symbol lottery is not won, the remaining period display unit 1711 in which zero information (specifically, a number “0”) is displayed indicates the start condition of the last special symbol. Although the display is performed in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the symbol based on the establishment, the display period of the remaining period display unit 1711 in which the zero information is displayed is based on the establishment of the start condition of the last special symbol. It may be after the symbol variation display is started.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery performed based on the fact that the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established, zero information is obtained. The zero information is not visible by not displaying the remaining period display portion 1711 on which is displayed. However, only the zero information (specifically, a number “0”) in the remaining period display portion 1711 is displayed. It is good also as a structure which makes zero information invisible by making non-display or superimposing an image on the zero information so that the zero information cannot be recognized.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the big symbol is won in the special symbol lottery performed based on the fact that the starting condition of the last special symbol in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is established, zero information is obtained. Although it was set as the structure which cannot be visually recognized, it is the structure which lowers the visibility of zero information from the visibility of the zero information of the remaining period display part 1711 displayed when not winning a big win in the special symbol lottery concerned. Also good.

  For example, an image is superimposed on a part of zero information (specifically, a number “0”) in the remaining period display unit 1711, the remaining period display unit 1711 is reduced together with zero information, or only the zero information part is displayed. Although the zero information is displayed due to reduction, the zero information color is brought close to the background color, or the background color of the zero information is brought close to the color of the zero information, the zero information becomes difficult to see It is good also as composition to make. Or the structure which reduces the visibility of the zero information in the remaining period display part 1711 by reducing the remaining period display part 1711 may be sufficient.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the high-probability state and the short-time gaming state, when the special symbol starting condition which is the last in the remaining period related to the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is satisfied, the special symbol is started. Although the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 is changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the conditions, the change of the display mode of the remaining period display unit 1711 is a gaming state in a high probability state and a short time state. The display may be performed in various game states such as a low-probability state and a short-time state.

(18) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the base error determination result is displayed on the status display unit 2591 by operating the initialization switch 907. The operation unit for displaying the error determination result on the state display unit 2591 is not necessarily the initialization switch 907, and other switches such as the state return switch 2592 are used to display the base error determination result on the state display unit 2591. The switch may be configured to be displayed on the screen, or may be configured to have a dedicated operation unit for displaying the result of base error determination on the status display unit 2591. Further, when a display device having a screen (display) capable of inputting information is provided, an operation for displaying the result of base error determination on the state display unit 2591 is input to the screen. Also good.

  Note that a switch for executing a function different from the function for displaying the result of base error determination on the status display unit 2591, such as the initialization switch 907, is for displaying the result of base error determination on the status display unit 2591. By diverting as a switch, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated operation unit, and the cost required to output the result of base error determination can be suppressed.

  In the eighth embodiment, base error determination is performed using the base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492. When a base error is detected, a display indicating the result of the base error determination (“H ”,“ L ”, or“ A ”) is displayed as information that can be output using the base data on the status display unit 2591 including a 7-segment display, but a base error is detected. In such a case, the base data value stored in the base data storage unit 2492 (that is, the number of general winnings per predetermined number of shot balls) may be displayed on the predetermined display unit. Further, when a base error is detected, information corresponding to the nail state level calculated in S1503, or a value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter calculated in S1502 by the value of the number of shot balls counter (general winning number) The number counter value / the number of shot ball counters) and information corresponding to the value may be displayed on a predetermined display unit.

  In the eighth embodiment, the base error determination result is displayed on the status display unit 2591 while the initialization switch 907 is operated (pressed), and the base error is detected when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed. The determination result is hidden. Instead, when the initialization switch 907 is operated, the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the display is displayed at the end of the period. It is good also as a structure which hides.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed, the base error determination result displayed on the status display unit 2591 is not displayed. However, the operation of the initialization switch 907 is not performed. Even if is finished, the base error determination result may continue to be displayed. In such a configuration, when a predetermined error that is set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 occurs in a state in which the result of the base error determination is displayed on the status display unit 2591 after the operation of the initialization switch 907 is completed. The error may be displayed on the status display unit 2591 instead of the base error determination result, and when the error is resolved, the base error determination result may be displayed again instead of displaying the error.

  In the eighth embodiment, while the initialization switch 907 is operated, the base error determination result for each base data is sequentially displayed on the status display unit 2591. However, the latest base data ( That is, it may be configured to display only the result of base error determination for current base data) or to display only the result of base error determination for base data in which a base error is detected.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 that is turned on when a base error is detected is provided at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 100. However, the notification unit 2491 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is good also as a structure provided in the position (For example, the upper right side edge part 211C etc. in the opening peripheral part 211 of the front decoration body 210) visible from the side. By providing the notification unit 2491 at a position that can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 100, it is easy for employees of the game hall, members of the inspection organization of the gaming machine, and the like to recognize that the base error has been detected.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is connected to the main control board 920. However, the notification unit 2491 is connected to a board other than the main control board 920 (for example, the sub control board 940 and the payout control board 930). It is good also as a structure to connect.

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is provided as an output destination when a base error is detected. However, a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 479, a panel light emitting device 490, a frame light emitting device 271, and the like. A configuration in which a light emitting device such as 275 is used as an output destination when a base error is detected may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the base error is detected, the notification unit 2491 is turned on, and when the initialization switch 907 is operated while the notification unit 2491 is turned on, the result of the base error determination is displayed in the state display unit. However, the base error determination result may be displayed on the status display unit 2591 when the initialization switch 907 is operated without providing the notification unit 2491.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the base error is detected, the notification unit 2491 is turned on, and when the initialization switch 907 is operated while the notification unit 2491 is turned on, the result of the base error determination is displayed in the state display unit. However, it is not always necessary to turn on the notification unit 2491 when the base error is detected, and every predetermined time (for example, every 8 hours) or from the launching device 330. Every time a predetermined number (for example, 50,000) of the launched game balls are fired, or every time a start winning of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is generated a predetermined number of times (for example, 8000 times) Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the special gaming state may be every predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times).

  In the eighth embodiment, the notification unit 2491 is turned on when a base error is detected with respect to the latest base data (current base data). For example, the case where a base error is detected for two or three base data stored in the base data storage unit 2492, or the base data storage unit 2492 is detected. For example, a base error may be detected with respect to an average value of two or three base data stored in.

  In the eighth embodiment, after the base error determination result is displayed on the state display unit 2591, the notification unit 2491 is turned off when the state return switch 2592 is operated (pressed). A configuration in which the notification unit 2491 changes from a lighting state to a blinking state by an operation of the state return switch 2592 may be employed. By making the notification unit 2491 blink, it is possible to identify that the contents of the base error displayed on the state display unit 2591 have been confirmed by an employee of a game hall or a member of an inspection organization of a gaming machine.

  In the eighth embodiment, apart from the fired ball number counter used for calculating the nail state level, a fired ball number counter (that is, the second fired number counter) for use in determining the base error is provided. However, the nail state level may be calculated and the base error may be determined on the basis of the count value of one shot ball counter. Similarly, in the eighth embodiment, apart from the general winning number counter used for calculating the nail state level, a general winning number counter (that is, a second general winning number counter) for use in determining a base error is used. However, the nail state level may be calculated and the base error may be determined based on a count value obtained by a single general winning number counter.

  In the eighth embodiment, the state display unit 2591 that displays a predetermined error set in advance for the pachinko machine 100 is used as the output destination of the result of the base error determination. Alternatively, a dedicated display unit for displaying the results may be provided.

  In the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process S1801 that the game mode has the lowest initial hit probability, the determination process whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied (determination processes S1802 to S1804). ), But not only the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, but also some or all of the game modes that can be set in the pachinko machine 100 other than the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability In the case of the game mode, it may be configured to perform determination processing (determination processing S1802 to S1804) as to whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. Setting suggestion information can also be output for game modes other than the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, so that the player can more suitably identify the game mode set in the pachinko machine 100 being played. Can be added. In addition, since the number of selection elements for selecting the pachinko machine 100 to be played by itself increases, the gameability of selecting the pachinko machine 100 to play in the pachinko machine 100 in which the game mode can be set in a plurality of stages is also improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the determination processes S1601 to S1605 are configured to be executed even if they are not in the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, but are game modes with the lowest initial hit probability. It is good also as a structure which performs determination process S1601-S1605 when it determines with.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the first hit probability is the game mode, the setting suggestion information is output when it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in any of the determination processes S1802 to S1804. However, when the game style has the lowest first hit probability (that is, when it is determined in the determination process S1801 that the first hit probability is the lowest game mode), the setting suggestion information is unconditionally set. An output configuration may be used. In such a case, when the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set, the setting suggestion information is output unconditionally, whereas when the game mode is a predetermined game mode with a game mode with the lowest initial hit probability, the determination process S1802 The setting suggestion information may be output when a predetermined output condition determined by S1804 or determination processing S1601 to S1605 is satisfied.

  In the eighth embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting suggestion information output condition can be satisfied when the game mode has the lowest initial hit probability. However, the probability that the setting suggestion information can be output is the initial hit probability. It is not always necessary, and any probability that constitutes a game mode that can be set in a plurality of stages (a game mode related to the setting of the pitching rate) is the case where the probability is the lowest game mode. It is good also as a structure which can output the output conditions of setting suggestion information.

  For example, in each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type, in each type, the probability variation continuation rate of each type is subdivided into three stages that are smaller than the width of the probability variation continuity rate between each type. In the pachinko machine, the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be satisfied when the minimum probability variation continuation rate (probability corresponding to the first stage probability in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment) is set for each type. It is good also as a structure.

  In the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for a predetermined operation (S1803: Y), in the process S1606, the setting suggestion information is set as the output destination of the setting suggestion information. In the above example, the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 479) outputs the data for the predetermined period only for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), but without considering the output condition of the setting suggestion information. In the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the setting suggestion information on a predetermined display unit at all times or at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds), the same operation as that of the setting suggestion information is output. When the above condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is not displayed (non-output) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), or is determined for a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes). By increasing the display interval (for example, every 2 seconds), the display probability of the setting suggestion information (for example, the time ratio at which the setting suggestion information is displayed per 10 seconds) is reduced compared to other periods. It may be a configuration.

  As a result, in a certain period (predetermined period) after the predetermined operation is performed, the display probability is changed as in the case where the display probability of the setting suggestion information is increased compared to other periods. It is easy for the player to recognize the set suggestion information.

  At this time, if the display probability of the setting suggestion information is lower in a certain period after the operation that can be performed by the player than in other periods, after the operation performed by the player's own intention Therefore, the displayed setting suggestion information can be easily associated with the user's own operation, and in this respect, the displayed setting suggestion information can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, the display probability of the setting suggestion information is lower in a certain period after an operation that can be performed by a specific person other than the player (for example, an employee of the game hall) as compared with other periods. In this case, by making it easier for the player to recognize the setting suggestion information after some work is performed by a specific person other than the player, it is possible to suppress the player from having distrust in the work. .

(19) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment In the ninth embodiment described above, as a countermeasure for getting into the game, only a caution display, or a caution display and setting suggestion information (more specifically, a first hit probability However, it may be configured such that only the setting suggestion information can be displayed. That is, it is good also as a structure by which at least one of a caution display or setting suggestion information is displayed as the content displayed as a countermeasure against a game sink.

  In the ninth embodiment, the caution display or the setting suggestion information is displayed (output) on the decorative symbol display device 479 so as to take measures against the game. However, the caution display or the setting suggestion information is displayed as a decorative symbol display. Instead of displaying on the device 479, or in addition to displaying the caution display or the setting suggestion information on the decorative symbol display device 479, the sound corresponding to the caution display (for example, “please pay attention to excessive games”). Sound), audio of content corresponding to the setting suggestion information (for example, audio such as “minimum initial hit probability is set” and audio that is not output in other situations) By outputting from 282, the structure which carries out the countermeasure against the infiltration into a game may be sufficient.

  In the ninth embodiment, the caution display or setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the output of the caution display or setting suggestion information is not necessarily the decorative symbol display device 479. Instead, the configuration may be such that the caution display or the setting suggestion information is output to a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the ninth embodiment, when the number of consecutive lost times in the special symbol lottery is less than 1000 times and when the number of continuous times is 1000 times or more, the continuation of the loss variation display as the next display timing of the caution display is continued. The range that can be selected as the number of times is different (that is, the range from 200 to 400 times in the former case, and the range from 100 to 200 times in the latter case). Regardless of the number of consecutive loses in the lottery, the same selectable range may be used as the number of consecutive loss display that is the next display timing of the caution display. In addition, when the number of consecutive loses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times or more, for each case, a caution display is displayed at a longer interval than when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times. A configuration may be adopted in which a selectable range is set as the continuous number of loss variation displays as the next display timing of the caution display.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the case of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, when the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set within the type, the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times. In the case described above, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed with a predetermined probability after the attention information is displayed, and 1/10 is exemplified as the probability. However, the probability is not necessarily 1/10. There is no need, and an appropriate probability may be adopted. For example, the probability that the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed after displaying the attention information is 1/1 (that is, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is always displayed after the attention information is displayed). There may be.

  In the ninth embodiment, in the case of the top type, the middle type, and the bottom type, when the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability is set within the type, the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is 1000 times. In the case of the above, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed with a predetermined probability after the attention information is displayed. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000, the game mode is supported. The configuration that does not display the setting suggestion information is illustrated, but when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times, as in the case where the number of consecutive times is 1000 times or more, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is noted. The information may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) after the information is displayed.

  In such a configuration, even when the number of consecutive times is 1000 times or more and when the number of continuous times is less than 1000 times, the probability that the setting suggestion information is displayed after displaying the attention information is the same. It is also possible that the probabilities are different. In the configuration in which the probability of displaying the setting suggestion information after displaying the caution information is different between the case where the continuous number is 1000 times or more and the case where the continuous number is less than 1000 times, the continuous number is 1000 times. The probability in the above case is preferably higher than the probability in the case where the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times. Setting suggestion information (more details) as the accumulation of game ball consumption increases by making the probability when the number of consecutive times is 1000 times or more higher than the probability when the number of consecutive times is less than 1000 times Therefore, the display frequency of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability within the type is increased, and the player can be suitably encouraged to pay attention to excessive games.

  In the ninth embodiment, when the lowest game mode is set within the type (top type, middle type, bottom type) of the first hit probability, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode is displayed as the attention information. The configuration that can be displayed after the display is illustrated, but the game mode that has the lowest probability for any probability, as long as it is a probability that forms a game mode that can be set in multiple stages (a game mode related to the setting of the pitch rate) In such a case, the setting suggestion information may be displayed after the attention information is displayed.

  For example, in each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type, in each type, the probability variation continuation rate of each type is subdivided into three stages that are smaller than the width of the probability variation continuity rate between each type. In each pachinko machine, when the minimum probability variation continuation rate (probability corresponding to the first stage probability in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment) is set for each type, the number of consecutive losses in the special symbol lottery is If it is 1000 times or more, the configuration suggestion information corresponding to the game mode may be displayed with a predetermined probability after the attention information is displayed.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game mode (that is, second stage probability, third stage probability) in which the first hit probability is not the lowest in the type in each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type is set. In this case, the configuration suggestion information is not displayed regardless of the number of consecutive loses in the special symbol lottery. However, even when the game mode is set, the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability within the type Similarly to the case where (that is, the first stage probability) is set, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode may be displayed after the attention information is displayed. In such a configuration, when the game mode with the lowest first hit probability within the type is set and when the game mode with the lowest first hit probability within the type is set after the attention information is displayed. The structure with the same probability of displaying suggestion information may be sufficient, and the structure from which the said probability differs may be sufficient.

  In the ninth embodiment, the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed every time the continuous variation display reaches the predetermined number. However, the display is relatively long regardless of the continuous display of the variation display. In a pachinko machine configured to display a caution display or a setting suggestion display at intervals (for example, every hour), a caution display or a setting suggestion display is displayed every time the number of consecutive fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number. The display probability (for example, the time ratio at which the setting suggestion information is displayed per 10 seconds) may be displayed higher than before reaching the value.

  In the ninth embodiment, when a situation occurs in which the loss continues for a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery, a caution display or a setting suggestion display (more specifically, the game mode with the lowest first hit probability within the type) The setting suggestion information corresponding to is exemplified. However, as a condition for displaying the caution display or the setting suggestion display, the above-exemplified situation (situation where the losing continues for a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery) In addition to the above, a configuration in which a “situation where a player has consumed a gaming value (for example, a game ball) of a predetermined amount or more” as in the above situation may be applied.

  In the ninth embodiment, the configuration in which the caution display or the setting suggestion display is displayed is exemplified. However, the display erasure operation for erasing at least one of those displays, and the display impossibility for disabling at least one of those displays A display probability changing operation (at least one of an ascending operation or a descending operation) that changes an operation or at least one of the display probabilities is made operable by at least one of a game hall employee or the like or a player. Good. For example, once the caution display is displayed in a certain manner on the display screen, the caution display according to another mode (for example, a game such as display with large characters or an increase in the number of caution displays). Display that can be easily recognized by the user), and this display may be erased by the player by operating the input operation device 260.

  The time to be erased after the caution display or the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is displayed is not limited to the elapse of a fixed time, but instead of or in addition to this, a predetermined number of times after the next time (for example, 2) or after a certain period of game stoppage has elapsed after the customer waiting effect has been executed.

  As a position where the caution display or setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment is displayed, it may be displayed at a position overlapping the symbol variation display, and the caution display or setting suggestion display is displayed on the front side of the symbol variation display. It is good also as a structure by which at least one is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the caution display and the setting suggestion display.

  As the caution display or setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment, at least a part of these displays may be used for symbols used for variable display, or may be displayed using a part of display effects. . For example, when the first loss reach effect after the display condition of the caution display is established (when the jackpot symbol is configured by a combination of symbols, the last symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the remaining symbols are Stops after a predetermined number of symbols with a warning display (prevention of sinking) as the last stop symbol when a part of the jackpot symbol is configured to stop and then the variable display stops due to a combination of lost symbols) It may be displayed. In addition, a period may be set in which at least a part of the symbols constituting the variable display is set as at least one of the caution display and the setting suggestion display. For example, in the case of three fluctuation displays), the attention display is divided into a plurality of symbols. For example, when three symbols are stopped and displayed, the character “Nori” is added to the first symbol and then stopped. You may add the word “include” to the symbol, and the character “prevent” to the symbol that stops at the end. As the next variable display, another character (for example, something that enjoys the game moderately) ) May be displayed.

  As a condition for displaying at least one of the caution display and the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment, it is a condition that the winning result is not included as a stop result of the variable display during execution and the variable display waiting for execution If the result of stopping the big win is included, the caution display or the setting suggestion display may not be displayed even if other display conditions are satisfied.

  As the timing for displaying at least one of the caution display and the setting suggestion display in the ninth embodiment, after the exemplified display condition is satisfied, the variation display hold is zero and the variation is made until the next start winning is generated. The timing may be synchronized with the timing when the display stop condition is satisfied (for example, at the same time or after a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed), or a predetermined number with a small number of variable display suspensions. It may be displayed at the timing synchronized with the time when the condition that the time until the fluctuation display stops after the following (for example, once or less) is satisfied, or at the timing when the storage amount of the game ball is reduced You may make it display. The timing at which the storage amount of the game ball is reduced may be determined by providing a sensor for detecting that the storage amount of the game ball has reached a predetermined amount or less, or an operation of lending the game ball may be performed. It may be the timing when a certain amount of game balls are fired into the game area after being performed.

  In addition to the “situation in which the player has consumed a game value of a predetermined amount or more”, in addition to the “situation where the losing continues for a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery” illustrated in the ninth embodiment, for example, “The number of loses in a special symbol lottery is a predetermined number of times compared to the number of wins in the special symbol lottery (for example, the number of loses is 2000 times the number of wins in the special symbol lottery. ) ”Or“ exceeding a predetermined number (for example, the difference between the number of game balls fired and the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10,000), and the number of lost fluctuations is predetermined) The situation in which the player continues to play a game exceeding the number (for example, 5000) and the difference between the number of loses in the special symbol lottery and the number of wins for the big hit exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000). , "Beyond a predetermined given period of time (e.g., continuous game period predetermined period (e.g., 5 hours) beyond) player situation continues the game" the like can be exemplified. The “situation where the player has consumed a game value greater than or equal to a predetermined amount” may include only one situation corresponding to the situation, or a combination of two or more situations corresponding to the situation. May be included.

  In addition, the “game value” in the above “situation where the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of the game value” does not necessarily have to be a game ball, and can be used to receive, for example, medals or game balls. Used for borrowing game balls such as remaining data recorded on prepaid gaming cards (for example, that can be inserted into card units), banknotes and electronic money that can be used to borrow game balls It may be possible cash or its equivalent.

(20) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment In the tenth embodiment, the inlet portion 3452A1 of the movable member 3452A is provided above the level difference with respect to the support surface 3452A3. The support surface 3452A3 may not form a step, and the periphery of the support surface 3452A3 may be an entrance portion 3452A1. Even in such a configuration, since a step is formed between the support surface 3452A3 and the support surface 3217A, the downward inclination angle (gradient) of the support surface 3452A3 can be reduced.

  In the tenth embodiment, the ball escape portion 3452A6 of the movable member 3452A is configured as a stepped portion in which the wall portion 3452A5 side on the outlet portion 3452A2 side of the support surface 3452A3 is on the lower side with respect to the wall portion 3452A4 side. However, the wall 3452A5 side of the support surface 3452A3 on the outlet 3452A2 side may be inclined downward from the wall 3452A4 side. In the case where the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured to be inclined downward, the probability that the game ball that has entered the movable member 3452A is discharged to the passage portion 3218 is the same as when the ball escape portion 3452A6 is configured as a stepped portion. The probability of being discharged to the passage portion 3241 can be increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry restriction mechanism 3454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry permission posture using the four-bar linkage mechanism including the movable member 3454A, the first link portion 3454B, and the second link portion 3454C. In this case, while the movable member 3454A is displaced upstream, the movable member 3454A is displaced so that the downward inclination angle of the upper surface is increased. However, the movable member 3454A is moved upstream. A predetermined first mechanism for displacement and a predetermined second mechanism for increasing the downward inclination angle of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A are separately provided, and the movable member 3454A is displaced upstream using the first mechanism. However, the second mechanism is used to displace the movable member 3454A so that the downward inclination angle of the upper surface of the movable member 3454A is increased. It may be.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the configuration including the passage portion 3215 extending in the vertical direction and the passage portion 3217 continuously provided on the downstream side thereof for guiding the game ball to the right side, the front side of the passage portion 3215. However, the opening formed in the passage portion extending in the vertical direction side is provided with a predetermined game ball on the downstream side of the first passage portion extending in the vertical direction side. In the configuration in which the second passage portion that is guided in the horizontal direction is continuously provided, the opening formed in the first passage portion does not necessarily have to be on the front side, and the second passage portion is continuous. Any side that is a predetermined direction that intersects with a plane including the direction direction and the vertical direction side and that is provided with a winning opening is acceptable.

  For example, when the second passage portion is provided in the front-rear direction with respect to the first passage portion, and the winning opening of the big winning device is provided on the left side with respect to the second passage portion, The opening may be formed on the left direction side of the first passage portion.

  In the tenth embodiment, the game ball discharged from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 is guided to the winning opening (advancing entrance) side of the big winning device 3434. A winning device (for example, a start winning device or a general winning device) different from the big winning device such as the big winning device 3434 is provided on the side of the guiding direction of the game ball guided by the guiding unit such as A configuration may be adopted in which the discharged game ball is guided to the winning opening side of the winning device.

  In addition, as a winning device provided on the side of the direction in which the game ball is guided by the opening, the probability of entering the game ball into the winning opening varies according to the attitude of the entry restricting mechanism 3454 as in the big winning device 3434. It is not always necessary to be a winning device, and it may be a winning device whose opening is always open, such as a general winning device.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry restriction mechanism 3452 of the right start prize winning device 3432 includes the movable member 3452A configured to be rotatable around the vertical direction side. The movable member configured to be rotatable about the direction side does not necessarily need to be a movable member of an entry restriction mechanism included in the start winning device such as the right start winning device 3432, but like the big prize device 3434. It may be a movable member of an entry restriction mechanism provided in the big prize device.

  In the tenth embodiment, the entry restricting mechanism 3454 in the big prize device 3434 displaces the support surface that supports the lower side of the game ball in the direction opposite to the game ball traveling direction side, and the support surface. The movable member 3454A is displaced so that the angle of the descending inclination is larger than that in the approach prohibition posture, and the inclination is such that the game ball supported by the support surface is guided into the winning space of the winning device. The movable member that can be displaced, such as the movable member 3454A, does not necessarily need to be a movable member of the entry restriction mechanism included in the large winning device such as the large winning device 3434, but the right start winning device 3432. It may be a movable member of an entry restricting mechanism provided in the starting prize winning device.

  In the tenth embodiment, on the downstream side of the passage portion 3215, the passage portion 3216 branching to the left side and the passage portion 3217 branching to the right side are provided, but the passage portion 3216 is not provided. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion 3215 is either discharged from the opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215 or enters the passage portion 3217. It may be configured. Since the passage portion 3216 is not provided, a space for providing the passage portion 3216 becomes unnecessary, and thus other members and the like can be arranged in the space.

  In the tenth embodiment, the path through which the game ball that has entered the starter 436 reaches the entrance portion (advance entrance) of the big prize device 3433 is the path that enters the passage portion 3219 through the opening 3218A of the passage portion 3218. (Routes in the directions of arrows Q6 and Q7 in FIG. 40) or routes discharged from the opening formed in front of the passage portion 3215 to the front side (routes in the direction of arrow Q11 in FIG. 51). Although configured, a path other than these paths, for example, a game ball flowing down the base body 401 can reach the entrance portion of the big prize device 3433 without entering the prize device unit 3200 from the left side from the entrance portion 3211. It is good.

  A path through which the game ball that has entered the starter 436 reaches the entrance portion of the grand prize winning device 3433 is formed in a path that enters the passage portion 3219 through the opening portion 3218A of the passage portion 3218 or in front of the passage portion 3215. It is preferable that the opening is limited to either the opened opening or the path discharged from the upstream side to the front side in terms of suppressing breakage or failure of the big prize device 3434 including the movable member 3454A due to the game ball.

(21) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eleventh Embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, a passage portion 3214 and a passage formed in the winning device unit 3200 are provided between the start switch 466 and the movable member 3452A. Although the path in which the game ball reciprocates in the left-right direction is arranged as in the portion 3217, a configuration in which the start switch 466 is provided closer to the movable member 3452A may be provided, and the start switch 466 is provided. It is preferable that the movable member 3452A be arranged on the downstream side where the path of the game ball linearly continues from the upstream side of the position via the position where the start switch 466 is provided. For example, the start switch 466 may be provided at a position where a game ball passing through the passage portion 3217 can be detected.

  According to the modified example, after the game ball is detected by the start switch 466 (after the game ball enters the start port of the starter 436), the game ball enters (contacts) the movable member 3452A. The variation in time can be reduced. Therefore, the game ball that comes into contact with the movable member 3452A that has shifted to the approach allowable posture based on the fact that the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the ordinary symbol is won in the ordinary symbol lottery is the movable member 3452A. When the length is set so as not to enter the passage portion 3241 due to the shift to the entry prohibition posture, the occurrence of an error can be suppressed.

  As a result, when the normal symbol start condition is established in the non-time-short state, the game ball comes into contact with the movable member 3452A in the allowed entry posture at the timing at which the symbol is displayed as the stop symbol on the normal symbol display device 473 ( In other words, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is not possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the support surface 3452A3 and that the game ball in contact with the movable member 3452A has not entered the passage portion 3241.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the present invention has been described by exemplifying the movable member 3452A that rotates about the vertical side. However, the movable member 3452A is not necessarily required as a movable member to which the present invention can be applied. The present invention may be applied to various movable pieces (movable members). For example, two movable pieces that are arranged in the right entry restriction mechanism 452 so that the winning opening is narrowed when in the entry prohibition posture, and the tip portions are spaced apart when in the entry permission posture. Or, the entry restriction mechanism 1452 has an arrangement that protrudes forward so as to close the prize opening in the case of the entry prohibition posture, and an arrangement that immerses backward so as to open the prize opening in the case of the entry permission posture. Or a movable piece that is arranged in the right entry restriction mechanism 2452 to close the winning opening when it is in the entry prohibition posture and to place the game ball in the winning opening when it is in the entry allowable posture. The present invention may be applied to such as.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied in the non-time-short state, the length of the variable display time (variation time) of the normal symbol variable display is based on the fact that the normal symbol lottery is won. The length of the game ball that contacts the movable member 3452A that has transitioned to the approach-permitted posture is set to a length that cannot enter the passage portion 3241 due to the transition of the movable member 3452A to the approach-prohibited posture. Furthermore, in the big winning device in which the probability of entry of the game ball into the inside changes according to the posture of the movable member provided at the entrance according to the gaming state, the maximum allowable entry time of the movable member depends on the gaming state. In the case of a different configuration, a configuration to which the present invention is applied may be used.

  That is, when the special symbol start condition is established in the predetermined first gaming state, the length of the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the special symbol is allowed based on the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball that contacts the movable member that has shifted to the posture has a length that cannot enter a predetermined passage portion in the big winning device due to the shift of the movable member to the approach prohibition posture.

(22) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to twelfth and thirteenth embodiments In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the back setting switch 905 and the intermediate block 103 are closed with respect to the outer frame 101. When a game mode (ball-out rate) change operation (selection operation) is performed by the initialization switch 907, the change operation is performed when the intermediate block 103 is released from the outer frame 101 after the change operation. The game mode changed by the above is set (validated), but not only the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 but also a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. In such a case, the game mode changed by the change operation may be set.

  The “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” for setting the game mode changed by the operation of each switch 905, 907 is, for example, an intermediate block for the outer frame 101 described in the twelfth embodiment. 103 opening operation or closing operation, opening operation or closing operation of the front block 102 with respect to the outer frame 101 or the intermediate block 103, or a predetermined operation with respect to the key cylinder 141 (see FIG. 5) (for example, clockwise rotation operation with an operation key). Or a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261) for the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1), a predetermined operation (for example, a rotating operation) on the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 5), etc. Also good. Or, for example, when an employee of a game hall uses a magnet or the like to enter a game ball into a predetermined winning device (for example, the general winning devices 439A and 439B or the upper middle start winning device 431A). In addition, a configuration in which a game mode changed by the operation of each switch 905, 907 may be set.

  Moreover, when two or more types of “predetermined operations on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” are performed, a configuration in which a game mode changed by the operation of each switch 905, 907 may be set. For example, when an operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed and then an operation of closing the intermediate block 103 opened with respect to the outer frame 101 again with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed, each switch A configuration in which a game mode changed by the operations of 905 and 907 is set may be used.

  Alternatively, for example, after the opening operation of the front block 102 with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed, a person who performed the opening operation (for example, an employee of a game hall) may receive a predetermined winning device (for example, a general winning device 439A, 439B, the upper middle start winning device 431A, etc.) may be configured such that the game mode changed by the operation of each switch 905, 907 is set.

  In the pachinko machine 100 that can execute the nail state-related process S1222 shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 34, as in the above-described modified example, the game ball is moved into the general prize-winning device 439A or the general prize-winning device 439B. When a configuration capable of setting the (ball-out rate) is applied, when a game ball is entered into the general prize-winning device 439A or the general prize-winning device 439B in order to set the game mode, the game ball is entered. On the other hand, the general winning number counter may not be updated (that is, the process S1403 is not executed). Similarly, in a configuration in which game balls that have entered a start prize device such as the upper middle start prize device 431A are counted, the game balls are entered into a start prize device such as the upper middle start prize device 431A in order to set a game mode. In such a case, the game ball may be excluded from counting the game balls that have entered the start winning device.

  Further, when at least one type of “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” is performed, a game mode changed by the operation of each switch 905, 907 may be set. . For example, a predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 and a predetermined operation on a side other than the front side (for example, the back side) of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, a state return switch 2592 (see FIG. 32) The game mode changed by the operation of each of the switches 905 and 907 may be set when the pressing operation on () is performed.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the game mode (out-going rate) change operation (selection operation) is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In such a case, the temporary setting notification (output of the temporary setting notification sound) started by the end of the change operation is stopped when the intermediate block 103 is opened to the outer frame 101. The temporary setting notification may be stopped when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 without being limited to the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the frame 101.

  The “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” for stopping the temporary setting notification is, for example, the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 described in the twelfth embodiment, the outer frame 101 or An opening operation of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, a predetermined operation with respect to the key cylinder 141 (see FIG. 5) (for example, a clockwise rotation operation with an operation key), and a predetermined operation with respect to the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1) ( For example, a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) for the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 5) or the like may be used.

  The configuration may be such that the provisional setting notification is stopped when two or more types of “predetermined operations on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” are performed. For example, when the operation of closing the intermediate block 103 opened with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed again with respect to the outer frame 101 after the operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed, temporary setting is performed. A configuration may be employed in which the notification is stopped.

  In addition, the provisional setting notification may be stopped when at least one type of “predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100” is performed. For example, a predetermined operation on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 and a predetermined operation on a side other than the front side (for example, the back side) of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, a state return switch 2592 (see FIG. 32) The temporary setting notification may be stopped when a pressing operation) is performed.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game mode (out-going rate) change operation (selection operation) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. If it is performed, the temporary setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output when the change operation is completed (more specifically, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is completed). However, when the change operation is completed, not only the temporary setting notification sound and the opening / closing notification sound but also a configuration in which predetermined information is output may be used.

  Note that the “predetermined information” that is output when the game mode change operation is completed may be information such as a temporary setting notification sound or an opening / closing notification sound, such as a panel light emitting device 490 or a frame light emitting device. It may be information by light output from a light emitting device such as 271 to 275, or may be information by an image output from a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 479, or an external management device (for example, It may be data output to a so-called “hall computer” or a portable terminal.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game mode (out-going rate) change operation (selection operation) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. If it is performed, the temporary setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output when the change operation is completed (more specifically, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is completed). . Alternatively, a temporary setting notification sound or an opening / closing notification sound may be output when the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. After the rear setting switch 905 is operated by the predetermined key, the initial setting sound is output. The temporary setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound may be output when the enable switch 907 is operated.

  In the above twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the game mode (starting rate) change operation (selection operation) by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is performed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In such a case, the temporary setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound is output. However, the operation is not limited to the operation of the switches 905 and 907, and the pachinko machine is in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. The temporary setting notification sound or the opening / closing notification sound may be output when a predetermined operation on the back side of the machine 100 is performed. The “predetermined operation on the back side of the pachinko machine 100” includes a game mode change operation by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, and wiring for connecting the device of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, main control). For example, it may be a change operation for the device 370 and the wiring for electrically connecting the sub-control device 390.

  In the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to change the game mode (out-going rate) by the switches 905 and 907 even when the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the outer frame 101. A configuration may be possible in which the game mode (the pitch rate) cannot be changed in a state where the intermediate block 103 is opened with respect to the frame 101.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the operation units (the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907) for changing the game mode are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The structure provided in a side surface side or a front surface side may be sufficient.

  In the RAM clear process S2002 of the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control board 920 in the twelfth embodiment, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is deleted. However, the RAM clear processing S2002 may be configured to erase all the stored information in the RAM including the setting correspondence information.

  In the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control board 920 in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the ON state (S2001: Y), Each process (S2002-S2004, S3001-S3003, S2005, S2006) related to the setting of the gaming state is executed. In addition, even if it is determined in the determination process S2001 that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), if the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, the game A configuration in which each process (S2002 to S2004, S3001 to S3003, S2005, and S2006) related to the state setting may be executed. Specifically, after execution of the RAM clear process S1008, the process waits until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned on, and when it is determined that the setting signal has been switched to the on state, The structure (S2002-S2004, S3001-S3003, S2005, S2006) may be performed.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key, the selected game mode (sport rate) is sequentially changed. Although it is configured, every time a game ball is made to enter a predetermined winning device (for example, the general winning devices 439A, 439B, the upper middle start winning device 431A, etc.) in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the selected game mode (ball-out rate) is sequentially changed. That is, it is good also as a structure which can set a game aspect (ball-out rate) by making a predetermined winning device win a game ball. In the modification, when the operation of the back setting switch 905 is ended (that is, when the game mode change operation is ended), the RAM change setting process S2005 is executed after the processes of S3001 to S3003. The RAM change setting process S2005 may be executed without performing the processes of S3001 to S3003.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, when a game mode change operation (selection operation) is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Is a game mode after the change operation by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 on condition that the intermediate block 103 is released from the outer frame 101 after the change operation. However, instead of this condition, or in addition to this condition, it is also possible to have a structure in which a game mode (outcome rate) can be set by allowing a predetermined winning device to win a game ball. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 that can execute the nail state-related process S1222 shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 34, as in the above-described modified example, the game ball is moved into the general prize-winning device 439A or the general prize-winning device 439B. When a configuration capable of setting the (ball-out rate) is applied, when a game ball is entered into the general prize-winning device 439A or the general prize-winning device 439B in order to set the game mode, the game ball is entered. On the other hand, the general winning number counter may not be updated (that is, the process S1403 is not executed). Similarly, in a configuration in which game balls that have entered a start prize device such as the upper middle start prize device 431A are counted, the game balls are entered into a start prize device such as the upper middle start prize device 431A in order to set a game mode. In such a case, the game ball may be excluded from counting the game balls that have entered the start winning device.

  In the above-described twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, a game mode (starting rate) change operation (selection operation) is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101. In such a case, when the opening operation of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is performed after the changing operation, the game mode changed by the changing operation is set (validated). That is, at time t23 in the timing charts of FIGS. 54 (B) and 55, the RAM change setting process S2005 is executed, whereby the game mode in the pachinko machine 100 is selected by the change operation by the switches 905 and 907. It was set as the configuration set to the game mode.

  Instead, when a game mode change operation is performed by the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 in a state where the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, the back setting switch 905 by a predetermined key is used. It is good also as a structure by which the game aspect changed by the said change operation is set when this operation is complete | finished. That is, at time t22 in the timing charts of FIG. 54B and FIG. 55, the processing after RAM change setting processing S2005 is performed while continuing the temporary setting notification processing (processing S3003) using the temporary setting notification sound or the release notification sound. It may be configured to execute. According to the modified example, since the process after the RAM change setting process S2005 is executed at time t22, it is possible to suppress the delay of the end of the control start process, thereby changing from the control start process to each process related to the normal game. Early transition is possible.

  (23) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the big hit expectation value is increased until the big hit state is generated a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state on the condition that a ball wins a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Moreover, you may implement in the enclosed pachinko machine with which a ball | bowl circulates. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A game area (game area) where game balls flow down,
A front side member (front block 102) that has a visual recognition part that enables visual recognition of the game area and is provided so that the front side of the game area can be opened and closed;
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A game entrance that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter (a game entrance of the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B);
Game value giving means (payout control board 930) for giving game value when a game ball enters the entrance,
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) equipped with
Information on the number of entries updated in response to the entry of game balls excluding a part of the game balls that are continuously inserted by opening at least the front side member among the game balls that have entered the entrance (number of general winnings) Entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing
Output means (nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means or correspondence information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the entry number information When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in the game area where the game balls flow down, a winning hole from which the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, a passage leading the gaming ball to the winning hole, and a winning hole are not won. A large number of game nails are formed to form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven and fixed to a game board that forms the outer shape of the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, there may be a situation where it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of game balls won in the winning opening.

  That is, for example, when inspecting gaming machines prior to shipment at the factory, the front side member provided so that the front side of the gaming area can be opened and closed is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously thrown into each winning opening. However, when the control device is checked for proper operation, the game balls are continuously thrown into each winning opening with a very high probability of the game balls entering when the player plays. The Rukoto. If the game balls enter the consecutive winning holes are used as values for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, it is possible to appropriately determine the performance of the gaming machine. It may not be possible.

  In addition, for example, a cheating agent who visits a game hall (hall) where a gaming machine is installed illegally opens a front side member provided so that the front side of the game area can be opened and closed, and plays a game ball to a specific prize opening. May be continuously input. In this case, even though the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, there is a possibility that the winning of the game ball at the winning opening becomes higher than the designed value and it is determined that the performance is not as designed. Here, for a winning opening that is not released unless a specific gaming state is won, such as winning a big hit, the entry of a gaming ball at an improper timing is detected by the control of the gaming machine, and control corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. Although it is easy to do, a certain game value such as a winning opening where a game ball can always enter regardless of the game state, or a certain number of game balls paid out without receiving a lottery when a game ball enters It may be difficult to determine whether such an abnormal condition has occurred or whether it is due to a normal game for a prize mouth (general prize mouth) to which Could be done.

  In addition, for example, as a possibility that the performance of a gaming machine may be changed to a value deviating from the design value, not only a fraudster who visits a game hall (hall) where a gaming machine is installed and plays a game, There is also a possibility that the related parties will do it themselves. For example, if the game hall side modifies the game ball so that no game ball can enter the entrance of a specific winning port called a general winning port, the winning of the game ball to the winning port may be kept lower than the design value. There is also.

  In a game hall that performs such a fraud, various measures may be taken so that the fraud is not detected by an outsider (for example, a member of an inspection organization of the gaming machine). For example, in the situation where there are no outsiders such as after closing the store, the front door is opened, and the game balls are illegally continuously inserted into the corresponding winning opening by the hands of a game hall employee, etc. There is a possibility to match the bottom of the book. In this case, as long as the value after matching the bottom of the book is confirmed, an outsider cannot detect fraud on the game hall side.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the feature 10, the game balls excluding a part of the game balls that have entered the game balls that are continuously inserted by opening at least the front side member among the game balls that have entered the entrance. The approach number information updated corresponding to the sphere is stored in the approach number storage means, the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means, or the correspondence information counted corresponding to the approach number information Is output from the output means. Therefore, it is possible to exclude at least a part of the game balls that are continuously thrown in by opening the front side member from the update of the entry number information, and therefore, using the entry number information or the correspondence information, It is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value with respect to the approach of the ball. For example, even if an employee of a game hall opens a front side member (front door) after closing a store and illegally continuously throws game balls into the entrance (winning entrance) At least a part of such illegal consecutive throws is not counted as a game ball that has entered the entrance, so that it is difficult for the game hall side to perform illegal book alignment with the design value. Thereby, fraud concealment by the game hall side can be suppressed, and an outsider can preferably detect fraud on the game hall side.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the “entry number information stored by the approach number storage means” is not necessarily the game balls excluding a part of the game balls that are continuously thrown in “open the front side member”. It is not necessary to be updated in response to the entry, a part of the game balls that are continuously thrown in “open the front side member”, and the continuous entry “when the front side member is closed” The game ball may be updated in response to the entry of the game ball excluding a part of the game ball. That is, as the description of the “entry number storage means” in the gaming machine according to the feature 10, “the entry of the game ball excluding at least a part of the game balls that have successively entered among the game balls that have entered the entrance” The entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the entry number information (general winning number) updated in response to the “number of entries” may be used. In this case, the front side member is opened. In addition to preventing the entry number information from being updated for at least some of the game balls that are continuously thrown into the entrance, they entered the entrance continuously in an unauthorized manner with the front side member closed. It is possible to prevent the entry number information from being updated for at least a part of the game ball.

  For example, a game clogged state in which a game ball stays in a part of the game area occurs, and the flow of the game ball in a part of the game area becomes impossible due to the clogged state, so that the game ball continues to the entrance. When a situation occurs, the number-of-entry information can be prevented from being updated for at least some of these game balls. As a result, in the case where the player keeps firing the game balls in the ball jammed state and illegally enters the game balls continuously to the entrance, the update of the entry number information It is possible to correspond to the number of game balls entering excluding some. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed. In addition, in the case where an illegal act of illegally making a game ball enter the entrance by using a magnet illegally, the entry number information is not updated for at least a part of the game balls. And the performance of the gaming machine can be more appropriately evaluated.

  Note that “continuous” in “continuous input” and “continuous entry” includes a case in which a predetermined number or more of game balls continuously enter the entrance during a predetermined time. In addition to the case where the game balls continue without any interval, the case where the game balls enter the entrance with an interval is included.

<Feature 11>
A gaming machine according to feature 10, wherein
Launch correspondence number information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing launch correspondence number information (number of launch balls) corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls launched in the game area increases. )
The output means outputs the correspondence information corresponding to a ratio between the firing correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 11, the number information corresponding to launch corresponding to the number corresponding to launch that increases when the number of game balls launched in the game area increases is stored in the launch correspondence number information storage means. The Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio between the firing correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value that associates the game ball that has entered the entrance and the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area is output from the output unit as correspondence information. Therefore, an outsider can easily grasp the performance state of the gaming machine from the correspondence information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
Provided with display means (nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying symbols or predetermined information,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the output means displays and outputs the entry number information or the correspondence information on the display means when the front side member is opened.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 12, the entry number information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the display means when the front side member is opened. Therefore, information unrelated to the game (that is, entry number information or correspondence information) is not displayed on the display means during the game of the player, and the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

<Feature 13>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 10 to 12,
A substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols;
The output means displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on the corner portion side of the display means when the display is variably displayed on the display means. A featured gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 13, the entry number information or the correspondence information is displayed while the display output by the output means is displayed during the variation of the symbol, so even if it is displayed during the game, it is difficult to stand out. It is difficult to recognize that information irrelevant to the game (that is, information on the number of entries or correspondence information) is displayed on the display means. On the other hand, an outsider such as a member of the inspection machine of the gaming machine can display the approach number information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means during the game by the player (more specifically, during the change display of the symbol). Can be confirmed.

  In particular, since the entry number information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, the player recognizes the entry number information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. It can suppress suitably. In addition, since the number-of-entry information or correspondence information displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to suppress the player's understanding of the meaning of the information, and in this respect also, the number-of-entry information displayed on the display means Or it can control suitably that a player recognizes as information unrelated to a game.

<Feature 20>
A game area (game area) where game balls flow down,
A front side member (front block 102) that has a visual recognition part that enables visual recognition of the game area and is provided so that the front side of the game area can be opened and closed;
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A game entrance that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter (a game entrance of the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B);
Game value giving means (payout control board 930) for giving game value when a game ball enters the entrance,
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) equipped with
Stores entry number information (general winning number) updated in response to the entry of a game ball entered during a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is established among the game balls that have entered the entrance. Entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920),
Output means (nail state level display device 474) capable of outputting at least the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means or correspondence information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the entry number information When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in the game area where the game balls flow down, a winning hole from which the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, a passage leading the gaming ball to the winning hole, and a winning hole are not won. A large number of game nails are formed to form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven and fixed to a game board that forms the outer shape of the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, there may be a situation where it is difficult to appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of game balls won in the winning opening.

  That is, for example, when inspecting gaming machines prior to shipment at the factory, the front side member provided so that the front side of the gaming area can be opened and closed is opened, and a plurality of game balls are continuously thrown into each winning opening. However, when the control device is checked for proper operation, the game balls are continuously thrown into each winning opening with a very high probability of the game balls entering when the player plays. The Rukoto. If the game balls enter the consecutive winning holes are used as values for determining whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed, it is possible to appropriately determine the performance of the gaming machine. It may not be possible.

  In addition, for example, as a possibility that the performance of a gaming machine may be changed to a value deviating from the design value, not only a fraudster who visits a game hall (hall) where a gaming machine is installed and plays a game, There is also a possibility that the related parties will do it themselves. For example, if the game hall side modifies the game ball so that no game ball can enter the entrance of a specific winning port called a general winning port, the winning of the game ball to the winning port may be kept lower than the design value. There is also. Alternatively, the game hall side may make it impossible to enter the game ball at the entrance of the prize opening before opening the store, or by frequently remodeling whether it is possible to enter the prize hall on each day. There is also a possibility of adjusting the winning percentage of game balls (that is, ease of winning).

  As countermeasures against such fraud, whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed based on the count value of gaming balls won by an outsider (for example, a member of the inspection organization of the gaming machine) at the winning opening It is conceivable to determine whether or not. In order to increase the accuracy of determination based on the count value, it is preferable to use a count value obtained by accumulating several days instead of a count value for one day. However, when the winning percentage of the game ball to the winning opening is adjusted, the winning percentage is higher than the designed value in some cases, and the winning percentage is lower than the designed value in some cases, so the count value for several days is accumulated. As long as the count value is averaged and the determination of whether or not it is fraudulent is made based on the count value, there is a possibility that an outsider cannot detect the fraud on the game hall side.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature 20 corresponds to the entry of a game ball that has entered during a predetermined period after a predetermined count start condition is satisfied among the game balls that have entered the entrance. The approach number information updated in this manner is stored in the approach number storage means, and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the correspondence information counted corresponding to the approach number information is output from the output means. Is output. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value with respect to the entry of the game ball into the entrance by using the entry number information or the correspondence information. For example, a certain number of game balls that have entered the entrance after the gaming machine is manufactured can be excluded from the update of the entry number information. In addition, even when the number of entry information for several days is accumulated, the entry number information or the corresponding number information is difficult to be averaged, thereby appropriately reflecting fraud on the game hall side. Thereby, the outsider can detect suitably the fraud on the game hall side.

<Feature 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The launching means can launch a game ball with an intensity according to the operation amount of the operation unit (launching handle 252),
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing lottery based on the establishment of the start condition;
Special gaming state generating means (main control board 920) for generating a special gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means;
A specific entry ball that is provided in a game area into which a game ball can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined operation amount in the game area, and into which the game ball can enter during the occurrence of the special game state. Mouths (the winning mouths of the lower university winning device 433 and the upper university winning device 434),
Game state determination means (main control board 920) for determining whether the normal game state;
When the game state determination means determines that the game state is the normal game state, the determination is used as the counting start condition, corresponding to the entry of a game ball that has entered during a predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied. Updating means (main control board 920) for updating the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, when it is determined that the game state is determined to be a normal gaming state by the gaming state determination unit, the determination is used as the counting start condition during a predetermined period after the counting start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the entry of the game ball that has entered, the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means is updated. As a result, the entry number information updated in response to the entry of the game ball that has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter only in the normal gaming state among the entrances can be obtained with high accuracy. Is possible.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21, wherein
Launch correspondence number information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing launch correspondence number information (number of launch balls) corresponding to the launch correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls launched in the game area increases. )
The output means outputs the correspondence information corresponding to a ratio between the firing correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means. A gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 22, the firing correspondence number information corresponding to the firing correspondence number that increases when the number of game balls launched in the gaming area increases is stored in the firing correspondence number information storage means. The Correspondence information corresponding to the ratio between the firing correspondence number information stored in the approach number storage means and the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means is output from the output means. That is, a value that associates the game ball that has entered the entrance and the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area is output from the output unit as correspondence information. Therefore, an outsider can easily grasp the performance state of the gaming machine from the correspondence information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is as designed.

<Feature 23>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 22,
Provided with display means (nail state level display device 474) capable of displaying symbols or predetermined information,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the output means displays and outputs the entry number information or the correspondence information on the display means when the front side member is opened.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 23, the entry number information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the display means when the front side member is opened. Therefore, information unrelated to the game (that is, entry number information or correspondence information) is not displayed on the display means during the game of the player, and the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

<Feature 24>
A gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 23,
A substantially rectangular display means (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols;
The output means displays and outputs the encrypted entry number information or the encrypted correspondence information on the corner portion side of the display means when the display is variably displayed on the display means. A featured gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 24, since the display output by the output means is displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbols, the number of ingress information or the correspondence information is displayed. During the game by the player (more specifically, during the change display of the symbol), it is possible to confirm the entry number information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means.

  In particular, since the number-of-entry information or the correspondence information is displayed and output on the corner side of the display means, it is difficult to stand out, and the player recognizes the number-of-entry information or the correspondence information displayed on the display means as information unrelated to the game. This can be suitably suppressed. In addition, since the number-of-entry information or correspondence information displayed and output is encrypted, it is possible to suppress the player's understanding of the meaning of the information, and in this respect also, the number-of-entry information displayed on the display means Or it can control suitably that a player recognizes as information unrelated to a game.

<Feature 30>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting unit (main control board) that grants a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball has entered 920),
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances is satisfied. And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 30, for example, the “predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance” includes, for example, one or more predetermined ones of the plurality of entrances A game ball enters a game entrance, a game ball enters a predetermined order in two or more entrances out of a plurality of entrances, a plurality of entrances Updated according to the entry of a predetermined number of predetermined game balls into one or more predetermined entrances, and entry into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances. The predetermined condition is established for the number of entry information or the correspondence information counted corresponding to the entry number information, and a predetermined one of a plurality of entrances during a predetermined game period. Or is the start condition based on the entrance of game balls to two or more entrances established? Be previously predetermined time period which is determined is passed, a new starting condition is that the status is not established to a predetermined number of occurrences of predetermined, and the like.

<Feature 40>
A game area (game area) in which game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down,
A plurality of entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
When a game ball enters a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances, a privilege granting unit (main control board) that grants a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball has entered 920),
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including an entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances is satisfied And a setting output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940).

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, if it is the gaming machine described in the feature 30 and the feature 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming property. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. The Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  A plurality of entrances into which game balls can enter are provided in a game area where game balls that have entered from a predetermined entrance flow down, and a predetermined entrance of these entrances is predetermined. When a game ball enters, a predetermined privilege according to the entrance into which the game ball has entered is given by the privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is established among a plurality of entrances, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means Is done. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add a game property for estimating probability information about the gaming machine in the game through establishment of a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to infer the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in gaming machines that tend to pay attention to lottery results such as game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance. Gaming can be improved in gaming machines that utilize the flow of gaming balls, such as diversifying the game by setting the number of ball outlets and setting the number of balls.

  In particular, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, when a predetermined condition including the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances is satisfied, it is stored in the setting storage means. Since the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means, the player can predetermine information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery. Can be obtained as a privilege of having a game ball enter the entrance. Therefore, the player can play a game while enjoying the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40,
The setting output means, as at least a part of the predetermined condition, that a game ball enters a predetermined order in two or more predetermined entrances among the plurality of entrances. The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting output information is output on the condition.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 41, when a game ball enters a predetermined order in two or more predetermined entrances among a plurality of entrances, a predetermined condition (ie, Setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means that at least a part of a predetermined condition including the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance among a plurality of entrances is established Is output by the setting output means. As a result, the player is currently set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery as a privilege for allowing the game balls to enter two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined order. It is possible to enjoy the gameability of obtaining information corresponding to the probability of being played. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which the game balls enter the predetermined two or more predetermined entrances in a predetermined order.

<Feature 50>
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball;
A game area (game area) in which a game ball that has been launched by the launching means and entered from a predetermined entrance flows down;
A entrance hole (general winning devices 2439A and 2439B) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the entrance,
Setting storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a predetermined lottery result being selected in a predetermined lottery in the game )When,
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Entry number storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing entry number information (general winning number) updated in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the entrance.
Predetermined conditions including at least a condition established corresponding to the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means or corresponding information (nail state level) counted corresponding to the entry number information are satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) that outputs setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. The Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to information corresponding to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

  In the game area where the game balls launched from the launching means and flowing in from the predetermined entrance flow down, there is a entrance where a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the entrance The predetermined privilege corresponding to the entrance is given by the privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is suggested to the player based on the output by the setting output means. can do. Therefore, the player can add a game property for estimating probability information about the gaming machine in the game through establishment of a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to infer the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in gaming machines that tend to pay attention to lottery results such as game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance. Gaming can be improved in gaming machines that utilize the flow of gaming balls, such as diversifying the game by setting the number of ball outlets and setting the number of balls.

  The entry number storage means stores entry number information that is updated according to the entry of the game ball into the entrance. Setting corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition is established for the approach number information stored in the approach number storage means or the correspondence information counted corresponding to the approach number information Output information is output by the setting output means. Since the number-of-entry information and the corresponding information are information reflecting the state of entry of game balls into the entrance, a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery according to the state of entry of game balls into the entrance. It is possible to output information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability.

  Thus, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value that suggests that the performance of the gaming machine may not be as designed as the entry number information and the correspondence information are related to the entry of the game ball into the entrance, Can be suggested that there is a possibility of suffering a disadvantage, and the information output by the setting output means is also used to allow the player to determine whether or not the game machine continues during the game It becomes possible.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
When the start condition is established, the display unit displays the identification information in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state;
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control) Substrate 920 RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
During a predetermined game period, even if the predetermined first period has elapsed after the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined condition is satisfied that includes a predetermined number of times that the new start condition is not satisfied. A setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) that outputs setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. .

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery unit is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation execution unit. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

  When a predetermined condition relating to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, it corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Information can be suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add a game property for estimating probability information about the gaming machine in the game through establishment of a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined entrance. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  Further, in order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to infer the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entrance in the game area. be able to. For this reason, in gaming machines that tend to pay attention to lottery results such as game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance. Gaming can be improved in gaming machines that utilize the flow of gaming balls, such as diversifying the game by setting the number of ball outlets and setting the number of balls.

  Further, during a predetermined game period, even if the predetermined first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied, if a new start condition is not satisfied a predetermined number of times, it is stored in the setting storage means. Setting output information corresponding to the probability information is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new start condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition is satisfied is an undesirable situation for the player, as compared to a case where a player plays a game in another gaming machine. May suffer disadvantages. On the other hand, in this situation, it is possible to make the player determine whether or not the game machine continues during the game by utilizing the information output by the setting output means.

  In place of the description of the setting output means in the gaming machine described in the feature 60, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, including a game ball entering a predetermined entrance as a predetermined start condition is satisfied. A setting output unit that outputs setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit may be provided.

<Feature 70>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
When the start condition is established, the display unit displays the identification information in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state;
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control) Substrate 920 RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
At least a part of the period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery is satisfied to when the change execution means performs the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result. As an effect constituted by the effect selection means (main control board 920, sub-effects) for selecting the effect of the effect time corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means from a plurality of effects with different effect times. Control board 940),
An effect display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying the effect selected by the effect selection means on the display unit.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery unit is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation execution unit. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

  From the multiple types of effects with different effect times, the effect of the effect time according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is the start condition where the effect selection means has obtained the first result in a predetermined lottery. After being established, it is selected as an effect composed of at least part of the period from when the change execution means until the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed, and is displayed on the display unit by the effect display control means. The

  Accordingly, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery is predetermined. An effect composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result in the lottery is established until the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variation execution means. It is reflected in the production time. Therefore, the player can guess the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery from the production time of the effect. Can be added. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  Moreover, in order for a player to guess probability information, the opportunity which pays attention to the length of production time can be increased. For this reason, in a gaming machine that tends to pay attention to a lottery result such as a game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the number of objects to be noticed, so that it is possible to improve the gaming characteristics in a gaming machine that uses the flow of gaming balls.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
The effect selecting means selects an effect with a probability that an effect having the longest effect time is easily executed among the plurality of types of effects, with respect to a probability that is most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probabilities. To play.

  The gaming machine described in feature 71 is selected with a probability that an effect having the longest effect time is easily executed among a plurality of types of effects, with respect to a probability that is most advantageous to the player among a plurality of settable probabilities. Therefore, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the performance is performed for a long time.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The effect selected by the effect selection means is the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means after the start condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery is satisfied. A special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation time set within an executable period of an effect composed of at least a part of the period until the stop display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

If it is a gaming machine described in feature 72,
An effect composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery is established until the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the change execution means. The operation time is set within the executable period. The effect selected by the effect selection means is a special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at the operation time. Therefore, the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit at the operation time, so that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery from the effect time of the special effect executed based on the operation or the first The probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the lottery of 2 can be estimated.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying the identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance as the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board) that displays the identification information variably on the display section and then displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means when the start condition is satisfied. 940),
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a different game state;
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control) Substrate 920 RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
Control execution means (main control board 920, sub-control) that executes control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when predetermined conditions including conditions that can be satisfied during the special gaming state are satisfied. And a board 940).

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery unit is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation execution unit. . At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with the identification information corresponding to the first result. To do.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

  When predetermined conditions including conditions that can be satisfied during the special game state are satisfied, control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is executed by the control execution means. Therefore, the player can use the probability information stored in the setting storage unit based on the contents that appear under the control by the control execution unit, that is, the lottery probability or the second lottery in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery. The gameability which estimates the probability currently set as a lottery probability that a predetermined result is chosen can be added. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is preferable that a condition that can be established during the special game state includes an entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance during the special game state. In order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to infer the probability information, it may be necessary to satisfy a predetermined condition regarding the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entrance in the game area. it can. For this reason, in gaming machines that tend to pay attention to lottery results such as game state transition lottery, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the entry of a game ball into a predetermined entrance. Gaming can be improved in gaming machines that utilize the flow of gaming balls, such as diversifying the game by setting the number of ball outlets and setting the number of balls.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 80, as a condition that can be established during the special game state, an operation unit different from an operation unit that performs a launch operation in which the player launches a game ball in the game area during the special game state It is preferable to set the conditions that can be satisfied by an operation for. As a result, in the special gaming state, it is possible to add a game that pays attention to an operation different from the launch operation, and not only to continue the launch operation but also to add the other operation to the probability of the player. It is possible to add a new gameability that enables information to be acquired.

<Feature 90>
By being driven by a predetermined driving means, an entry restriction state (entry prohibition posture) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening, and an entry allowance that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. A movable member capable of switching a state (entrance allowable posture), and forming a descending inclined surface capable of guiding a game ball from one side to the other side in the entry restricted state (movable piece of the right entry restriction mechanism 1452) )When,
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a first opening that opens upward with respect to the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow-down passage portions through which the game ball that has entered from the predetermined opening can pass One downflow passage portion (first downflow passage portion 1532A);
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided on the downstream side of the first downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downflow passage unit;
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a second downstream passage portion (second passage) that opens upward from the first downstream passage portion to the downstream portion of the descending inclined surface of the plurality of downstream passage portions. Downflow passage portion 1532B),
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided on the downstream side of the second downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second downflow passage unit;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit;
The first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is a game. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

  As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine equipped with a winning device capable of changing the probability of entering a game ball into the inside by changing the posture (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213044). See the official gazette). The winning device is configured to be capable of transition between an approach permitting posture that allows entry of a game ball and an entry restricting posture that restricts the entry of a game ball. This is realized by changing the arrangement of the movable piece of the mechanism. Then, after the movable piece of the winning device shifts to the allowed entry posture, when a predetermined number of game balls are detected by a detection unit such as a detection switch, the winning device changes from the allowed entry posture to the restricted entry posture. By performing the control, it is possible to advance the game, such as a preparation period (interval) until a transition to the next allowed entry posture or the start of the next unit game.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the configuration for making the game proceed appropriately in the winning device.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately advance the game by controlling the movable member. That is, the movable member is driven by a predetermined driving means, so that an entry restriction state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening and an entry that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. It is configured to be switchable between an allowable state and a descending inclined surface capable of guiding the game ball from one side to the other side in the entry restricted state.

  Of the plurality of flow-down passage portions through which a game ball that has entered from a predetermined opening can pass when the movable member is in an entry-permitted state, the first flow-down passage portion is located above the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface. It is open. A first detection unit capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first flow-down passage portion is provided downstream of the first flow-down passage portion.

  In addition, the second downflow passage portion among the plurality of downflow passage portions is open upward with respect to the downstream portion of the descending inclined surface from the first downflow passage portion. A second detection unit capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second flow-down passage portion is provided downstream of the second flow-down passage portion. When a game ball that has entered from a predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. Therefore, since the first downflow passage portion is configured to be opened upstream of the second downflow passage portion on the descending inclined surface, the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening portion is the second downflow passage portion. It is easier to enter the first downflow passage portion than the passage portion.

  Here, the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection unit is substantially the same as or shorter than the diameter of the game ball. In other words, even if the distance from the time when the game ball enters the first flow path portion to the time when the game ball is detected by the first detection portion is long, it is suppressed to about the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball enters the first flow path portion. The time required for detection by the first detection unit can be reduced to a short time.

  In addition, since the first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, when the game ball flows down the first downflow passage portion, the game ball intersects the downflow direction. Swaying in the direction can be suppressed. Therefore, since the game ball that has entered the first flow-down passage portion can flow smoothly through the first flow-down passage portion, even at this point, the game ball enters the first flow-down passage portion and is detected by the first detection portion. The time required for this can be reduced to a short time.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, the first downflow passage portion in which the game ball flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening portion is easier to enter than the second downflow passage portion is the game ball. Is configured to have a passage width that can be entered one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection unit is substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of the game ball Has been.

  Therefore, the time required from the time when the last game ball having a prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture enters the first flow-down passage portion to be detected by the first detection portion is suitably suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably shorten the time required for the movable member to be switched to the entry restricted state after the last game ball having the specified number has entered the first flow-down passage portion. As a result, when the last game ball, which is a prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture, enters the predetermined opening, among the game balls flowing down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening. Since the movable member is switched to the entry restricted state at an early stage from the entry, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from entering the predetermined opening and winning.

  In addition, the time required from the time when the last game ball having a prescribed number allowed for one approach allowable posture enters the first flow-down passage portion to be detected by the first detection portion is suitably reduced. Therefore, when the allowed approach posture is generated a plurality of times with a short interval, even if the interval is set to a short time, it is possible to easily detect the game ball appropriately. For this reason, for example, during the short-time gaming state, it is possible to generate a gaming state in which it is easy to prevent the game ball from progressing downstream via the upper surface of the movable member, and the winning device including the movable member can be reduced in size. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of game parts such as game areas where game balls flow down, winning devices, decorative parts, and the like.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 90, “substantially equal to the diameter of a game ball” is a length that is greater than one time the diameter of the game ball and shorter than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is preferable, and it is preferably 1 times the diameter of the game ball.

  Instead of the gaming machine described in the feature 90 described above, a gaming machine having a configuration described as follows may be used.

By being driven by a predetermined driving means, an entry restriction state (entry prohibition posture) that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined opening, and an entry allowance that allows the game ball to enter the predetermined opening. A movable member capable of switching between a state (permissible approaching posture) and forming a descending inclined surface capable of guiding a game ball from one side to the other side in the entry restricted state (movable of the right entry restriction mechanism 1452) Piece)
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a first opening that opens upward with respect to the upstream portion of the descending inclined surface among the plurality of flow-down passage portions through which the game ball that has entered from the predetermined opening can pass One downflow passage portion (first downflow passage portion 1532A);
A first detection unit (right start winning switch 1442A) provided on the downstream side of the first downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first downflow passage unit;
When the movable member is in the entry-permitted state, a second downstream passage portion (second passage) that opens upward from the first downstream passage portion to the downstream portion of the descending inclined surface of the plurality of downstream passage portions. Downflow passage portion 1532B),
A second detection unit (right start winning switch 1442B) provided on the downstream side of the second downflow passage unit and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the second downflow passage unit;
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when the game ball entering from the predetermined opening is detected by the first detection unit or the second detection unit;
A movable member control means for controlling switching of the movable member between the allowed entry state and the restricted entry state, wherein the game ball is detected by the first detection unit when the movable member is in the allowed entry state. Is the predetermined number of game balls that are allowed to enter the predetermined opening in the one-time allowed entry state, the predetermined drive means is driven following detection of the game ball. And a movable member control means (main control board 920) for switching the movable member to the entry allowable state.
The first downflow passage portion is configured to have a passage width that allows game balls to enter one by one, and the length from the lower surface of the movable member in the entry restricted state to the upper end of the first detection portion is a game. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be substantially equal to or shorter than the diameter of a sphere.

<Feature 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The first downflow passage portion has a gradually changing section that gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as the passage width of the first downflow passage portion approaches the first detection portion on the upstream side of the first detection portion. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to feature 91, the first downflow passage portion has a gradually changing section that gradually decreases so as to approach the diameter of the game ball as the passage width of the first downflow passage portion approaches the first detection portion. It is provided upstream from the first detection unit. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down passage portion is rectified in the flow-down direction as it proceeds in the flow-down direction in the gradual change section, so that the first detection unit located on the downstream side of the gradual change section flows down smoothly. Accordingly, erroneous detection of the game ball by the first detection unit can be suppressed.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to Feature 90 or 91,
A direction changing portion (protruding portions 1537, 1538) for meandering the game ball passing above the descending inclined surface formed by the movable member in the entry restricted state in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine front view,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first downflow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side from a position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to feature 92, when the movable member is in the entry restricted state, the game ball passes through the descending inclined surface while meandering in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine by the direction changing unit. The staying time of the game ball on the descending inclined surface can be increased. Therefore, while the opening width of the predetermined opening portion in the passing direction of the game ball on the descending inclined surface is suppressed, the movable piece is next switched to the entry-permitted state while passing through the descending inclined surface. The possibility of entering a predetermined opening at the timing can be increased.

  Further, the first downflow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side from the position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing portion, so that the game ball flows down from the upstream side toward the predetermined opening portion. Can enter the first downflow passage portion before the front and rear meandering by the direction changing portion is started.

  In the gaming machine according to feature 92, the “position where the game ball meanders in the front-rear direction by the direction changing unit” may be a position before the game ball reaches the direction changing unit, or a game It may be a position where the sphere has moved either forward or backward by the direction changer. For example, when the first downflow passage portion is opened upward on the upstream side from the position where the game ball has moved to either the front or the rear by the direction changing portion, the course direction of the game ball is changed by the direction changing portion. The situation where it is easy to enter the first downflow passage portion may occur due to the change.

<Feature A0>
When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery is provided, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, which is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state and generates a predetermined specific gaming state with a predetermined probability when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result not accompanied by the occurrence of the special gaming state,
A variable winning portion (right) that takes at least an entry permission state in which entry of a game ball is allowed and an entry restriction state in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters. A prize-winning device 1434),
When the special gaming state or the specific gaming state occurs, the winning control is performed in a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each gaming state, in the variable winning portion, to switch between the allowed entry state and the restricted entry state. Means (main control board 920);
Of the plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined Setting storage means for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery (main control) Substrate 920 RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
The variable winning portion of the variable winning portion by the winning control means according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means so that the specific gaming state occurs differently according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. A gaming machine comprising switching control setting means (main control board 920) for setting switching control.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming performance suitably. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is the first result, a special gaming state advantageous to the normal gaming state is generated. To do. When the lottery result is the second result not accompanied by the occurrence of the special game state, a predetermined specific game state is generated with a predetermined probability.

  The setting storage means has a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

  When a special game state or a specific game state occurs, the winning control means switches between the entry-permitted state and the entry-restricted state in the variable winning portion with a predetermined switching pattern corresponding to the occurrence of each game state. The switching control setting means switches the variable winning portion by the winning control means according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means so that the specific gaming state is generated in accordance with the probability information stored in the setting storage means. Control is set. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the lottery probability or the second lottery in which the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery based on the control of switching the variable winning portion in the specific gaming state The gameability which estimates the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is chosen in can be added. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature A1>
A gaming machine according to feature A0,
The switching by the winning control means is performed after the variable winning portion is switched to the entry-permitted state, until a predetermined duration for maintaining the entry-permitted state elapses, or for a predetermined number of game balls to be the variable prize. Including switching the variable winning portion to the entry restricted state when any of the conditions until entering the portion is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching control setting unit sets a switching pattern that differs in at least the predetermined duration according to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit as the predetermined switching pattern.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature A1, the variable winning portion is switched by the winning control means until the predetermined duration for maintaining the permissible entry state passes after the variable winning portion is switched to the permissible entry state. Alternatively, when any condition until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning portion is satisfied, the variable winning portion is switched to the entry restricted state. The switching control setting means sets a different switching pattern as the predetermined switching pattern according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means for at least the predetermined duration, so that the variable winning portion is maintained in the entry allowable state in the specific gaming state. Based on the set duration, it is possible to add a game property in which the player estimates the probability information stored in the setting storage means.

<Feature A2>
A gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1,
The gaming machine is less likely to generate the specific gaming state than the specific gaming high probability state (probability changing gaming state) in which the specific gaming state is likely to occur when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the specific gaming high probability state. It generates a specific game low probability state (normal game state),
The setting storage means is a probability corresponding to a probability (probability game end probability) of transitioning the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected by the second lottery. A gaming machine characterized by storing at least information (a jackpot probability at a high probability and a probability variation continuation rate).

  In the gaming machine described in the feature A2, a specific game high probability state in which a specific game state is likely to occur when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a specific game in which a specific game state is less likely to occur than the specific game high probability state. Probability that a specific game high probability state is changed to a specific game low probability state as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected by the second lottery in the setting storage means. Probability information corresponding to is stored at least.

  Therefore, based on the control of switching the variable winning portion in the specific gaming state, the game is added to estimate the probability that the player is currently set as the probability of transitioning the specific gaming high probability state to the specific gaming low probability state. can do. Thereby, the player determines whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine in the game, depending on whether or not the probability estimated as the probability of transitioning from the specific game high probability state to the specific game low probability state is favorable to the player. Since it can be determined, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature B0>
When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery is provided, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, which is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific gaming state (small hit) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state There,
A special gaming high probability state (probability variable gaming state) in which the special gaming state occurs with a predetermined high probability when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a probability that the special gaming state will occur from the special gaming high probability state. A control that generates a low special game low probability state (normal game state) is configured to be executable, and as the special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state (short-term probability variation game state), Control can be executed to generate a second special game high probability state (non-short-time probability variable game state) in which a player can easily acquire a game value due to the occurrence of the specific game state compared to the first special game high probability state. Configured,
Generating the first special gaming high probability state over a predetermined execution period after the special gaming state is ended in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result; A game state control means (main control board 920) for ending the first special game high probability state and transitioning to the second special game high probability state when
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special gaming high probability state is generated after the special gaming state is finished, it corresponds to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period Remaining period information storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the calculated information or information capable of calculating the remaining period;
A display device (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying identification information for displaying a lottery result of the lottery means;
A first display that is updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage means when the first special gaming high probability state occurs after the special gaming state ends. (Remaining period display unit 1711) and a display corresponding to predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second special gaming high probability state occurs, and updated in response to a change in the remaining period A gaming machine comprising display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying a display (post-transition gaming state display unit 1712) on the display device together with the identification information.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state is finished, the game ball is more likely to enter the start opening than the normal gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state having a higher probability of winning a big hit than the normal gaming state. It is also known to diversify the game by generating a predetermined advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, such as a state (see, for example, JP-A-2006-189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine configured to continuously generate different types of gaming states after the special gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the gaming property. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state Will occur. If the lottery result is a predetermined second result that does not involve the occurrence of a special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state occurs.

  A special gaming high probability state in which a special gaming state occurs with a predetermined high probability when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a special gaming low probability state in which the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is lower than the special gaming high probability state; The control is configured to execute the control, and the first special gaming high probability state is generated as a special gaming high probability state, and the player can play a game by generating a specific gaming state compared to the first special gaming high probability state. It is configured to be able to execute control that generates a second special game high probability state in which value is easily acquired. In at least part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special gaming high probability state is generated for a predetermined execution period by the gaming state control means after the special gaming state ends, When the predetermined execution period ends, the first special game high probability state is ended and the state is shifted to the second special game high probability state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the special game state is ended, the predetermined execution period in the first special game high probability state Information corresponding to the remaining period or information capable of calculating the remaining period is stored in the remaining period information storage means. A display device capable of displaying the identification information for displaying the lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and when the first special game high probability state occurs after the special game state ends, the display device stores the remaining period information. A first display updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to information stored in the means (information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or information capable of calculating the remaining period), and the second special game height A display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when a probability state occurs and updated according to the change in the remaining period is displayed together with identification information by the display control means.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the first special game high probability state and the second special game high probability state can be generated continuously after the special game state ends, the first display indicates the remaining period for the predetermined execution period. Since the second display corresponding to the predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second special gaming high probability state occurs is also updated in accordance with the change, the second display corresponding to the change in the remaining period is also updated. The player is updated by recognizing that the time when the gaming state transitions from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state is gradually approaching by the updated first display. 2 The game state is changed to a game state (second special game high probability state) in which the player can easily acquire a game value due to the occurrence of a specific game state compared to the current game state (first special game high probability state). Transition Period it is possible to be aware that coming to them. Thereby, when the first special gaming high probability state occurs after the special gaming state, the game property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state Can be suitably improved.

<Feature B1>
A gaming machine according to feature B0,
The display control means displays the first display and the second display on one side of the screen of the display device.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B1, the first display and the second display are displayed on one side of the screen of the display device. Therefore, the player can display the first display and the second display without moving the line of sight greatly. Visual recognition is possible. Therefore, since the player can recognize both the update status of the first display and the update status of the second display, the player can change from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is possible to more suitably improve the game play expecting the game state transition.

<Feature B2>
A gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B2,
The display control means decreases the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display as the remaining period decreases, or increases the overlap between the first display and the second display. A gaming machine characterized by

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B2, as the remaining period decreases, the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display approaches, or the overlap between the first display and the second display increases. From the distance between the display positions of the first display and the second display and the overlapping state of the first display and the second display, the player changes from the first special game high probability state to the second special game high probability state. It is easy to grasp the arrival of the time when the gaming state transitions. Thereby, it is possible to more suitably improve the gaming property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state.

<Feature C0>
When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery is provided, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, which is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific gaming state (small hit) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state There,
In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the end of the special gaming state, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (short time state, probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is obtained. A game state control means (main control) for causing a transition from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state when the specific gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is started. A gaming machine comprising a substrate 920).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In this type of gaming machine, in recent years, as a lottery result by the lottery, the game has been diversified by providing a lottery result (for example, a small hit) that allows a game ball to win a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit. Some are also known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine provided with the lottery result that allows the game ball to win the big winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature C0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming performance suitably. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state Will occur. If the lottery result is a predetermined second result that does not involve the occurrence of a special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state occurs.

  In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, a predetermined advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is generated by the gaming state control means after the end of the special gaming state, When a predetermined number of specific game states occur after the start of the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is changed to a game state different from the predetermined game state. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of generating a specific gaming state by selecting the second result as the lottery result, the specific gaming state is a condition for transitioning the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. By applying the number of occurrences of the game, it is possible to add a game property that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

  Note that in the gaming machine described in the feature C0, the gaming state control means is “from at least part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, after the special gaming state ends, from the normal gaming state. A gaming state that is different from the advantageous gaming state from the advantageous gaming state when a predetermined advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated and the specific gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times after the beginning of the advantageous gaming state. However, it is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is finished in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. If a special advantageous game state is generated and the special game state occurs after the start of the advantageous game state, a predetermined advantageous game state is determined in advance. From the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state when the predetermined execution period ends, or when the specific gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state starts. It may be configured to “transition”.

<Feature C1>
A gaming machine according to feature C0,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second result, any one of a plurality of types of the specific game states can be generated with a probability determined in advance for each type of the specific game state,
For each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states, a number of times information storage means for storing the number of times corresponding to any number of times of the plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state is finished, the gaming state control means, in the number-of-times information storage means, after the advantageous gaming state starts. When the number of specific game states corresponding to the number-of-times information associated with one specific game state among the plurality of types of specific game states is generated, the advantageous game state differs from the advantageous game state. A gaming machine characterized by making a transition to a gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C1, the number-of-times information storage means stores any number of the plurality of types that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of a plurality of types of specific gaming states. Corresponding number-of-times information is stored in association with each other.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating an advantageous game state after the special game state is completed, the game state control means causes a plurality of types of specific games to be stored in the number information storage means after the start of the advantageous game state. When the number of specific gaming states corresponding to the number of times stored in association with one specific gaming state among the states occurs, the advantageous gaming state is changed to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. The Therefore, multiple types of specific gaming states are provided, and the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state is determined according to the type of the specific gaming state, so there are various conditions for transitioning the gaming state Thus, it is possible to suitably diversify the gameability that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

<Feature C2>
A gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A game at the time when the special gaming state occurs based on the type of lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends or the lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends Number of times corresponding to one of the plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times is associated with each of a plurality of types of number of conditions that include at least one of the types of states. The number of times information storage means (ROM of the main control board 920),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state is completed and the number-of-times condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means When the specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number-of-times information associated with the number-of-times information in the number-of-times information storage means occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state generated after the end of the special gaming state based on And a transition to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C2, the number-of-times information storage means stores the type of lottery result for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state or the lottery for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Based on the result, a plurality of types of times that can be used as a predetermined number of times for each of a plurality of types of conditions that include at least one of the types of gaming states at the time when the special gaming state occurs Number information corresponding to any number of times is stored in association with each other.

  If the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and the number of times condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means causes the special game based on the lottery result. When the number of specific game states corresponding to the number information stored in association with the number condition is generated in the number information storage means after the start of the advantageous game state generated after the end of the state, from the advantageous game state A transition is made to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of a specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state is diversified according to the type of the number of times condition, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are varied, and according to the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state Thus, it is possible to suitably diversify the gameability that the game state can be changed.

<Feature C3>
A gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The gaming state control means, when the advantageous gaming state is generated after the special gaming state is ended, when the predetermined gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is started, or A gaming machine, wherein, when the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, a transition is made from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C3, when the advantageous gaming state is generated by the gaming state control means after the special gaming state is ended, the specific gaming state is generated a predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is started. If a special gaming state occurs after the advantageous gaming state is started, the gaming state control means makes a transition from the advantageous gaming state to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, since the gaming state is changed not only when the specific gaming state occurs a predetermined number of times but also when the special gaming state occurs after the start of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state that occurs after the special gaming state You can diversify the gameplay that changes.

<Feature D0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, which is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state. A gaming machine configured to generate a special gaming state (big hit), and when the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is configured to change after the special gaming state ends,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result not accompanied by the occurrence of the special gaming state, one of a plurality of types of specific gaming states (small hits) is determined in advance for each type of the specific gaming state. It can be generated with a certain probability,
A game that differs from a predetermined gaming state to a predetermined gaming state when the number of occurrences of at least one specific gaming state among the plurality of types of specific gaming states reaches a predetermined number of times for the specific gaming state. A gaming machine comprising gaming state control means (main control board 920) for transitioning to a state.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, in recent years, as a lottery result by the lottery, a lottery results (for example, a small hit) that allows a game ball to win a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit are various. What was made into is also known (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine provided with the lottery result that allows the game ball to win the big winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature D0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state Will occur. When the special game state occurs, the game state may change after the special game state ends. In addition, when the lottery result is a predetermined second result that does not accompany the occurrence of a special gaming state, any one of a plurality of types of specific gaming states is generated with a probability determined in advance for each type of the specific gaming state. To do.

  When the number of occurrences of at least one specific gaming state among a plurality of types of specific gaming states reaches a predetermined number of times for the specific gaming state, the gaming state control means causes the predetermined gaming state to Transition is made to a gaming state different from the gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can generate the specific gaming state by selecting the second result as the lottery result, the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state is applied by applying the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state. It is possible to add a game property that the game state can be changed according to the game.

  In particular, there are multiple types of specific gaming states, and the number of occurrences of specific gaming states as conditions for transitioning gaming states is determined according to the types of specific gaming states, so there are various conditions for transitioning gaming states Thus, it is possible to suitably diversify the gameability that the game state can be changed according to the number of occurrences of the specific game state.

<Feature D1>
A gaming machine according to feature D0,
A game at the time when the special gaming state occurs based on the type of lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends or the lottery result that generates the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends A plurality of types of times that can be used as the predetermined number of times for each of the plurality of types of specific gaming states for each of the number of times conditions in a plurality of types of number conditions configured to include at least one of the types of states Frequency information storage means (ROM of the main control board 920) for storing the frequency information corresponding to any number of times in association with each other,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating the predetermined gaming state after the special gaming state is completed and the number-of-times condition is satisfied, the gaming state control means After the start of the predetermined gaming state generated after the end of the special gaming state, the specific gaming state of the number of times corresponding to the number of times associated with the number of times condition is generated in the number of times information storage means In such a case, the gaming machine changes from the predetermined gaming state to a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D1, the number-of-times information storage means stores the type of lottery result for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state or the lottery for generating the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Based on the results, for each of a plurality of types of specific gaming states in advance for each of the number of times conditions in a plurality of types of number of times conditions that include at least one of the types of gaming states at the time when the special gaming state occurs Number information corresponding to one of a plurality of types of times that can be used as the determined number is stored in association with each other.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result for generating an advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state and the number of times condition is satisfied, the special gaming state is determined based on the lottery result by the gaming state control means. After the start of a predetermined gaming state that occurs after the end of the game, when the number of specific gaming states corresponding to the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means in association with the number of times condition has occurred, from the advantageous gaming state A transition is made to a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the number of occurrences of a specific gaming state as a condition for transitioning the gaming state is diversified according to the type of the number of times condition, the conditions for transitioning the gaming state are varied, and according to the number of occurrences of the specific gaming state Thus, it is possible to suitably diversify the gameability that the game state can be changed.

<Feature E0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result A game machine that generates
A predetermined first gaming state (short-time probability variation gaming state) is generated over a predetermined execution period in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery is the first result, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for making a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time-short probability change game state)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
A specific display (post-transition gaming state display portion 1712) corresponding to predetermined gaming state information displayed when the predetermined second gaming state occurs and updated in accordance with the change in the remaining period. Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on a predetermined display device,
The specific display includes character information composed of a plurality of characters as at least a part of the predetermined gaming state information,
The display control means displays the specific display so that at least some of the characters constituting the character information are unrecognizable or difficult to recognize in a predetermined initial state where the specific display is displayed. At the same time, the specific display is updated so that the recognizability of the character information is enhanced in accordance with the change in the remaining period, and all characters constituting the character information can be recognized at a time when the remaining period is shorter than a predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by being displayed on the screen.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known one that diversifies the game by configuring so that different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-16). 189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine configured to continuously generate different types of gaming states after the special gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature E0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming performance suitably. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined gaming state is generated. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the gaming state control means generates a predetermined first gaming state over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to a predetermined second gaming state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state or the remaining period is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means. The predetermined display device includes a display corresponding to predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second gaming state is generated by the display control means, and a specific display that is updated in accordance with the change in the remaining period. Is displayed.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate the predetermined first gaming state and the predetermined second gaming state, it corresponds to the predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second gaming state occurs. Since the specific display is updated in accordance with the change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period, the player can update the second game state (second game state) from the current game state (first game state) by the updated second display. It is possible to recognize that the time when the gaming state transitions to (gaming state) will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, the specific display includes character information composed of a plurality of characters as at least a part of the predetermined game state information, and constitutes the character information in a predetermined initial state where the specific display is displayed. At least some of the plurality of characters are displayed so that they cannot be recognized or are difficult to recognize. Then, the specific display is updated so that the recognizability of the character information is increased in accordance with a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state, and in the time when the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, All characters constituting the character information are displayed in a recognizable manner.

  Therefore, since the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state decreases, that is, as the character information is completed as the time of transition to the second gaming state approaches, the recognizability of the character information gradually increases. The player's expectation for the second gaming state can be suitably increased.

<Feature F0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result A game machine that generates
A predetermined first gaming state (short-time probability variation gaming state) is generated over a predetermined execution period in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery is the first result, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for making a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time-short probability change game state)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
It is a display corresponding to predetermined game state information displayed when the predetermined second game state occurs, and at least the size thereof changes stepwise or small according to the change in the remaining period. Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a specific display (post-transition gaming state display unit 1712) on a predetermined display device,
When the display control means increases or decreases the size of the specific display step by step, the display control means temporarily displays a local maximum larger than the size of the specific display after the change, or temporarily displays a size smaller than the size of the specific display after the change. A gaming machine, wherein a minimal display is temporarily displayed and then the specific display after the change is displayed.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known one that diversifies the game by configuring so that different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-16). 189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine configured to continuously generate different types of gaming states after the special gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature F0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined gaming state is generated. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the gaming state control means generates a predetermined first gaming state over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to a predetermined second gaming state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state or the remaining period is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means. The predetermined display device is a display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second game state is generated by the display control means, and has at least a size according to a change in the remaining period. A specific display is displayed that is updated so as to increase or decrease gradually.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate the predetermined first gaming state and the predetermined second gaming state, it corresponds to the predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second gaming state occurs. Since the specific display is updated so that at least its magnitude changes stepwise larger or smaller according to the change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period, the player can change the second display to change stepwise larger or smaller. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the time when the game state transitions from the current game state (first game state) to the next game state (second game state) will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, when the size of the specific display is increased or decreased in stages, the specific display after the change is larger than the size of the specific display after the change, or the specific display after the change. It is displayed after temporarily displaying a temporary minimum display smaller than the size.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the specific display after the change is larger than the specific display before the change. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel as if the specific display has been enlarged. By letting the player feel that the specific display has become large in time, the player's way of thinking about the transition to the second gaming state can be moderated, so that the game for the transition to the second gaming state The expectation of the person can be increased suitably.

<Feature G0>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result A game machine that generates
A predetermined first gaming state (short-time probability variation gaming state) is generated over a predetermined execution period in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery is the first result, and the predetermined execution period ends. A game state control means (main control board 920) for making a transition to a predetermined second game state (non-time-short probability change game state)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the predetermined first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated. Remaining period information storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing possible information;
A first display (remaining period display unit 1711) that is updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage means when the predetermined first gaming state occurs; A second display (post-transition gaming state display unit 1712) corresponding to the predetermined gaming state information displayed when the predetermined second gaming state occurs and updated in accordance with the change in the remaining period. Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on a predetermined display device,
The display control means temporarily enlarges one of the first display and the second display at a plurality of first times constituting a part of a plurality of times provided within the execution period. , Reduced, or deformed, or a combination of two or more thereof, and at a plurality of second display times constituting a time different from the first time among the plurality of times, the first display and the A gaming machine characterized in that both of the second displays are temporarily enlarged, reduced, deformed, or a combination of two or more thereof.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, there is also known one that diversifies the game by configuring so that different types of gaming states can be continuously generated after the end of the special gaming state (for example, JP-A-2006-16). 189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine configured to continuously generate different types of gaming states after the special gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a predetermined gaming state is generated. In at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the gaming state control means generates a predetermined first gaming state over a predetermined execution period, and the predetermined execution period ends. In this case, a transition is made to a predetermined second gaming state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first gaming state is generated, information corresponding to the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period in the first gaming state or the remaining period is calculated. Possible information is stored in the remaining period information storage means.

  When the first gaming state occurs in the predetermined display device, the information stored in the remaining period information storage means (information corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period or the remaining period is calculated in the predetermined display device) The first display updated in response to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the possible information) and a display corresponding to the predetermined gaming state information displayed when the second gaming state occurs, A second display updated in response to the change is displayed by the display control means.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine configured to be able to continuously generate the predetermined first gaming state and the predetermined second gaming state, the first display is updated according to a change in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. Since the second display corresponding to the predetermined game state information displayed when the second gaming state occurs is also updated according to the change in the remaining period, the player can Recognizing that the time when the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is gradually approaching, the updated second display causes the next gaming state (first gaming state) to It can be recognized that the time when the gaming state transitions to the gaming state (second gaming state) will come soon. Thereby, when the first gaming state occurs, it is possible to suitably improve the gaming property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In particular, in a plurality of first times constituting a part of a plurality of times provided within a predetermined execution period in the first gaming state, one of the first display and the second display is temporarily In a plurality of second display periods that are displayed as enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or a combination of two or more of these, and that are different from the first period, the first display and the second Both displays are temporarily enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or a combination of two or more of these.

  Therefore, in the process in which the game state transitions gradually to the second gaming state, one of the first display and the second display temporarily changes, or both the first display and the second display are temporary. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player feels monotonous in the process, and accordingly, the player's expectation for the second gaming state can be suitably increased.

<Feature G1>
A gaming machine described in feature G0,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second period is set such that the interval of the second period becomes shorter as the remaining period decreases.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature G1, as the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period decreases, the interval of the second time period is shorter. Therefore, as the time when the game state transitions to the second game state approaches, The frequency with which both the first display and the second display change temporarily increases. The player can recognize that the timing at which the gaming state transitions to the second gaming state is approaching from the increase in the frequency at which both the first display and the second display change temporarily. Therefore, the player's expectation for the second gaming state can be suitably increased.

<Feature H0>
When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery is provided, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, which is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state (big hit) and generates a predetermined specific gaming state (small win) when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second result without the occurrence of the special gaming state There,
A special gaming high probability state (probability variable gaming state) in which the special gaming state occurs with a predetermined high probability when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a probability that the special gaming state will occur from the special gaming high probability state. A control that generates a low special game low probability state (normal game state) is configured to be executable, and as the special game high probability state, a first special game high probability state (short-term probability variation game state), Control can be executed to generate a second special game high probability state (non-short-time probability variable game state) in which a player can easily acquire a game value due to the occurrence of the specific game state compared to the first special game high probability state. Configured,
Generating the first special gaming high probability state over a predetermined execution period after the special gaming state is ended in at least a part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result; A game state control means (main control board 920) for ending the first special game high probability state and transitioning to the second special game high probability state when
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special gaming high probability state is generated after the special gaming state is finished, it corresponds to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period The remaining period information storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing the obtained information or information capable of calculating the remaining period;
Fluctuation display control means (sub-control board 940) for performing stop display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after the fluctuation display of the identification information is performed when the predetermined start condition is satisfied,
When the first special gaming high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state, a specific display that is updated according to a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information stored in the remaining period information storage unit ( Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the remaining period display unit 1711) on a predetermined display device,
The display control means includes
The lottery means obtains a lottery result without the occurrence of the special gaming state for the establishment of the last start condition in the remaining period, and after the end of the variable display for the establishment of the start condition, the second special In the case of generating a game high probability state, the identification display includes the specific display including at least predetermined zero information updated corresponding to the predetermined zero state in which the remaining period has disappeared, and the variation display of the identification information is the variation control. While displaying in synchronism with the timing started by the means or after the fluctuation display of the identification information is started by the fluctuation control means,
The first result is obtained by the lottery means for the satisfaction of the last starting condition in the remaining period, and the second special gaming high probability state is not generated after the end of the variable display for the satisfaction of the starting condition. In this case, the predetermined zero information is not displayed, or visibility is higher than when the second special gaming high probability state is generated after the end of the variable display for the establishment of the start condition. A gaming machine characterized by being displayed in a lowered state.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the start opening as a normal game, and when the big win is won by the lottery, the game ball becomes a special game state and the game ball becomes a big prize opening. There are known configurations that can win a large number of prizes. In addition, in this type of gaming machine, in recent years, as a lottery result by the lottery, a lottery results (for example, a small hit) that allows a game ball to win a big winning opening even if it is not a big hit are various. What was made into is also known (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-189873).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of the gaming machine provided with the lottery result that allows the game ball to win the big winning opening even if it is not a big hit.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming performance suitably. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and when the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special gaming state that is advantageous compared to the normal gaming state Will occur. If the lottery result is a predetermined second result that does not involve the occurrence of a special gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state occurs.

  A special gaming high probability state in which a special gaming state occurs with a predetermined high probability when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a special gaming low probability state in which the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is lower than the special gaming high probability state; The control is configured to execute the control, and the first special gaming high probability state is generated as a special gaming high probability state, and the player can play a game by generating a specific gaming state compared to the first special gaming high probability state. It is configured to be able to execute control that generates a second special game high probability state in which value is easily acquired. In at least part of the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first special gaming high probability state is generated for a predetermined execution period by the gaming state control means after the special gaming state ends, When the predetermined execution period ends, the first special game high probability state is ended and the state is shifted to the second special game high probability state.

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined first result and the first special game high probability state is generated after the special game state is ended, the predetermined execution period in the first special game high probability state Information corresponding to the remaining period or information capable of calculating the remaining period is stored in the remaining period information storage means. When the first special gaming high probability state occurs after the special gaming state ends, the information stored in the remaining period information storage unit by the display control unit (corresponding to the remaining period for the predetermined execution period) is displayed on the predetermined display device. Specific information that is updated in accordance with a change in the remaining period corresponding to the information or information that can be calculated).

  Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that the first special gaming high probability state and the second special gaming high probability can be continuously generated after the special gaming state ends, the first display changes in the remaining period with respect to the predetermined execution period. Therefore, the player is informed that the time when the gaming state transitions from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state is gradually approaching by the updated first display. Can be recognized. Thereby, when the first special gaming high probability state occurs after the special gaming state, the game property in which the player expects a transition of the gaming state from the first special gaming high probability state to the second special gaming high probability state Can be suitably improved.

  In particular, the second special game high probability state is obtained after the lottery result without the occurrence of the special game state is obtained for the establishment of the last start condition in the remaining period and the variation display for the establishment of the start condition is ended. Occurs, the specific display including at least the predetermined zero information updated in response to the predetermined zero state in which the remaining period disappears is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the identification information is started by the variation control means. Displayed synchronously or after the variation display of the identification information is started by the variation control means. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the predetermined zero information included in the specific display, so that the started variation display of the identification information is the last variation display during the execution period of the first special game high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game while expecting that the second special gaming high probability state will occur after the change display.

  On the other hand, in the case where the first special result is obtained for the establishment of the last start condition in the remaining period and the second special gaming high probability state does not occur after the end of the variable display for the establishment of the start condition. The predetermined zero information is not displayed, or the visibility is reduced compared to the case where the second special gaming high probability state occurs after the end of the variable display with respect to the establishment of the start condition. Displayed with status.

  Therefore, if a lottery result is obtained in which the second special gaming high probability state does not occur after the end of the variable display for the establishment of the last starting condition, the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined zero information, or Since it is difficult to visually recognize, it is difficult to recognize that the execution period in the first special game high probability state has expired. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to hold the expectation of the occurrence of the second special gaming high probability state as in the case where zero information is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the second special game high probability state after execution.

  This prevents the player from feeling that the game is not interesting based on the occurrence of a game state that is different from the situation expected by the player after misunderstanding after the end of the variable display for the last start condition. it can. Therefore, in a game in which the second special game state can occur after the end of the first special game state, it is possible to more suitably realize an improvement in gameability in which the player expects a transition to the second special game state.

<Feature J0>
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When the probability information changed by the setting change means is the probability information corresponding to the lowest probability among the plurality of probabilities stored in the setting storage means, the lowest probability or the lowest probability A gaming machine comprising: setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) that outputs setting output information corresponding to the probability so that the player can be identified.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine having the feature J0 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. The Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When the probability information changed by the setting change means is probability information corresponding to the lowest probability among a plurality of probabilities stored in the setting storage means, the lowest probability or the lowest probability The setting output information is output by the setting output means so that the player can be identified. Thereby, the player can be identified based on the output by the setting output means that the lowest probability is set as the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game. Therefore, the player can add a game property for identifying probability information about the gaming machine being played. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature J1>
A gaming machine described in feature J0,
The setting output means includes the probability information stored in the setting storage means when the probability information stored in the setting storage means is the probability information corresponding to a probability different from the lowest probability. A gaming machine characterized in that the corresponding setting output information is output so that the player can identify it.

  If the gaming machine has the feature J1, if the probability information stored in the setting storage means is probability information corresponding to a probability different from the lowest probability, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information is set The output means outputs the player in an identifiable manner. Therefore, not only the lowest probability but also the information corresponding to the probability different from the lowest probability as the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is output by the setting output means. Based on this, it can be suggested to the player. Thereby, the gameability which a player identifies the probability information about the game machine in game can be added more suitably.

<Feature J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B) provided in a gaming area (game area) where the gaming ball flows down, and into which the gaming ball can enter;
Game value giving means (payout control board 930) for giving a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance,
An entry information storage unit (base data storage unit 2492) that stores entry information corresponding to the entry of a game ball to the predetermined entrance, which is updated based on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance. )When,
A predetermined output unit (status display unit 2591);
Information output control means (payout control board 930) for causing the predetermined output unit to output the entry information stored in the entry information means or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the feature J2, entry information updated based on the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. The entry information stored in the entry information storage unit or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information is output to a predetermined output unit by the information output control unit.

  Since the entry information or the entry response information is output to the output unit, the game ball to the entrance is confirmed by an employee of the game hall (hall) confirming the entry information or the entry response information output to the output unit. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value with respect to the approach. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not the design value, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating it, and the performance of the gaming machine is the design value. It can suppress giving a disadvantage to a player by not being a street.

<Feature K0>
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output over a certain period, or And setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting the output of the setting output information over a certain period with a higher probability than a period different from the certain period. A featured gaming machine.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gameability of a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages. Note that this problem is common to the gaming machines described in the following feature K1.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine having the feature K0 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. The Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is set by the setting output unit for a certain period of time. The output of the set output information is output with a high probability over a certain period compared to a period different from the certain period.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is based on the output state of the information over a certain period. It can be suggested to the player. Thereby, the player can add the game property which estimates the probability information about the gaming machine in the game. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature K1>
Setting storage means (main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game RAM),
Input means (back setting switch 905, initialization) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities Switch 907),
Setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is not output over a certain period. Or setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting the output of the setting output information over a certain period with a lower probability than a period different from the certain period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In response to the above-described problem, a gaming machine having the feature K1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving gaming properties. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. The Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means by the setting changing means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be changed to the probability according to the operation information input by the input unit.

  When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine, the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage unit is set by the setting output unit for a certain period of time. The output of the set output information is output with a low probability over a certain period compared to a period different from the certain period.

  Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery is based on the output state of the information over a certain period. It can be suggested to the player. Thereby, the player can add the game property which estimates the probability information about the gaming machine in the game. For example, considering whether it is a gaming machine suitable for its own preference or a different gaming machine, the probability information estimated as one of the selection factors such as whether to continue the game or move to another gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameability of the gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages.

<Feature K2>
A gaming machine according to feature K0 or feature K1,
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B) provided in a gaming area (game area) where the gaming ball flows down, and into which the gaming ball can enter;
Game value giving means (payout control board 930) for giving a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance,
An entry information storage unit (base data storage unit 2492) that stores entry information corresponding to the entry of a game ball to the predetermined entrance, which is updated based on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance. )When,
A predetermined output unit (status display unit 2591);
Information output control means (payout control board 930) for causing the predetermined output unit to output the entry information stored in the entry information means or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the feature K2, entry information updated based on the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. The entry information stored in the entry information storage unit or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information is output to a predetermined output unit by the information output control unit.

  Since the entry information or the entry response information is output to the output unit, the game ball to the entrance is confirmed by an employee of the game hall (hall) confirming the entry information or the entry response information output to the output unit. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value with respect to the approach. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not the design value, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating it, and the performance of the gaming machine is the design value. It can suppress giving a disadvantage to a player by not being a street.

<Feature L0>
A predetermined entrance (a winning opening of the general winning devices 439A and 439B) provided in a gaming area (game area) where the gaming ball flows down, and into which the gaming ball can enter;
Game value giving means (payout control board 930) for giving a game value when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance,
An entry information storage means (base data storage unit 2492) for storing entry information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined entrance, which is updated based on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance. When,
Predetermined state information corresponding to a predetermined state (predetermined error) set in advance for the gaming machine is output without inputting predetermined operation information corresponding to a predetermined operation (operation on the initialization switch 907). An output unit (status display unit 2591),
Information output control means for causing the output unit to output the approach information stored in the approach information storage means or the approach correspondence information that can be output using the approach information when the predetermined operation information is input. (A payout control board 930).

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, in the game area where the game balls flow down, a winning hole from which the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, a passage leading the gaming ball to the winning hole, and a winning hole are not won. A large number of game nails are formed to form a passage leading to the outlet. A large number of game nails are driven and fixed to a game board that forms the outer shape of the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2008-161638).

  However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines. For example, in the conventional pachinko machines described above, the performance of the gaming machine may not be as designed due to individual differences in the gaming machine or the mounting angle, and a player who plays with such a gaming machine Could be detrimental.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature L0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably output information relating to the entry of the gaming ball into a predetermined entrance. That is, entry information updated based on the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entrance provided in the game area is stored in the entry information storage means. When predetermined operation information corresponding to a predetermined operation is input, the information output control means stores the entry information stored in the entry information storage means or the entry correspondence information that can be output using the entry information. However, the predetermined state information is output to the output unit without inputting the predetermined operation information.

  Since the entry information or the entry response information is output to the output unit, the game ball to the entrance is confirmed by an employee of the game hall (hall) confirming the entry information or the entry response information output to the output unit. It can be determined whether or not the performance of the gaming machine is in accordance with the design value with respect to the approach. Therefore, when it is determined that the performance of the gaming machine is not the design value, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as removing the gaming machine or not operating it, and the performance of the gaming machine is the design value. It can suppress giving a disadvantage to a player by not being a street.

  In particular, when a predetermined operation is input, the entry information or the entry response information is output to the output unit that outputs the predetermined state information without inputting the predetermined operation, so that the predetermined state Since the output part that is the output destination of information can be used as the output destination of the entry information or the entry correspondence information, the entry information or the entry correspondence information can be output while suppressing the cost.

<Feature L1>
A gaming machine according to the feature L0,
A notification unit (notification unit) that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine and notifies that the entry information or the entry correspondence information can be output to the output unit at a predetermined time (when a base error is detected). 2491),
The information output control means causes the output unit to output the entry information or the entry correspondence information when the notification by the notification unit is performed and the predetermined operation is input. Machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature L1, a notification unit provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine is notified at a predetermined time that the entry information or the entry correspondence information can be output to the output unit. The information output control means is configured to cause the output unit to output the entry information or the entry response information when the notification by the notification unit is performed and a predetermined operation is input. Therefore, a person who wants to check the entry information or the entry response information, such as an employee of the game hall, can recognize the time when the entry information or the entry response information is output to the output unit by the notification by the notification unit.

<Feature M0>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means;
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-information) that outputs at least setting information (setting suggestion information) corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means and a caution display (caution display) that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming. A control board 940), and a gaming machine comprising:
The information output means, when the player is in a predetermined game progress situation where a player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of the game value (game ball), compared to before the situation, the lowest winning probability of the setting information A gaming machine that outputs at least one of the minimum setting information corresponding to the above and the caution display with high probability.

  As an example of a gaming machine, a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming state in which a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the starting opening, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained as a gaming value when a big win is won by the lottery It has been known. Also, when the start switch is operated, the lottery is performed, and a plurality of reels are rotated, and when the stop switch is operated after that, each reel is stopped sequentially, which is effective when all reels are stopped. A slot machine is also known as an example of a gaming machine in which a prize is awarded when a combination on the line corresponding to a winning combination on the line stops and a medal as a gaming value is paid out. In addition, in a gaming machine that can acquire a gaming value according to the progress of a game, there is one that displays a warning image for preventing a player from being immersed in a game when a predetermined operation is performed. (For example, JP 2014-8184 A).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having a function of suppressing the sinking into the game. For example, in a configuration in which a reminder image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed, a reminder image is displayed even though the game is being performed in a favorable progress, thereby allowing the player to play a game. There was a possibility of not being able to enjoy. Note that this problem is common to the gaming machines described in the following feature M1.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine having the feature M0 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably output a display that calls attention to excessive gaming. That is, in a gaming machine provided with a game control means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the predetermined amount that the player has consumed a predetermined amount or more of the game value At least a minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, or a caution display that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming. One is output by the information output means with a higher probability than before the situation is reached.

  Accordingly, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is in the predetermined game progress status (that is, a situation where a predetermined amount or more of the game value is consumed) to recognize the minimum setting information or the caution display. It is possible to provide an opportunity to reconfirm the current situation once away from the gaming machine.

  In particular, if the minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability is displayed among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, the situation may not improve even if the game is continued. It is easy for the player to make a selection to cancel. Therefore, by displaying the minimum setting information, it is possible to suitably encourage the player who has fallen into a situation where a predetermined amount or more of the game value has been consumed to suppress the game.

  Note that the “predetermined game progress status” in the gaming machine described in the feature M0 is, for example, “a game value that is not obtained for the player as a lottery result by the lottery means compared to the first lottery result”. The lottery result may be a predetermined game progress situation extracted more than a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times compared with the number of times the first lottery result was obtained, or “predetermined Exceeding the predetermined number (for example, if the difference between the number of game balls fired and the number of payouts exceeds the predetermined number, if the number of fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number, the number of lost and jackpots in the special symbol lottery Or the situation where the player has continued to play the game over a predetermined period (continuous game time) ”.

<Feature M1>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery;
Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means;
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-information) that outputs at least setting information (setting suggestion information) corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means and a caution display (caution display) that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming. A control board 940), and a gaming machine comprising:
The information output means has a second lottery result in which a game value is not obtained for the player as a lottery result by the lottery means compared to the first lottery result or more than a predetermined number of times, or the first lottery result When the game progress status is extracted more than a predetermined number of times compared to the number of times the lottery result is obtained, the minimum corresponding to the lowest winning probability of the setting information compared to before the situation is reached A gaming machine that outputs at least one of setting information and the attention display with high probability.

  With respect to the above-described problems, a gaming machine having the feature M1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably take measures against the game. That is, in a gaming machine equipped with a game control means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the first lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the lottery result by the lottery means is compared with the first lottery result. And the second lottery result for which no game value is obtained for the player is extracted more than a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times compared with the number of times the first lottery result is obtained. In the case of a game progress status, at least one of the minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, or a caution display that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming However, the information output means outputs the information with higher probability than before the situation. Therefore, the predetermined lottery progress status (that is, the second lottery result in which the game value is not obtained for the player compared to the first lottery result as the lottery result by the lottery means exceeds the predetermined number of times, or The player who has fallen into the situation can easily recognize the minimum setting information or the caution display in a situation where the player is in a state extracted more than a predetermined number of times compared with the number of times the first lottery result was obtained. It is possible to promote the suppression of the game and provide an opportunity to re-confirm the current situation once away from the gaming machine.

  In particular, if the minimum setting information corresponding to the lowest winning probability is displayed among the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, the situation may not improve even if the game is continued. It is easy for the player to make a selection to cancel. Therefore, when the minimum setting information is displayed, the second lottery result in which the game value is not obtained for the player as compared to the first lottery result as the lottery result by the lottery means exceeds the predetermined number of times, or Thus, it is possible to suitably promote the suppression of the game to the player who has fallen into the situation extracted more than a predetermined number of times compared with the number of times the first lottery result is obtained.

<Feature N0>
A ball support portion (support surface 3452A3) for supporting the lower side of the game ball is provided and can be rotated around the vertical direction side. A first guidance state (entry prohibited posture) for guiding to a predetermined first direction side (passage portion 3218 side) and a second guidance state different from the first guidance state and different from the first direction side. A movable member (movable member 3452A) that can be switched to a second guidance state (entrance allowed posture) for guiding the game ball supported by the ball support portion toward the direction side (passage portion 3241 side);
The gaming machine, wherein the ball support portion is provided with an upstream ball support section that supports a game ball upstream of the rotation center of the movable member.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. A typical pachinko machine is provided with a movable member at the entrance that can be moved between a closed posture for closing the entrance of the winning device and an open posture for opening the entrance, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the winning space. A winning device configured to change the entry probability is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213044).

  When the number of game balls entering is set to be small in the conventional winning device, it is necessary to set a short period during which the movable member is in the open posture when the movable member is temporarily shifted from the closed posture to the open posture. However, in such a case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the situation in which the movable member is in the open posture by shortening the period in which the movable member is in the open posture.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature N0, a winning device that makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the state in which the movable member has transitioned to a predetermined state and to easily set the number of entering game balls. A gaming machine provided can be provided. That is, the movable member can be rotated about the vertical direction side, and can be switched between the first guiding state and the second guiding state by the rotating operation. The movable member has a ball support portion that supports the lower side of the game ball. The game ball supported by the ball support portion is guided to a predetermined first direction side when the movable member is in the first guidance state, and different from the first guidance state when the movable member is in the second guidance state. In the second direction side different from the first direction side.

  Since the ball support portion is provided with an upstream ball support section that supports the game ball upstream from the rotation center of the movable member, the game ball supported by the upstream ball support section is It is possible to generate a force for moving the game ball in the direction of returning to the upstream side by the centrifugal force due to the rotation. For this reason, for example, when the movable member is temporarily shifted (switched) from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, the game ball is guided in the second guiding state (that is, the second direction). Side) can make it difficult for the game ball to travel.

  Accordingly, when the movable member is temporarily shifted from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, the game ball is guided in the second guiding state while setting a long time for shifting to the second guiding state. It is possible to make it difficult to advance the game ball toward the second direction, that is, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls entering the second direction. Therefore, by using the movable member for the winning device, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the second guiding state, and the number of game balls entering the second direction side is reduced. A winning device that is easy to set up can be configured.

  Note that the “vertical direction side” in the feature N0 does not necessarily have to be the vertical direction, and may be a direction slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

<Feature N1>
A gaming machine according to the feature N0,
An inlet-side ball passage portion (passage portion 3217) that is provided upstream of the movable member and guides a game ball to the upstream side of the ball support portion of the movable member;
Between the entrance-side sphere passage portion and the upstream side of the sphere support portion, a stepped portion (support surface 3217A and support surface 3252A3 where the upstream side of the sphere support portion is vertically lower than the entrance-side sphere passage portion). A gaming machine characterized in that a step formed between the two is provided.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature N1, an inlet-side ball passage portion that guides the game ball to the upstream side of the ball support portion of the movable member is provided on the upstream side of the movable member. Between the entrance side ball passage portion and the upstream side of the ball support portion, a step where the support surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the ball support portion is vertically lower than the support surface of the game ball in the entrance side ball passage portion Is provided.

  Therefore, when the ball support portion in the movable member is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the upstream side to guide the game ball to the downstream side, the upstream side of the inlet side ball passage portion and the ball support portion The angle of the downward inclination in the sphere support portion can be reduced by the size of the step in the step provided between the two. The smaller the angle of descent in the ball support portion, the slower the traveling speed of the game ball by the ball support portion. Therefore, the second direction side induced in the second guidance state or the first direction induced in the first guidance state. It is possible to make it difficult to advance the game ball in one direction. Therefore, by using the movable member for the winning device, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the state in which the movable member has shifted to the second guidance state or the first guidance state, and the second direction side or the first direction. It is possible to configure a winning device that is easy to set with a small number of game balls entering the side.

  In addition, by providing a step between the entrance side ball passage portion and the upstream side of the ball support portion, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have entered the ball support portion from the entrance side ball passage portion from returning to the entrance side ball passage portion again. it can. In particular, in the case where the movable member is configured to be switchable between the first guidance state and the second guidance state by a pivoting operation centered on the vertical direction side, the upstream sphere support section is obtained by the pivoting operation. It is possible to suitably suppress the game ball supported by the return to the entrance-side ball passage portion again by the centrifugal force caused by the rotation.

<Feature N2>
A gaming machine according to feature N0 or feature N1,
The movable member is provided on the downstream side of the rotation center, and when the movable member is in the first guiding state, a game ball is formed on the first direction side (passage portion). 3218), and when the movable member is in the second guiding state, the ball outlet portion can discharge the game ball to the second passage portion (passage portion 3241) formed on the second direction side. (Exit part 3452A2),
On the sphere outlet side of the sphere support portion, the movable member is switched to the opposite direction side to the rotation direction when the movable member is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, and the sphere outlet portion side is vertically downward. A game machine characterized in that a ball escape portion (ball escape portion 3452A6) configured to include a step or a descending slope toward the ball exit portion side is provided.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature N2, since the ball outlet portion is provided on the downstream side of the rotation center of the movable member, when the movable member is in the first guiding state, the ball outlet portion The game ball can be discharged to the first passage portion formed on the first direction side, and when the movable member is in the second guiding state, the game ball is formed on the second direction side from the ball outlet portion. It can discharge | emit to a 2nd channel | path part.

  A ball escape portion is provided on the ball exit portion side of the ball support portion on the opposite side to the rotation direction when the movable member is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state. When the movable member is rotated and temporarily shifted (switched) from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the game ball supported by the ball support portion is relative to the rotation direction of the movable member. Therefore, since it is easy to move to the opposite direction side, it is easy to reach the ball escape portion provided on the opposite direction side.

  The ball escape portion is configured to include a step where the ball exit portion side is the lower side in the vertical direction or a downward slope toward the ball exit portion side, so that when the game ball reaches the ball escape portion, the game ball Can be discharged from the bulb outlet. Thus, when the movable member is temporarily shifted from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, the game ball supported by the ball support portion is positioned on the opposite direction side in the ball outlet portion during the transition. It can be easily discharged to the first passage portion on the first direction side.

<Feature N3>
A gaming machine according to any one of features N0 to N2,
The movable member is
Provided on the downstream side of the center of rotation, when the movable member is in the first guiding state, the game ball can be discharged to a first passage portion (passage portion 3218) formed on the first direction side. In addition, when the movable member is in the second guiding state, a ball outlet portion (exit portion 3452A2) capable of discharging the game ball to the second passage portion (passage portion 3241) formed on the second direction side. When,
A wall portion erected on an outer edge side of the ball support portion, the first wall portion restricting entry of a game ball into the second passage portion when the movable member is in the first guiding state ( A wall portion 3452A4),
A wall portion standing on an outer edge side of the ball support portion and forming the ball outlet portion with the first wall portion, wherein the movable member is in the second guiding state; A second wall portion (wall portion 3452A5) that restricts the entry of game balls into one passage portion,
The second wall portion is compared with the shape of the first wall portion on the side of the ball outlet portion when the second wall portion is viewed from the front when the second wall portion is viewed from the front. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured in a shape that is largely cut out.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature N3, a ball outlet portion is provided on the downstream side of the rotation center of the movable member. When the movable member is in the first guiding state, the game ball can be discharged from the ball outlet portion to the first passage portion formed on the first direction side, and when the movable member is in the second guiding state. Can discharge the game ball from the ball outlet portion to the second passage portion formed on the second direction side. When the movable member is in the first guiding state, on the outer edge side of the ball support portion, when the movable member is in the second guiding state and the first wall portion that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second passage portion A second wall portion that restricts entry of the game ball into the first passage portion is erected. The ball discharge portion is formed between the first wall portion and the second wall portion.

  The second wall portion is notched largely compared to the shape of the first wall portion on the side of the sphere outlet when the second wall portion is viewed from the front. When the movable member shifts from the first guidance state to the second guidance state, the entry restriction of the game ball to the second passage portion by the first wall portion is difficult to be released. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first passage portion by the second wall portion is difficult to be regulated. Therefore, the game ball supported by the ball support portion can easily enter the first passage portion during the transition when the movable member transitions from the first guidance state to the second guidance state.

  In addition, when the movable member shifts from the second guidance state to the first guidance state, the entry of the game ball into the second passage portion by the first wall portion is easily restricted, and the first by the second wall portion. It is easy to cancel the restriction of the game ball entering the passage. Therefore, even when the movable member shifts from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, the game ball supported by the ball support portion can easily enter the first passage portion during the transition.

<Feature P0>
It has a support surface (the upper surface of the movable member 3454A) for supporting the game ball, and is provided below the support surface while being inclined downward in a predetermined direction in a predetermined entry restricted state (entry prohibited posture). While restricting the entry of the game ball into the winning space (passage portion 3221), the winning space is shifted to the allowed entry state (allowed entry posture) in which the support surface is displaced with respect to the restricted entry state. A winning device (large winning device 3434) configured to allow a game ball to enter the inside,
When the support surface is displaced from the entry restriction state to the entry permission state, the support surface is displaced in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and an angle of the descending inclination is the entry restriction state. A gaming machine characterized by being displaced so as to have a slope that is steeper than in the case and guides a game ball supported by the support surface to the winning space.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. As a conventional pachinko machine, it is provided at a large winning opening formed to open upward in an inclined passage extending so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and at the entrance portion of the large winning opening A prize-winning door (movable piece) that closes the prize-winning port and has an inclined passage centering on a pivot shaft that faces the front-rear direction provided along the upstream side of the prize-winning port. A large state configured to be able to switch between a closed state (entrance restricted state) constituting a part of the vehicle and an open state (entry allowable state) in which the downstream side of the inclined passage is moved downward to open the large winning opening. There is a pachinko machine equipped with a prize opening door (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14630).

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine including a variable winning device in which the movable piece is a part of the inclined passage in the entry restricted state. For example, the support surface of the game ball in the movable piece that is a part of the inclined passage in the entry restricted state has a problem that it is easy to be loaded by the game ball passing over the support surface and is easily painful.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature P0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily maintain the support surface that supports the gaming ball in the winning device in a suitable state. In other words, the winning device has a support surface for supporting the game ball, and in a predetermined entry restricted state, the support surface is inclined downward in a predetermined direction and enters a winning space provided below the support surface. While the game ball is configured to restrict entry of the game ball, the game ball can be entered into the winning space by shifting to an entry permission state in which the support surface is displaced with respect to the entry restriction state.

  When the support surface is displaced from the entry restricted state to the entry allowable state, the support surface is displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the angle of descending inclination is steeper than that in the entry restricted state. It is displaced so as to have an inclination that guides the game ball supported by the support surface to the winning space.

  Thereby, when the support surface is displaced from the entry restricted state to the entry-permitted state, a part of the support surface that is displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction is on the side opposite to the predetermined direction. The support surface can be stored below another member provided on the opposite direction side. When a part of the support surface on the opposite direction side is stored below another member, the game ball cannot pass over the part (cannot contact), so the position of the load on the support surface is dispersed. Can do. Therefore, the progress of the aging deterioration on the support surface is suppressed, whereby the support surface can be easily kept in a suitable state.

<Feature P1>
A gaming machine described in feature P0,
A first link portion (movable member 3454A) including a support surface, a second link portion (first link portion 3454B) and a third link portion (second link portion) respectively connected to the first link portion. 3454C), and when one of the second link portion and the third link portion is operated, the support surface is displaced in the opposite direction side. The second link portion or the third link portion and the other link portion so as to displace the descending inclination angle in a direction that makes a steep inclination compared to before the operation of the one link portion. A gaming machine comprising a link mechanism for operating the first link portion.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature P1, a link mechanism including a first link portion including a support surface, and a second link portion and a third link portion respectively connected to the first link portion. By using one of the second link portion and the third link portion, the support surface can be displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the angle of the downward inclination can be set to the one link. It can be displaced in a direction that makes a steep inclination compared to before the operation of the part. Therefore, by using the link mechanism, switching between the entry restricted state and the entry permitted state in the winning device can be realized. Therefore, since the support surface can be mechanically displaced using the link mechanism, the support surface can be suitably displaced while suppressing the control burden.

<Characteristic Q0> (When game balls overlap vertically on the aisle)
A predetermined passage portion (passage portion 3215) continuous in the vertical direction;
A guide support portion (support surface 3217A) provided below the predetermined passage portion and contacting the lower side of the game ball and guiding the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion to the horizontal side (left side); In a gaming machine equipped with
The upper game ball stacked on the upper side with respect to the game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support part intersects the vertical direction side, or includes the direction side and the vertical direction side where the guide support part continues. It is provided with a guiding portion (an opening formed on the front side of the passage portion 3215) for guiding to a side in a predetermined direction (front side) intersecting with a plane and provided with a prize opening. Gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a structure in which a passage for a game ball is formed may be disposed in the game area. For example, a steep portion that is a passage for allowing a game ball to flow down at a steep angle with respect to a predetermined horizontal direction side such as the right direction, and a downstream of the steep portion are connected to advance the game ball to a predetermined horizontal direction side. There is a pachinko machine provided with a large winning device in which an advancing portion which is a passage to be formed is formed (for example, JP-A-2017-192528).

  However, in a gaming machine comprising an upstream passage continuous in the vertical direction and a downstream passage that is connected to the downstream side of the upstream passage and guides the game ball in a predetermined horizontal direction. There was still room for improvement. For example, there is a possibility that a ball clogging may occur due to a stack of game balls that flow down in the vertical direction along the upstream passage on the upper side of the game ball whose lower side is supported by the downstream passage.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature Q0, a ball composed of a gaming ball whose lower side is supported by a passage that guides the gaming ball in a predetermined horizontal direction side and a gaming ball stacked on the upper side of the gaming ball. A gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball biting) can be provided. That is, the game ball flowing down a predetermined passage portion continuous in the vertical direction side is in contact with the guide support portion provided below the predetermined passage portion, and is guided to the horizontal direction side by the guide support portion. Is done. When another game ball is stacked on the upper side with respect to the game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support part, the upper game ball among the stacked game balls is moved vertically by the guide part. Or a game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support unit, and the game, which is guided to a predetermined direction side that intersects a plane including the direction side and the vertical direction side where the guide support unit continues. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging (ball biting) due to game balls stacked on the upper side of the ball.

  In addition, the predetermined direction side in which the upper game ball is guided by the guide portion is also a side where a winning opening is provided. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball guided by the guide unit may enter the winning opening, so that the player can enjoy the situation where the game ball is guided to the predetermined direction side by the guide unit. .

<Feature Q1>
A gaming machine described in feature Q0,
A wall that guides the game ball whose lower side contacts the guide support portion to the horizontal direction side, and restricts the game ball from being guided to the predetermined direction side and the side where the winning opening is provided. Shaped regulation part (wall part 3217B),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the guide portion is an opening formed on the upper side of the restricting portion and facing the predetermined direction.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature Q1, the game ball whose lower side comes into contact with the guide support portion is not only guided to the horizontal direction by the wall-shaped restricting portion but also the predetermined direction side (the vertical direction side). Or a direction side intersecting with a plane including the direction side where the guide support part is continuous and the vertical direction side) and being guided to the side where the prize opening is provided is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball whose lower side is supported by the guidance support unit from being guided in a predetermined direction, and selectively select the gaming balls stacked on the upper side of the gaming ball whose lower side is supported by the guidance support unit. It can be guided in a predetermined direction.

  In addition, since the guide portion is formed as an opening on the upper side of the restricting portion and facing the predetermined direction, the upper end of the restricting portion that guides the game ball whose lower side contacts the guide support portion in the horizontal direction is guided. Can be used as the lower end of the part. Therefore, it is possible to realize the occurrence of ball clogging with a simple configuration by the game ball whose lower side is supported by the guide support portion and the game ball stacked on the upper side of the game ball.

<Feature R0>
A display unit (ordinary symbol display device 473) capable of displaying identification information;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined starting entrance (starter 436) as a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is established, the display unit displays the identification information in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means. Means (sub-control board 940);
An entry restricted state (entry prohibited posture) for restricting entry of a game ball into a predetermined entry portion (passage portion 3241) provided on the downstream side with respect to the starting entrance, and a game ball to the predetermined entry portion A movable member (movable member 3452A) capable of switching between an entry-permitted state (entry-permitted posture) that allows entry of
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined first gaming state, the variation execution means stops displaying the identification information (stop pattern indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result And a first operation control means (main control board 920) for shifting the movable member taking the entry restriction state to the entry permission state over a predetermined period,
The variation execution means is the first action control means as a variation time from when the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first gaming state and when the variation display is started until the first result is stopped and displayed. When the game ball is in the entry-permitted state, the game ball comes into contact with the movable member, and the variation in length that prevents the game ball in contact with the movable member from entering the predetermined entry portion due to the transition to the entry restriction state A gaming machine, comprising: an inaccessible variation executing means (main control board 920) for stopping and displaying the identification information over time.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. A typical pachinko machine is provided with a movable member at the entrance that can be shifted between a closed posture (entrance restricted state) that closes the entrance of the winning device and an open posture (entrance allowed state) that opens the entrance. Thus, a winning device configured to change the probability of entering the game ball into the winning space is provided (for example, JP-A-2017-213044). In such a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the period in which the movable member takes the open posture in the non-time-short state is set shorter than the period in which the movable member takes the open posture in the time-short state.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine in which the period during which the movable member is allowed to enter is different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the situation where the movable member is in the entry-permitted state because the movable member is in the entry-permitted state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature R0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can easily see the situation where the movable member has shifted to the entry-permitted state. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established by the game ball entering the predetermined starting entrance, the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and then the starting is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the identification display corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is stopped and displayed. On the downstream side of the starting entrance, switch between an entry restriction state that restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion and an entry allowance state that permits the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry portion. Possible movable members are provided.

  When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined first gaming state, the identification information corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the first operation control means, and the entry restricted state The movable member taking the position is shifted to the entry allowable state over a predetermined period.

  When a predetermined start condition is established in a predetermined first gaming state and the first result is stopped after the variable display is started, the variable time is in a state where the movable member is in the entry-permitted state The length of the game ball that has come into contact with the movable member is not allowed to enter the predetermined entry portion due to the transition of the movable member to the entry restricted state.

  Thereby, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first gaming state, the player can play the game ball on the movable member in the entry-permitted state at the timing when the first result is displayed as the stop display on the display unit. It can be visually confirmed that the player has touched and that the game ball has failed to enter the predetermined entry portion. Therefore, even when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied in the predetermined first gaming state, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the situation where the movable member has shifted to the entry-permitted state.

<Feature R1>
A gaming machine described in feature R0,
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined second gaming state, the variation execution means stops and displays the identification information corresponding to the first result (stop pattern indicating the first result) And a second operation control means (main control board 920) for shifting the movable member taking the entry restriction state to the entry permission state over a period longer than the predetermined period,
The variation execution means is the entry impossibility variation execution means as a variation time from when the start condition is established in the predetermined second gaming state and when the variation display is started until the first result is stopped and displayed. The game machine is characterized in that the identification information is stopped and displayed at a variation time of substantially the same length.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature R1, when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result in the predetermined second gaming state, the second action control unit responds to the first result. The identification information to be displayed is stopped and the movable member taking the entry restriction state is shifted to the entry permission state over a period longer than the predetermined period. When a predetermined start condition is established in a predetermined second gaming state, and the first result is stopped after the variable display is started, the variable time is substantially the same as the length of the non-entry variable execution means. Is done.

  Thus, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second gaming state, the player can display the stop display on the display unit in the same manner as when the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state. It is possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member that is allowed to enter at the timing when one result is displayed. Therefore, even when the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second gaming state, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the movable member has shifted to the entry-permitted state.

  In addition, in both cases where the predetermined start condition is satisfied in the predetermined first game state and where the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined second game state, the player displays a stop display on the display unit. 1 At the timing when the result is displayed, it is possible to visually recognize that the game ball has come into contact with the movable member in the entry-permitted state, so that the player identifies the difference according to the game state during the period when the movable member shifts to the entry-permitted state This makes it easy to identify whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

<Feature R2>
A gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 and R2,
The movable member is arranged on the downstream side where the path of the game ball is linearly continuous from the upstream side of the position where the starting entrance is provided via the position where the starting entrance is provided. A gaming machine characterized by

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature R2, the path of the game ball is movable from the upstream side to the downstream side where the start ball entrance is provided from the upstream side through the position where the start ball entrance is provided. Since the members are arranged, the variation in the period from when the game ball enters the start entrance (that is, after the predetermined start condition is established until the game ball contacts the movable member) is reduced. Can do.

  Therefore, the length of the variable display displayed on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition is set so that the game ball that has come into contact with the movable member in the state in which the movable member is in the permitted entry state, When the length is set so as not to enter the predetermined entry portion due to the transition to the state, occurrence of an error can be suppressed. Thereby, when a predetermined start condition is established in the predetermined first gaming state, the game ball has come into contact with the movable member in the entry-permitted state at the timing when the first result is displayed as a stop display on the display unit. The situation in which the player cannot visually recognize that the game ball has failed to enter the predetermined entry portion can be suppressed.

<Feature S0>
Opening / closing means (intermediate block 103) provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support portion (outer frame 101), and whether the opening / closing means is open with respect to the support portion can be detected. A game machine equipped with an open detection means (open / close detection switch 108),
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the predetermined setting information;
Input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability by the lottery means (back setting switch) 905, initialization switch 907),
When the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the predetermined detection state is not detected by the opening detection unit, the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information is used as the lottery unit. Information setting means (main control board 920) that can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by
Information output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940, and the like) that outputs predetermined information when the operation information is input by the input means in a state where the open detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not established. Acoustic devices 281, 282),
When the predetermined information is output, the information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, JP, 2007-202870, A).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine capable of setting a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as a winning probability in a game state transition lottery, in a plurality of stages. For example, in a gaming machine capable of changing the lottery probability in a situation where the opening and closing means such as a door is closed, even if an operation for changing the lottery probability is performed in the situation, the operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine. Since there is a case where the lottery probability cannot be found, there is a possibility that the lottery probability is illegally changed.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine having the feature S0 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a setting operation on the gaming machine. That is, operation information corresponding to an operation for selecting one setting information among a plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability by the lottery means is opened and closed by the support unit. The setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information when the input means is input in a state that is detected by the opening detection means if it is not the predetermined open state, the lottery by the lottery means In the configuration that can be set as the setting information corresponding to the probability, when the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the opening detection unit detects that the predetermined opening state is not detected, the information output unit outputs the predetermined information. Is output. When the predetermined information is output, the output of the predetermined information is stopped when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine.

  For this reason, an operator of a manufacturing plant or an employee of a game hall inputs operation information by an input means in a situation where it is detected that the opening / closing means is not in a predetermined open state, and opens and closes the opening / closing means after the input. Changes can be made. Therefore, after performing a setting change operation from the back of the gaming machine in a situation where a large number of gaming machines are arranged, the gaming machine that has performed the setting changing operation is easily recognized by outputting predetermined information, and the setting change operation It is possible to easily avoid a situation where a decision is made or a setting of another gaming machine is erroneously changed.

  In addition, when the operation information is input in a situation where it is detected that the opening / closing means is not in the predetermined open state, when the predetermined information is output, the front side of the gaming machine is stopped to stop the output. Since it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to appropriately suppress an unauthorized change in the lottery probability in the situation.

  In the feature S0, “can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means” means that the input operation information is the lottery by the lottery means at the timing when the input of the operation information by the input means is completed. It may be set as setting information corresponding to the probability, and after the input of the operation information by the input means is completed, the input operation information is drawn by the lottery means at the timing when the predetermined operation is performed. It may be set as setting information corresponding to the probability.

<Feature S1>
A gaming machine according to the feature S0,
When the predetermined information is output, the information output means performs at least the opening operation of the opening / closing means that is detected by the opening detection means as being in the predetermined open state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined notification is stopped when it is interrupted.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the characteristic S1, when predetermined information is output, a predetermined operation including at least an opening operation of the opening / closing means that is detected by the opening detection means as being in the predetermined opening state is performed. In such a case, the predetermined notification is stopped by the information output means. Therefore, when the operation information is input in a situation where it is detected that the opening / closing means is not in the predetermined open state, when the predetermined information is output, it is determined that the open / close means is in the predetermined open state in order to stop the output. Since at least the opening operation of the opening / closing means to be detected is required, it is possible to suitably suppress an unauthorized change in the lottery probability in the situation.

<Feature S2>
A gaming machine according to the feature S0 or the feature S1,
When the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the information setting unit detects that the predetermined detection state is not the predetermined opening state, the information setting unit thereafter sets the information setting unit in the predetermined opening state by the opening detection unit. A gaming machine, wherein the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information is set as the setting information corresponding to a lottery probability by the lottery means on condition that it is detected.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the characteristic S2, when the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the opening detection unit detects that the predetermined opening state is not established, the opening detection unit thereafter sets the predetermined opening state. On the condition that it is detected that there is, setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information is set by the information setting means as setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, in order for operation information input in a situation where it is detected that the opening / closing means is not in a predetermined open state to be set as setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by the lottery means, an employee of the game hall or the like Since it is necessary to perform an opening operation with respect to, it is possible to suitably suppress an unauthorized change in the lottery probability in the situation.

<Feature T0>
Opening / closing means (intermediate block 103) provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support portion (outer frame 101), and whether the opening / closing means is open with respect to the support portion can be detected. A game machine equipped with an open detection means (open / close detection switch 108),
Provided with information output means (main control board 920, sub-control board 940, acoustic devices 281 and 282) that outputs predetermined information when the opening detection means detects that the predetermined opening state is established;
The information output means is configured such that when the predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening detection means detects that the predetermined opening state is not established, the opening detection means performs the predetermined output. The gaming machine is characterized in that it outputs the predetermined information that is output when it is detected that it is in an open state.

  As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function capable of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a transition lottery from a normal gaming state to a gaming state advantageous to a player is known. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, a game venue manager or the like can change the setting of the winning probability by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key (for example, 2007-202870).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement for a gaming machine that can execute a winning probability setting operation or the like in a game state transition lottery by an operation on the back side of the gaming machine. For example, a loud warning sound (error information) may be output by a setting change operation legitimately performed by a game hall employee or the like. In such a case, there is a possibility that a player who does not fail will feel uncomfortable because of concern about the output error information. In addition, when the conditions for outputting error information increase in the succeeding model, it is necessary to prepare error information each time.

  On the other hand, a gaming machine having the feature T0 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a changing operation on the back side of the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening detection means detects that the opening / closing means is not open with respect to the support portion, information output is performed. The predetermined information is output by the means. The predetermined information is the same as the information output when it is detected that the predetermined open state is detected by the open detection means.

  The information that is output when it is detected by the opening detection means that the predetermined opening state is present is information that has a relatively large number of opportunities to be output. Therefore, the information is less likely to be noticed by the player. Therefore, when a predetermined change operation performed on the back side of the gaming machine is an operation that is legitimately performed by an employee of a game hall, etc. Can be suppressed.

  Also, by using the same information that is output when the opening detection means detects that the opening state is the predetermined opening state, the opening and closing means are not opened to the support portion. There is no need to prepare dedicated information as information that is output when a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in the state detected by the detection means.

  Also, workers in manufacturing factories and employees of amusement halls enter operation information with the input means in a situation where it is detected that the opening / closing means is not in a predetermined open state, and after that input, the opening / closing means is opened to change the setting. Can be executed. Therefore, after performing a predetermined changing operation from the back side of the gaming machine in a situation where a large number of gaming machines are arranged, the gaming machine that has performed the changing operation is easily recognized by outputting predetermined information, and the changing operation It is possible to easily avoid the situation of confirming or changing the setting of another gaming machine by mistake.

<Feature T1>
A gaming machine described in feature T0,
When the predetermined change operation is performed on the rear side of the gaming machine in a state where the information output unit detects that the predetermined open state is not detected by the release detection unit, After detecting that the predetermined open state is detected by the detecting means, the gaming machine stops outputting the predetermined information when the open detecting means detects that the predetermined open state is not detected .

If it is a gaming machine of feature T1,
When a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the predetermined state is not detected by the opening detection unit, the opening detection unit thereafter performs the predetermined opening state. After it is detected that there is, the information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when it is detected by the opening detection means that it is not in the predetermined open state.

  Therefore, when predetermined information is output because a predetermined change operation is performed on the back side of the gaming machine in a state where the opening / closing means is detected to be not in the predetermined open state, the output is stopped. Therefore, an opening operation of the opening / closing means that is detected as being in the predetermined open state and a closing operation of the opening / closing means that is detected as being not in the predetermined open state are required. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change operation.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to T1 may be applied in combination with any one or a plurality of features. The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: a launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on an operation of the launch operation means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes gaming parts arranged in a gaming area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing part among the gaming parts.

  A spinning machine such as a slot machine: a player starts rotation of the circulating body based on the operation of the start operation means, stops rotation of the circulating body based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that grants bonuses.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a gaming machine such as a ball game machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Game machine, 102 ... Front block, 252 ... Launching handle, 330 ... Launching device, 433 ... Lower major winning device, 434 ... Upper major winning device, 474 ... Nail state level display device, 479 ... Decoration symbol display device, 439A , 439B ... General winning device, 920 ... Main control board, 930 ... Payout control board, 940 ... Sub control board, 2439A, 2439B ... General winning device, 905 ... Back setting switch, 907 ... Initialization switch, 261 ... Press operation device , 1434 ... Right prize winning device, 1442A, 1442B ... Right start winning switch, 1452 ... Right entry restriction mechanism, 1532A ... First down passage portion, 1532B ... Second down passage portion, 1537, 1538 ... Protruding portion, 1711, 1711A ... remaining period display part, 1712, 1712A ... post-transition gaming state display part, 2491 ... notification part, 249 ... Base data storage unit, 2591 ... Status display unit, 3215 ... Passage unit, 3217 ... Passage unit, 3217A ... Support surface, 3217B ... Wall unit, 3218 ... Passage unit, 3221 ... Passage unit, 3432 ... Right start winning device, 3241 ... Passage section, 3252 ... Entry restriction mechanism, 3252A ... Moving member, 3352A2 ... Ball exit section, 3452A3 ... Support surface, 3452A4 ... Wall section, 3452A5 ... Wall section, 3452A6 ... Ball escape section, 3434 ... Big winning device, 3254 ... Access restriction mechanism, 3454A ... movable member, 3454B ... first link part, 3454C ... second link part, 281, 282 ... acoustic device

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising: opening / closing means provided to be openable / closable with respect to the support part; and opening detection means capable of detecting whether or not the opening / closing means is open with respect to the support part. Because
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the predetermined setting information;
An input means capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for selecting one of the plurality of setting information corresponding to each of a plurality of probabilities settable as a lottery probability by the lottery means;
When the operation information is input by the input unit in a state where the predetermined detection state is not detected by the opening detection unit, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is used as the lottery unit. Information setting means that can be set as the setting information corresponding to the lottery probability by
Information output means for outputting predetermined information when the operation information is input by the input means in a state where the opening detection means detects that the predetermined open state is not established;
When the predetermined information is output, the information output means stops outputting the predetermined information when a predetermined operation is performed on the front side of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.